synopsis course -...

SYNOPSIS COURSE

Faculty of Science and Natural

Resources

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE WITH HONORS

BPKP CODE PROGRAMME OFFERED

HS03 Conservation Biology

HS07 Industrial Chemistry

HS08 Mathematics with Economics

HS09 Mathematics with Computer Graphics

HS11 Environmental Science

HS21 Geology

HS22 Physics with Electronics

HS27 Aquaculture

HS40 Marine Science

HG07 Biotechnology

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN FORESTRY WITH HONORS

BPKP CODE PROGRAMME OFFERED

HG19 International Tropical Forestry

HG20 Nature Parks and Recreation

HG23 Forest Plantation and Agroforestry

HY11 Wood Technology and Industry

2 SYNOPSIS | Faculty of Science and Natural Resources

ST00102 BASIC MATHEMATICS This course covers basic mathematics in calculus which comprises topics such as: set, number, inequalities,

relation and function, limits and continuity, complex number, differentiation, integration, vector and matrix.

References

Strauss M.J, Bardley G.L dan Smith K.J. (2002). Calculus. Prentice Hall. New Jersey.

Amran Hussin, Sharifah Latifah- S. Abdul Kadir, Asma Ahmad Sharif, Yong Zulina Zubairi, Mohd. Sapiyan

Baba, Abdul Ghaffor dan Zazli Chik (1993). Matematik Tulen Pra-Universiti. Fajar Bakti Sdn. Bhd. Kuala

Lumpur.

Barnett, R. A., Ziegler, M. R. And Byleen, K. E. (2003). Analytic Trigonometry with Applications, 8th Edition.

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.: New York. College-level mathematics books.

Finney, Weir dan Giordano (2001). Thomas’ Calculus. Addison-Wesley Publish in g

Company. USA Ho Chong Mun dan Yeo Kiam Beng (2004). Complex Number. UMS.

Sabah.

ST00202 BASIC STATISTICS This course covers basic statistics which comprises of topics such as: probability, random variable, discrete

probability distributions, continuous probability distributions, parameter estimations, confidence interval,

hypothesis testing, linear regression and correlation.

References

Bluman, A.G. 2009. Elementary Statistics A Step by Step Approach. 7th ed. Mc Graw Hill. New York

Ahmad Syukri Y., Amran A., Darmesah G and Chin Su Na. Problems & Solutions in Statistics for Engineers & Scientists. 2008. Prentice Hall.

Miller, I & Miller, M. 2004. Mathematical Statistics with Applications 7th Edition. New Jersey : Prentice-Hall.

Wackerly, D.D., Mendenhall III, W., and Scheaffer, R.L. 2002. Mathematical Statistics with Applications, 6th

Edition. Thomson Learning:South Western Ohio.

Walpole and Myers. 2001. Probability and Statistics (6th edition). Prentice Hall. Ne w Jersey. Triola M.F. 2001.

Essentials of Statistics. Addison-Wesley Publishing Company. USA.

ST00702 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING & SIMULATION This course discusses the foll owing topics: computer programming and language programming, types of data,

conditioned statements, repeated statements, procedures and functions, sets and structures, development

methods of programs and simulations, the basic concept of programming and simulation for daily life,

methods of problem solving, input-output methods and file systems, an d styles of programming.

References

Hanly & E.B. Koffman. 1996. Problem Solving and Program Design in C 2nd Edition. Addison-Wesley Publishing

Co. Schildt, H. 1997. Teach Your self C 3rd edition. The McGraw Hill Companies.

Antonakos, J. L. 1996. Application progr amming in structured C. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Deitel, H. M &

Deitel, P. J. 1994. C: How To Program 2 nd Edition. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Banahan, M. , Brady, D. & Doran,

M. 1991. The C Book 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, Kent.

ST00803 STATISTICAL PROGRAMMING PACKAGE This subject discusses an introduction using a statistical programming package; e.g. SPSS. The course starts off

from basic concepts on statistics and data collection, and then focuses on an introduction using the statistical

programming package. In addition, students are exposed to analyze statistical data using descriptive statistics,

correlation, simple regression, t-test and ANOVA.. For non-normal data, students are exposed with

transformation and if the data is still not normal, the students are exposed with non-parametric techniques using

Mann-Whitney and Kruskal-Wallis tests.

References

Field, A., 2013, Discovering Statistics Using IBM SPSS Statistics 4th Edition, SAGE Publications Ltd.

Coakes, S. J., 2012. SPSS Version 20.0 for Windows: Analysis without Anguish, John Wiley and

Sons Australia Ltd.

Carver, R. H. and Nash, J. G., 2011. Doing Data Analysis with SPSS: Version 18.0, Thomson Brooks/Cole,

Duxbury.

Triola, M. F., 2010. Essentials of Statistics, Pearson Education, Inc, United States.

Pallant, J., 2010. SPSS Survival Manual: A step by step guide to data analysis using SPSS 4th

Edition, Open

University Press.

ST00402 BASIC BIOLOGY This course will provide basic concept in life from cells and biological diversity especially for plant and animal

kingdom. The student will also exposed to organism interaction with the environment.


References Stern, K. R. 2006. Introductory Plant Biology. 10

th Edition. Mc Graw Hill International Edition.

Campbell, N. A. 1996. Biology. 4th

Edition. The Benjamin Cummings Pub. Com. Inc. California. Brum, G. D. & McKane. L.K. 1989. Biology: Exploring Life. John Wiley and Sons. Inc. New York.

ST00702 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING AND SIMULATION This course discusses the following topics: computer programming and language programming, types of data, conditioned statements, repeated statements, procedures and functions, sets and structures, development methods of programs and simulations, the basic concept of programming and simulation for daily life, methods of problem solving, input-output methods and file systems, and styles of programming. References Hanly & E.B. Koffman. 2009. Problem Solving and Program Design in C 6th Edition. Addison-Wesley Publishing Co. Schildt, H. 1997. Teach Yourself C 3rd edition. The McGraw Hill Companies. Antonakos, J. L. 1996. Application programming in structured C. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Deitel, H. M & Deitel, P. J. 2009. C: How to Program 6th Edition. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Banahan, M., Brady, D. & Doran, M. 1991. The C Book 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, Kent.

ST00803 STATISTICAL PROGRAMMING PACKAGE This subject discusses an introduction using a statistical programming package; e.g. SPSS. The course starts off from basic concepts on statistics and data collection, and then focuses on an introduction using the statistical programming package. In addition, students are exposed to analyze statistical data using descriptive statistics, correlation, simple regression, t-test and ANOVA. References Carver, R H & Nash, J G, 2006. Doing Data Analysis with SPSS, Thomson Brooks/Cole, Duxbury. Coakes, S J, Steed, L, & Price, J, 2008. SPSS Analysis without Anguish, John Wiley and Sons Australia, Ltd. Foster, J J, 1998. Data Analysis Using SPSS for Windows, SAGE Publications, London. Johnson, R & Kuby, P, 2004. Elementary Statistics. Thomson Brooks/Cole, Duxbury. Triola, M F, 2005. Essentials of Statistics,Pearson Education, Inc, United States

ST00902 SCIENTIFIC WRITING The purpose of this course is to help students of the science s to prepare reasonabl y good manuscripts one that is understandable by peers and that would be acceptable for publication by journals. Basic principles that are acceptable by most disciplines of science will be discussed. The nature of scientific thinking and scientific writing and the prerequisites of a scientific paper will be outlined. Ethics in the practice of science will be emphasized. Rules for the construction of individual elements of the scientific paper (title, the abstract, the introduction, methods & materials, results, discussion, acknowl edgement & bibliography) will be discussed. Information on how to prepare illustrative material and on the postwriting stages of publication (the submissi on, review and publication processes) will be reviewed. Adaptation of these rules to related scientific publications such as review papers, oral presentations, poster, presentations, conference reports, book reviews and thesis will be presented. The new electronic publishing formats, the world wide web (intern et), electronic journal and e-mail will also be covered. Throughout the course, the grammatically correct use of the English language will be emphasized. References Panduan Penulisan Disertasi. 2008. Edisi ke‐4, Sekolah Sains dan Teknologi, Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Kota Kinabalu. Matthews, J. R. & Matthews, R. W. 2007. Successful Scientific Writing: A Step‐by‐Step Guide for the Biological and Medical Sciences. 3 rd Ed. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. Peat, J., Elliot, E., Baur, L. & Keena, V. 2002. Scientific Writing: Easy When You Know How. BMJ Book, London. Anderson, J. & Poole, M. 2001. Assignment and Thesis Writing. John Wiley and Sons Ltd. Brisbane. Day R. A. 1998. How to Write & Publish a Scientific Paper. Oryx Pres, Phoenix. Arizona.

ST33903 BIOMETRY AND EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN This course is designed for biology students in the field of foresty, agriculture, zoology, botany, aquaculture, plant technology and conservation biology, who are involving in biological experiments and research. The topics will cover the approaches in descriptive statistics include data organising and summarizing, and also the deduction and presentation of data. In addition to descriptive statistics, concept of sampling and population, estimation methods and hypothesis testing in inference statistics will be included. Both parameter and non-parameter test will be covered. The issue of blocking and control in experimental design and statistical analysis will be discussed This is an applied course and student will collect real datafrom field works. This course will emphasise on the understanding of student in theories, basic ideas or concepts for each statistical test. Mean while, student will be using computer software (SPSS) during practical class for the data analysis.


References Bernard, H. & Yoneda, M. (2005). Ecological Methodology in Conservation Biology: Part II, Elementary Statistics and Analysis of Experiment. ITBC, UMS & BBEC Programme. Fowler, J., Cohen, L. & Jarvis, P. (1998). Practical Statistics for Field Biology (2nd edn.). John Wiley & Sons. Mead, R., Curnow, R.N. & Hasted, A.M. (1993). Statistical Methods in Agriculture and Experimental Biology (2nd edn.). Chapman & Hall. Quinn GP, Keough MJ (2003) Experimental Design and Data Analysis for Biologists. Cambridge University Press. Zar, J.H. (1999). Biostatistical Analysis (4th edn.). Prentice Hall. Sokal, R.R. & Rohlf, F.J. (1995). Biometry (3rd edn.). Freeman and Company Coakes, S.J. & Steed, L.G. (2003). SPSS, Analysis Without Anguish, Version 11.0 for Windows. John Wiley & Sons. CONSERVATION BIOLOGY PROGRAMME (HS03) SB13103 INTRODUCTION TO CONSERVATION BIOLOGY This course discusses the importance of conservation and/or protection of environmental and biological components to mankind and several ecosystems. The relationship between man and the environment along with their related problems will be discussed from local and global perspectives. The importance of biological diversity and its relationship with environmental factors and impact of human activities on them will be put forward. Methods of conservation by in-situ or ex-situ will also be discussed, followed by strategic approaches in environmental management encompassing the protection of biological diversity. The final part of this course will touch on several variables in conservation biology such as knowledge on taxonomy, the existing rules and regulations and influence of politics on the management initiatives. References Primack, R. B. 2014. Essentials of Conservation Biology, Sixth Edition. Sinauer Associates Inc., Massachusetts, USA. Sodhi, N. S. and Ehrlich, P. R. 2010. Conservation Biology for All. Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK. Hunter, M. L. J. and Gibbs, J. 2007. Fundamentals of Conservation Biology, Third Edition. Blackwell Publishing, Massachusetts, USA. Groom, M. J., Meffe, G. K. and Carroll, C. R. 2006. Principles of Conservation Biology, Third Edition. Sinauer Associates Inc., Massachusetts, USA. Dyke, F. V. 2008. Conservation Biology: Foundations, Concepts, Applications, Second Edition. Springer Science, Illinois, USA.

SB13203 MICROBIAL DIVERSITY This course deals with the diversity of microbes. Basic knowledge on microbial structures and functions will be taught prior to study of microbial taxonomy and diversity. References Ingrahan, J.L.; Ingrahan, C.A. 2000. Introduction to Microbiology. Second edition. Brooks/Cole USA. Gross, T.; Faull,W.; Ketteridge, S. and Springham, D. 1995. Introductory Microbiology. Chapman & Hall London. Tortora, G.I.; Funke, B.R.; Case C.L. 1995. Microbiology: An Introduction. The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company Inc. California. Alcamo, I.E. 1994. Fundamentals of Microbiology. 4th ed. The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co. NC. New York. Desponmier, D.D.; Gwadz, R.W. & Hotez, P.J. 1994. Parasites Diseases. 3 rd Edition. Springer-Verlag: London.

SB13403 ANIMAL DIVERSITY This course gives introduction to invertebrates and vertebrates. The first part covers phylogenetic relationship among invertebrate groups, while the second part covers vertebrates. This includes evolution, systematics, anatomy, physiology, ecology and behaviour. At the end of the course, discussions on biological questions and variety of groups will be covered. References Phillipps Q and Phillipps K. 2016. Phillipps' Field Guide to the Mammals of Borneo and Their Ecology: Sabah, Sarawak, Brunei, and Kalimantan. Princeton University Press. Hickman C Jr; Keen S; Larson A; Eisenhour D; I’Anson H and Roberts L. 2013. Integrated Principles of Zoology. 16th Edition. McGraw-Hill New York. Pough, F. H., Heiser, J. B., and Mc Farland, W. N. 2012. Vertebrate Life. 9th ed. Prentice Hall. New Jersey.

SB13603 CELL BIOLOGY AND GENETICS Provides an introduction to cell organisation including concepts and Theory of Cell; cell structures and functions; methods in cell studies; comparison between eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells, energy and metabolism of cell. This course also introduces the chromosome, mitosis and meiosis, principles of heredity; DNA as carrier of


genetic information; RNA and protein synthesis, regulatory genes as control of genetic expression.; genetic engineering, human and populations genetics. References Watson, J.D. 2013. Molecular Biology of the Gene. 7th edition. Cold Spring Harbour, New York. 876 pages. Peirce, B.A. 2010. Genetics Essentials. W.H. Freeman & Company, New York. 536 pages Brooker, R. J. 2009. Genetics: Analysis and Principles. 3rd edition. McGraw Hill, New York. 823 pages

SB23103 ENTOMOLOGY This course is an introduction to the biodiversity of the insects. This course revolves around the emergence of the insects in the animal kingdom millions of years ago and its evolution since they first appear on the terrestrial realm into various groups at present. Vast diversity and variable of the insects among the animal kingdom will be explained and linked to their morphology, anatomy and physiology, sensory system and behaviour, reproduction and development, arthropod-plant interactions, parasitism, communication and sociality. Individual insect orders will be explained to students according to evolutionary tree of insects. References elaiosome nutrition and seed dispersal. Acta Oecologica 38:71-76 Funch RR (2015) Termite mounds as dominant land forms in semiarid northeastern Brazil. Journal of Arid Environments 122: 27-29 Adams RMM, Jones TH, Jeter AW, De Fine Licht HH, Schultz TR, Nash DR (2012) A comparative study of exocrine gland chemistry in Trachymyrmex and Sericomyrmex fungus growing ants. Biochemical Systematics and Ecology 40: 91-97 Billen J (2015) Insect exocrine glands. Arthropod Structure & Development 44:399-400 Fokuhl G, Heinze H, Poschlod P (2012) Myrmecochory by small ants – Beneficial effects through Anderson, D.T. (ed.) 2001. Invertebrate Zoology (2nd Edition). Oxford University Press. (ITBC’s library, UMS). Barnes, R. D. 1987. Invertebrate Zoology (5th Edition). Saunders College Publishing.893pp.(ITBC’s library, UMS). Gullan, P. J. & Cranston, P. S. 2000. The Insects: An Outline of Entomology (2nd Edition).470pp. (ITBC’s library, UMS). McGavin, G.C. 2001. Essential Entomology: An Order-by-Order Introduction. Oxford University Press. 318pp. (ITBC’s library, UMS). Rupert, E.E., Fox, R. S. & Barnes, R. D. 2003. Invertebrate Zoology: A Functional Evolutionary Approach. Brooks Cole; 7 edition. 1008 pp. (newly requested).

SB23303 POPULATION BIOLOGY AND EVOLUTION The lectures will cover population ecology, population genetics and evolution, with an emphasis on ecological and evolutionary principles. Understanding of basic genetics is essential as is a familiarity with ecology of organisms (plants and animals). Reading will also be assigned on a regular basis from other major texts and the primary literature. Group work will be assigned and presentation required. References Bell, G. 2015. The evolution of life. Oxford University Press. Neal, D. 2004. Introduction to population biology. Cambridge University Press. Stearns, S. C. and Hoekstra, R. F. 2000. Evolution: Introduction. Oxford University Press. Futuyma, D. J. 1998. Evolutionary Biology (3rd Ed.). Sinauer Associates, Inc. Hastings, A. 1996. Population Biology: Concepts and Models. Springer-Verlag.

SB23503 PLANT DIVERSITY This course is design to introduce the characteristics of the major phyla of plants. This course will also provide students with an understanding of the processes of reproduction and development in plants. Major groups of land plants and considers their diversity, evolution, classification,structure around the world. Structured around the major groups of plants: lichens, mosses, ferns,conifers and flowering plants, as well as fungi. Students will be introduced to the diversity of Gymnosperms and Angiosperms and will receive instruction in the identification of major families of flowering plants based on their vegetative parts. The practical component of the course is designed to expose the students to the diversity of local plants References Stuessy, T.F., 2008. Plant Taxonomy : The systematic evaluation of comparative data. Columbia University Press, New York. Campbell & Reece, 2005. Biology . 7th ed. Pearson Education, Inc. 2. Uno,G., Storey,R., Moore, R., 2001. Principles of Botany. McGraw-Hill Higher Education. New York. Stern, K. R., 2006. Introductory Plant Biology. 10th ed. McGraw-Hill Int. Pub.

SB23203 SYSTEMATICS C Current knowledge in the systematics including principles and methods will be explained. The student will be informed the most recent knowledge of evolution relationships of plants and animals and how all taxa are classified.


References Wiley E.O & Lieberman B.S. 2011. Phylogenetics: Theory and Practice of Phylogenetic Systematics, 2nd Edition. Wiley-Blackwell Hetterscheid W., Van den Berg R.G. & Brandenburg W.A. 2010. Plant Nomenclature and Taxonomy. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Simpsom, M. G. 2006. Plant Systematics. Elsevier Academic Press. 590 pp Stearn, T. W. 1995. Botanical Latin. 4th Edition. The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company, INC. 1190pp. Stuessy, T. F. 1990. Plant Taxonomy: The Systematic Evaluation of Comparative Data. Colombia University Press, New York. 514pp Jeffrey, C. 1973. Biological Nomenclature. Edward Arnold. 69pp

SB23403 ECOLOGY Provides an introduction to ecological processes including concept of niches, habitat, ecosystem,resources, energy and nutrient cycles. Emphasis also on the interaction of organisms (exploitation, mutualism and competition) in an ecosystem, and between organism with the environment such as physical, biotic and chemical factors. The pattern of species diversity and related with the biodiversity conservation also will be discussed. Species adaptation and evolution are included. Extinction, immigration and model of species equilibrium for an area also discussed. This course needs to carry out fieldwork. Mini project and presentations also required to enhance the soft skills of the students. References Molles, M. C. Jr. 2015. Ecology, Concepts and Applications. McGraw-Hill, USA. Scheiner, S. M. & Willig, M. R. 2011. The Theory of Ecology. Chicago Press. Begon, M., Townsend, C. R. & Harper, J. L. 2006. Ecology: From Individuals to Ecosystem. Blackwell Publishing, UK. Smith, B. L. 1996. Ecology and Field Biology. 5th Ed. HarperCollins, USA. Dudgeon, D. 2011. Tropical Stream Ecology. Academic Press.

SB23602 PRESERVATION AND COLLECTION MANAGEMENT This course reviews the roles and importance of biological collections. It emphasizes in giving broad familiarity with the natural biota and training in the methods for the study, preservation,maintenance, and display of biological specimens. The course provides information on natural history, coupled with basic understanding of the materials, museum standards, problems or threats common to collections and management of the data collections. Students also learn collection, curatorial and identification techniques for selected groups of organisms. References Matassa F. 2011. Museum Collections Management: A Handbook. Facet Publishing. Xavier-Rose A. 2011. Integrated Pest Management for Collections: Proceedings of 2011:A Pest Odyssey, 10 Years. English Heritage. Simmons J.E. 2006. Things Great and Small: Collections Management Policies. American Alliance Of Museums. Pinniger D. 2001. Pest management in museums, archives and historic houses. Archety Publications Ltd. Great Britain. Davies P. 1996. Museums and the Natural Environment. The role of Natural History Museums in Biological Conservation. London, Leicester University Press. 6. Latest online journals will be uploaded according to lecture topics in Smart2UMS for readings and reference

SB24002 BIOGEOGRAPHY This course provides an overview to the distribution of plants and animals across the surface of the Earth in both a spatial and temporal context. Patterns of species distribution and biodiversity will be examined, as well as the important processes that produce the patterns, at many differentscales. Abiotic (e.g. climate, topography, soil), biotic (e.g. competition, dispersal) and historical (plate tectonics, evolution, climate change) factors are the controlling mechanisms that shape these patterns. Upon completion of this course, students should have a much greaterappreciation and understanding of the plant and animal life that surrounds them. References Slik et al. 2011. Soils on exposed Sunda shelf shaped biogeographic patterns in the equatorial forests of Southeast Asia. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 108(30):12343-7. doi:10.1073/pnas.1103353108. MacDonald, G. 2003. Biogeography: Introduction to Space, Time and Life. John Wiley & Sons. Sémah, A-M. & Sémah, F. 2012. The rain forest in Java through the Quaternary and its relationships with humans (adaptation, exploitation and impact on the forest). Quatenary International 249: 120 – 128 Whitaker, R.J. 2002. Island Biogeography: Ecology, Evolution and Conservation. Oxford University Press. Goiman, M. L. 1979. Island Ecology. Chapman and Hall. London Groombri-e, B. (ed.) 1992.Global biodiversity.

Chapman and Hall. London. Summerfield, M. 1991. Global Geomorphology. Logman Scientific. Harlow. Huggett, R. J. 1998.

Fundamentals of Biogeography. Routledge. Myers, A. and Giller, P. S. (ed.) 1988. Analytical Biogeography. An Integrated Approach to the Study of Animal

and Plant Distributions. Chapman and Hall.


SB24202 NATURE TOURISM PRODUCTS Nature tourism is an imperative border-crossing field in contemporary nature conservation, which is able to assimilate protection and utilization of natural resources sustainably. Nature tourism is a dynamic and ever expanding field parallel to the knowledge expansion pertaining to biodiversity and biosystematics in terms of the knowledge on flora and fauna, as well as research methodology, especially in inventory based research on flora and fauna. The course will provide exposure on the understanding of nature tourism and the contributions of the field towards nature conservation. Fundamentals in inventory based research, and floral and faunal inventory data analysis will also be delivered. Subsequently, the course will touch on the potential evaluation concept of flora and fauna to be made into nature tourism products. This includes using a 7-criteria nature tourism product prospecting model. Several examples of nature tourism product prospecting will also be discussed. The course involves fieldworks. References Mosbah, A. & Al-Khuja, M.S.A. (2014). A Review of Tourism Development in Malaysia. European Journal of

Business and Management 6(5): 1-9. Smith, R.J., Verissimo, Smith, R.J., Verissimo, D., Issac, N.J.B. & Jones, K.E. (2012). Identifying Cinderella species: Uncovering

mammals with conservation flagship appeal. Conservation Letter 00: 1-8. Kueh B.H. (2004). The new marketable face of nature tourism: Anurans. M/s. 146 – 149 Dlm. Maryati M., Monica

S., Arman-Hadi F. & Tachi, T. (pnyt.). Contemporary Topics in Tropical Biology and Conservation Research in Borneo: Proceedings of Research Seminars at Institute for Tropical Biology and Conservation, Universiti Malaysia Sabah from October 2002 to March 2004. Institut Biologi Tropika dan Pemuliharaan, Universiti Malaysia Sabah, Kota Kinabalu.

Kueh B.H. (2006). ‘Anurans Tourism’ in Crocker Range Park: Convergence of research and local people involvement towards conservation. M/s. 58 – 68 Dlm. Laurentius N.A. & Titol Peter M. (pnyt.). Proceedings Of The Tenth Sabah Inter-Agency Tropical Ecosystem (SITE) Research Seminar: Towards Converging Community

Involvement In Protected Areas Management In Sabah: Issues And Challenges. Sabah Wildlife Department, Kota Kinabalu.

Kueh B.H., Kiruba-Devi L., Chew, D.T.W. & Maryati M. (2006). Anurans (frogs and toads): New nature tourism product for conservation and local people well-being. Dlm. Borneo In the New Century: Proceedings Of The ‘8th Biennial International Conference Of The Borneo Research Council’. Borneo Research Council (BRC)/Institute of East Asian Studies (IEAS), Kota Samarahan.

Kueh B.H. & Maryati M. (2005). Collection, management and utilization of anuranspecimens and data for conservation. M/s. 439 - 450 Dlm. Lau S. (pnyt.). Achieving Environmental Sustainability in the 21st Century: Proceedings of the

International Conference on Natural Resources and Environmental Management (NREM 2005). Institut Kimia Malaysia (Sarawak), Universiti Malaysia Sarawak, Natural Resources and Environmental Board (Sarawak) and Sarawak Development Institute (SDI), Kuching. Mosbah, A. & Al-Khuja, M.S.A. (2014). A Review of Tourism Development in Malaysia.European Journal of Business and Management 6(5): 1-9.

Weaver, D.B. (1998). Ecotourism In The Less Developed World. CAB International,Wallingford. Weaver, D.B. (2001). The Encyclopedia Of Ecotourism. CABI Publishing, USA. Whelan, T. (1991). Ecotourism and its role in sustainable development. M/s. 3 – 22 Dlm.

SB24402 NATURE INTERPRETATION Nature interpretation deals with many skills and processes as well as communication whichinvolved in the efforts to interpret ecological issues to public in order to raise awareness.Therefore, this course will introduce and strengthen the various aspects of communication applied in nature interpretation. Different tools, methods and systems which are currently used in improving nature interpretation quality will be explained. References Gilbertson, K., Bates, T., McLaughlin, T. and Ewert, A. (2006). Outdoor Education:Methods and Strategies. Human Kinetics. United States. Knudson, D. M., Beck, L. and Cable, T. T. (2003). Interpretation of Cultural and NaturalResources. Venture Publishing. United States. Ham, S. H. (2013). Interpretation – Making a Difference on Purpose. Fulcrum Publishing.United States. Wilkinson, A. and Ward, C. W. (2006). Conducting Meaningful Interpretation: A FieldGuide for Success. Fulcrum Publishing. United States. Knapp, D. (2008). Applied Interpretation: Putting Research into Practice. Interp. Press. United States.

SB24602 INTRODUCTION TO THE ENVIRONMENT ASSESSMENT This course is an introduction to environmental assessment with related topics pertaining to it. This course emphasizes on the basics of environmental assessment and its protocols. Students will be exposed with the idea and definition of environment. This includes environment of the terrestrial, marine and air. However, emphasis is more on the terrestrial aspects. Various ecosystems of the terrestrial will also be taught to the students in order to understand the terrestrial realm more holistically. These include urban, rural, plantations and forested environment. Other aspects to be included in the course include biodiversity,


ecosystem and environmental change, geoenvironmental skills, information and communication skills, practical methods for environmental assessment, data analysis, environmental interpretation, geomorphic processes, climatology, GIS and remote sensing, issues in environmental assessment, development and global change, environmental impact assessment, geological hazards, conservation and management, ecotoxicology and environmental regulations. Students will be assessed based on their understanding and capabilities in grasping those topics and skills in managing and handling environmental matters. References Noble, B. F. 2005. Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment: A Guide to Principles and Practice. Jain, R. K., L. V. Urban, Gary, S. Stacey and Harold E. Balbach. 2001. Environmental Assessment. Canter, L. 1995. Environmental Impact Assessment. Mitchell, R. B., William C. Clark, David, W. Cash, and Nancy M. Dickson. Global environmental assessments: Information and influence (Global Environmental Accord: Strategies for Sustainability and Institutional Innovation). Morris, P. 2001. Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment (The Natural and Built Environment Series). Marriot, B. B. 1997. Environmental Impact Assessment: A Practical Guide. Ortolano, L. 1997. Environmental Regulation and Impact Assessment.

SB33102 GIS IN CONSERVATION BIOLOGY This course is design to introduce the principles and methodologist in GIS that is relevant toconservation biology. This course consists of four parts – (1) Principles and concepts of GIS; (2) GIS analysis; and (3) GIS application in conservation biology. The first part – principles and concepts of GIS, consists of lectures that introduce student about the basic concepts of GIS, such as geographic data type, coordinate system, and data collecting. After the student is familiar to these basic concept, student will be trained to conduct basic GIS analysis by using general software (i.e. QGIS). There are four levels of GIS analysis, namely, (1) Data Visualisation, (2) Data Exploration, (3) Spatial Analysis, and (4) Modelling. As this course will be taught for first year student of the conservation biology programme, the student will be mainly trained for the first two levels of GIS analysis, and will be briefly exposed to the latter two levels of GIS analysis. The last part of the course will be focusing on the application of these GIS analysis in conservation biology. Student will be informed of a few more specific GIS tools (MAXENT, R packages) that could be used in conservation biology. References Longley PA, Goodchild M, Maguire DJ, Rhind DW (2011) Geographic Information System & Science. John WIey. Franklin J (2009) Mapping Species Distributions: Spatial Inference and Prediction. Cambridge University Press. Mitchell A (1999) The ESRI guide to GIS analysis. ESRI. Bernhardsen T (2002) Geographic Information System: An Introduction. John Wiley. Millington AC, Walsh SJ, Osborne PE. (2001) GIS and Remote Sensing Applications in Biogeography and Ecology. Kluwer, New York.

SB33303 BIOCHEMISTRY This course is designed as an introduction to the organic structure of living systems. Lecture will address concepts dealing with proteins, enzymes, metabolism, and biosynthesis. An introduction to general biochemistry, including protein structure, enzyme mechanisms and kinetics, coenzymes, thermodynamics, central metabolic pathways, biological membranes, DNA structure and replication, and ribosomal translation. An emphasis is placed on integrating knowledge of fundamental organic chemistry into a biological context. Students will be equipped with the understanding of the basic metabolic processes in living organisms. Laboratory work provides practical experience in the topics covered. References Jeremy, M.B., Tymoczko, J. L., Gatto, G.J., Stryer, L. 2015 Biochemistry (8

th Eds) Freeman Co

Alberts, B., Bray, D., Lewis, J., Raff, M.M., Roberts, K., Watson, J. 1994. Molecular Biology of the Cell. 3rd edition. Garland Publishing Inc.

Conn, E.E., Stumpf, P.K., Bruening, G., Doi, R.H. 1995. Asas Biokimia. Dewan Bahasa dan pustaka. Kuala Lumpur.

Lehninger, A. L., Nelson, D., Cox, M.M. 1993. Principles of Biochemistry. 2nd edition. Wortj Publisher. Voet, D., Voet, J.G. 1997. Biochemistry. John Wiley and Sons. New York. Zubay, G. L., Parson, W.W., Vance, D.E. 1995. Principles of Biochemistry. W.C. Brown Publisher. United Kingdom. McKee, T and McKeE, J.R. 2003. Biochemistry: the Molecular Basis of Life. 3rd edition. WCB/McGraw-Hill Press, Boston.

SB33502 ECOLOGICAL METHODOLOGY Research in ecology requires knowledge on the biological aspects and skills on how to measure a biological system. This course integrates biological knowledge, in theory and in practice, with skills in ecological research techniques and methodologies for investigating, measuring, estimating and monitoring a biological system. Topics to be covered will include planning and designing a sampling programme, sampling methods, surveying techniques, estimation of population abundances for both plant and animal communities, estimations of


biological diversity and species richness, and methods for determining dispersion. Questionnaire survey methods which include both structured and un-structured interviews will also be covered. Practical classes are conducted to demonstrate how to run several popular softwares, such as Species Richness and Diversity and EstimateS, for calculating various biodiversity indices and to estimate species richness of animal and plant communities. Key papers concerning the application of selected sampling methods are provided. References Gibbs, J.P., hunter,M.J.J., & Sterling, E.J. (2009). Problem-Solving in Conservation Biology and Wildlife Management, 2nd edition. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford, U.K. Magurran, A.E. (2004). Measuring Biological Diversity. Backwell Publishing, Victoria. Chua, Y.P. (2006). Kaedah Penyelidikan. McGraw Hill Education, Kuala Lumpur. Wilson, D.E., Cole, F.R., Nichols, J.D., Rudran, R. & Foster, M.S. (1996). Measuring and Monitoring Biological Diversity: Standard Methods for Mammals. Smithsonian Institution Press, Washington

SB33703 POLICIES AND LEGISLATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION This course covers some of the main policies and legislations relating to conservation of biodiversity resources and the natural environment at the state and national levels in Malaysia, as well as international treaties and/or agreements, rules and regulations that are directly or indirectly related to biodiversity conservation in Malaysia. The knowledge and skills acquired from this course will supplement and complement the management skills from other courses within the Conservation Biology Degree Programme. References Handmer, J., T.W. Norton and S. R. Dovers. 2002. Ecology, Uncertainty and Policy: Managing Ecosystems for Sustainability. Prentice Hall. Sutherland, W. J. 2000. The Conservation Handbook: Research, Management and Policy. University Press, Cambridge, UK. McNeeel y, J.A. 1997. Conservation and the Future: Trends and Options Toward the Year 2025. IUCN Biodiversity PolicyConservation Div and IUCN-The WorldConservation Union. IUCN Switzerland & Cambridge, UK. Environmental Quality Act. 1974. Ministry of Science, Technology and Environment, Malaysia. Sabah Biodiversity Enactment. 2000. Sabah Biodiversity Council, Sabah Biodiversity Centre.

SB23803 AQUATIC ECOLOGY This course introduces to biological, chemical and physical features of freshwater rivers and lakes and relates them to general ecological concepts. There are two primary ways of monitoring ecological state of aquatic ecosystems: physico-chemical water quality analysis and analysis of biological components. This course will concentrate both on physico-chemical and biotic composition of freshwater rivers and lakes. Another focus of the course is the research methodologies in aquatic ecology. The laboratory work is designed to complement and expand on topics discussed in lectures while providing students with hands-on experience in sampling, analysing, and interpretation of freshwater aquatic ecosystems. References Dudgeon, D. 2011. Tropical Stream Ecology. Academic Press. P.S. Giller & B. Malmqvist (2003). The Biology of Streams and Rivers. Oxford Univ. Express. Cushing. C. E & Allan J.D (2001), Streams, Their Ecology and Life. Academic Press. Loeb. S.L & Spacie A., (1994) Biological Monitoring of Aquatic Systems, Lewis Publishers. G.A., Cole (1988), Limnology, Waveland Press, Inc. W. Lampet & U Sommer (2007) Limnoecology: The ecology of lakes and Streams, Oxford Uni Express. Belgrano et al. 2005. Aquatic Food Webs: An Ecosystem Approach. Oxford University Press.

SB34102 EHTNOBIOLOGY Ethnobiology is the scientific study of dynamic relationships among peoples, biota, and environments. As a multidisciplinary field, ethnobiology integrates archaeology, geography,systematics, population biology, ecology, mathematical biology, cultural anthropology, ethnography, pharmacology, nutrition, conservation, and sustainable development. The diversity of perspectives in ethnobiology is our greatest strength. It allows us to examine complex, dynamic interactions between human and natural systems, and enhances our intellectual merit and broader impacts.This course exposes students on forest resources utilizations by indigenous people all over the world, emphasis is to Malaysia’s ethnic groups especially in Sabah. Students will learn various ethnic groups, their culture and traditional way of live which related to natural resources surrounding their village especially on forests resources. Emphasis will be on ethnobotany and ethnozoology. Expose students to the basic concept of anthropology for ethnobiology. Examples of traditional practises regarding the uses of natural resources will be put forward. The relationship between man and the natural resources along with their related problems will be discussed. The importance of natural resources and impact of activities by local villagers will be teach. The final part of this course will be methods of data gathering in the field followed by data analyses. References Kulip, J. (2015). Trends of Ethno-Ecosystem Services in Two Dusun Villages in Sabah, Malaysia. Documenting Traditional Forest-Related Knowledge for Ecosystem Services in ASEAN Countries. APAFRI and KFRI. Kulip, J. (2003). An ethnobotanical survey of medicinal and other useful plants of Muruts In Sabah, Malaysia.


Telopea 10(1): 81–98. Kulip, J. (2004). Medicinal plants of Sabah: How much do we know? A paper presented at the National Seminar on Medicinal herbs. Organised by BHS and UMS. Noweg, T., Abdullah, A. R. and Nidang, D. (2003). Forest plants as vegetables for communities bordering the Crocker Range National park. ASEAN Review of Biodiversity and Environmental Conservation (ARBEC) January-March. http://www.arbec.com.my/pdf/art3janmar03.pdf..

SB34302 PRIMATE CONSERVATION This course is designed specifically to provide an overview of the non-human primate species and their conservation needs. This course will provide the basic skills needed for studying, monitoring and managing populations of non-human primates. Topics covered will include primates classification and distribution, life history strategies, behavioural ecology, community ecology, effects of habitat loss, degradation and fragmentation, issues on human-primates conflict and conservation strategies. Specific examples from the state of Sabah, as well as from elsewhere in the Southeast Asian region will be given. Field excursions will be made to give opportunity to learn about primate census methodology and direct observation techniques for studying aspects of primate socio-behaviour, both in the wild and in captivity. The field excursions will also allow students to acquire hands-on experience on various aspects concerning actual conservation programmes for selected primate species in Sabah such as the orangutan and proboscis monkey. References Wich, S.A., & Marshall, A.J. (2016). An Introduction to Primate Conservation (1st Edition). Oxford University

Press, Oxford. Sha, J.C.M., Matsuda, I. & Bernard, H. (2011). The Natural History of the Proboscis Monkey. Natural History

Publication (Borneo), Kota Kinabalu. Strier, K.B. (2007). Primate Behavioural Ecology (3rd Edition.). Pearson Education, Inc., Boston. Cowlishaw, G. & Dunbar, R. (2000). Primate Conservation Biology. The University of Chicago Press, Chicago & London. Campbell, C.J., Fuentes, A., Mackinnon, K.C., Panger, M. & Bearder, S.K. (2007). Primates in Perspective. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Nowak, R.M. (1999). Walker’s Primates of the World. The John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore & London. Rowe, N. (1996). The Pictorial Guide to the Living Primates. Pogonias Press.

SB34502 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS The course is designed to discuss the basic theories, principles, methodology and maintenance of instrumental methods of chemical and biology analysis. The instruments including centrifuge, pH meter, microscope, spectrophotometer, chromatography, electrophoresis, nuclear magnetic resonance and infra-red spectra. Hands on practical and demonstrations of the instruments will also be conducted in lab sessions. Students are also given the basic skills to interpret the data obtained. References Vyvyan, J.R., Pavia, D.L., Lampman, G.M., Kriz, G.S. 2014 Introduction to Spectroscopy (5

th Eds) Brooks and

Cole Haven, M.C., Tetrault, G.A., Schenken, J.R. 2011 Laboratory Instrumentation (4th Ed) JohnWilley Skoog, D.A. and Leary, J.J 1992. Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 4th ed., USA Sounders College, Publishing. Robinson, J.W. 1987. Undergraduate Instrumental Analysis, 4th Ed., USA: Revised and Expended, Marcel Dekker, Inc. Braun, R.D. 1987. Introduction to Instrumental Analysis. New York: Mc Graw-Hill International Editions. Skoog, D.A., West, D.M. and Holler, J. 1988. Fundamental of Analytical Chemistry. 5th Ed., USA: Saunders College Publishing. Chirtian, G.D. and O’Reilay, J.E. 1986. Instrumental Analysis, Boston: Allyn and Bacon Inc. Rubinson, K.A. and Rubinson, J.F. 2000. International Edition. Contemporary InstrumentalAnalysis. Prentice-Hall, Inc, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.

SB33203 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT I / SB43106 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II This course concerns with the theoretical aspects of the scientific approach of carrying out a scientific research project. It covers literature review, project proposal preparation and presentation, and writing of a scientific report. References Alley, M. 1998. The Craft of Scientific Writing. 3rd Ed. Springer-Verlag Wilson, E.B. Jr. 1991. An Introduction to Scientific Research. Dover Publications, USA.


SB33403 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY IN CONSERVATION This course is designed to introduce the principles and fundamental methodologies in molecularbiology that is applied to solve problems in conservation biology. Molecular biology is one of the many tools available that can be used in systematic, nomenclature and phylogenetic studies, which includes the identification of plant and animal species. Examples of how molecular biology is applied in conservation of organisms are discussed. References Hall, B. G., 2004. Phylogenetic trees made easy: a how-to manual. Sunderland: Sinauer Associates. Felsenstein, J. & Felenstein, J. (2004). Inferring phylogenies (Vol. 2). Sunderland: Sinauer Associates. Caetano-Anolles, G. And Gresshoff, P.M. 1998. DNA Markers: Protocols, Applications and Overviews. Wiley-Vch, New York. Graur, D.; Wen-Hsiung Li, 1999. Fundamental of Molecular Evolution. Sinauer Assoc. Weaver, R.F. 2002. Molecular Biology. 2nd e. Mac Graw Hill, London. D. M. Hillis, C. Moritz, & B. K. Mable (1996). Molecular systematics. Sunderland, MA: Sinauer Associates.

SB33603 PLANT PHYSIOLOGY This course intends to introduces students to the major topics and concepts of plant physiology. It encompasses examination of plant functions ranging from the basic unit- that is cell, down to its complexities of the systems of plant as a whole. It is the study of how plants acquire and utilize essential minerals from their environment. Plants have had to develop mechanisms to concentrate elements from dilute solutions without accumulating toxic amounts of other fixed in photosynthesis for nutrients they need. Plant physiology likewise includes the study of nutrient transformations at the root surface. The course is divided into three sections: (1) Plant Biochemistry and Metabolism, (ii) Water and Solute Transport, and (iii) Plant Growth and Development References Taiz, L., Zeiger, E., Moller, I. M., Murphy, A. 2015. Plant physiology and development. Sixth Edition. Sinauer Associates. Hopkins, W. G. and Huner, N. P. A. 2004. Introduction to plant physiology. 3rd ed. John Wiley & Sons, Inc: New Jersey. Opik, H. & Rolfe, S.A. 2005. The Physiology of Flowering Plant, 4th Edition. Cambridge University Press, USA.

SB33803 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY This course intends to introduce to the students on major topics and concepts of animal physiology. It encompasses examination of an organisms' functions and their main organs' systems and its relationship with the environment. This course will also teaches the students on how animals acquire and utilize essential minerals from their environment and the setbacks when should they been deprived of. This course will be taught in view of how the changing world, ie global warming and climate change affect the physiology of animals, and how can physiology of animals impact the environment. References Graham Sellers, Richard S Wright Jr. & Nicholas Haemel. 2016. OpenGL Superbible: Comprehensive Tutorial and Reference (7th Edition). Pearson Education Inc. John Kessenich, Graham Sellers & Dave Shreiner. 2016. OpenGL Programming Guide: The Official Guide to Learning OpenGL, Version 4.5 with SPIR-V. Pearson Education Inc Hearn, D., Baker, M.P. & Carithers, W. 2010. Computer Graphics with OpenGL (4

th Edition). Pearson, Inc.

Marschner, S & Sherly P. 2015. Fundamental of Computer Graphics 4th Edition. AK Peters Ltd. Angel, E. 2005. OpenGL: A Primer. Addison Wesley. SB34002 FIELDWORK This course aims to introduce data sampling methods in the fields of zoology, botany, entomology and environment. The course covers theory (lectures), practical and field work. The lectures will cover essential methods in the field according to the area of research, and ethics that should be known and followed, such as research ethics and animal handling. Students will be introduced to various field apparatuses and equipment handling (practical) at the study site during fieldwork. References Dytham, C. 2011. Choosing and Using Statistics: A Biologist’s Guide. 3rd. ed. Wiley-Blackwell, West Sussex. Bernard, H & Yoneda, M.2004. Ecological Methodology in Conservation Biology. Part 1: Methods of Measuring and Monitoring Biodiversity. JICA : Kota Kinabalu. Bernard, H & Yoneda, M.2004. Ecological Methodology in Conservation Biology. Part 2: Elementary Statistic and Analysis of Experiment. JICA : Kota Kinabalu Fowler, J., Cohen, L. and Jarvis, Phil. 1988. Practical Statistics for Field Biology. 2nd ed. John Wiley & Sons, Chichester.

SB34202 NATURAL PRODUCT CHEMISTRY Students in Conservation Biology program will be involved in chemotaxonomy, ecological processes and advancement of biodiversity studies. They will also take courses in ethno-biological stud, hence there is a need to better understand the fundamentals of Natural Products Chemistry of the flora and fauna. This course is


designed to introduce the basic in primary and secondary metabolites. Their biosynthetic pathways and how plants and animals use them in nature. Students will also be introduced to the chemical ecology in terrestrial and marine environment. In conclusion, students will be given a total view of sustainable utilization of flora and fauna in drug discovery research activities undertaken globally. References Atta Ur Rahman 2015 Studies in Natural Products Chemistry: 45 Elsevier Science Ltd Fusetani, N. 2000 Drugs from the sea. Karger Press Newman, D.J., Buss, A.D., Butler, M.S. 2009 Natural Product Chemistry for Drug Discovery (RSC Biomolecular

Sciences) RSC Publishing Natural Products: Their Chemistry and Biological Significance. Mann, J., Davidson, R. S., Hobbs J. B.,

Banthorpe and J.B. Harborne. Longman Scientific & Technical. UK Limited. Natural Products Isolation:Methods in Biotechnology. Richard J. P. Cannell. Humana Press. Totowa, New Jersey. Bioactive Compounds from Natural Sources: Isolation, Characterisation and Biological Properties. Corrado

Tringali. Taylor & Francis. London. Yenesew, et al., 1989. Flavonoids From The Seed Pods of Tephrosia Pumila. Phytochemistry 28, 1291-1292.

SB34402 PRINCIPLES OF TISSUE CULTURE The course will be an introduction to plant and animal cell tissue culture techniques. Students will learn the basic theory of plant and cell tissue culture. This course also will be discussed the importance of cell and tissue culture for conservation and related areas. Students will learn the history of tissue culture, laboratory requirement, organization and general techniques, animal cell culture; tissue culture media and preparation. Students will also work with plant and mammalian cell cultures and learn techniques involved in maintaining and manipulating cell cultures. Plant cell culture; callus and free cell culture; evidence for totipotency; somatic embryogenesis; organogenesis; Isolation, culture and fusion of protoplasts. Genetic stability and somaclonal variation, breeding and genetic engineering. Experimental design and quantification of results. Quantification and determination of cell viability, kinetics and cell growth. Microbial contamination and prevention procedures. Establishment and characterization of cell lines. Current issues related to conservation of plant and animal using tissue cultures will be highlighted. References Sant Saran Bhojwani, Prem Kumar Dantu (2013). Plant tissue culture: An introductory text. Springer India, Pg. 1-309. Doyle, A., & Griffiths, J.B., (2000). Cell and Tissue Culture for Medical Research, John Wiley and Sons. Chawla, H.S., (2002), Introduction to Plant Biotechnology, 2nd Ed., Science Publisher

SB34602 WILDLIFE CAPTIVE MANAGEMENT This subject covers the knowledge on guideline of management on captived animal population, e.g. guidelines of Safari park, deer park, animal park, and orderly and continuous monitoring on the population and control of captived animal, setting up of the rescue centre, correct way of carcasses disposal, ethics and welfare of captived animal. The basis of this course is to give understanding on environment and ecological balance on living animals in captive. Students should also be aware of the importance of the space of the facility and display that comply with recommendations set by the authorities in proper caring on captived animals. Norms in captivity, rapid and continuous caring and health of the animal as suggested in Recognition of Zoo Rules 1992. Students are expected to understand the animal behaviour and captive population management as an ex-situ conservation method. References Wildlife Act 2010. Jabatan PERHILITAN Agoramoorthy, G. 2004. Ethics and welfare in Southeast Asian zoos. J. of Applied Anim. Welfare Sci. 7(3): 189-195. CITES Regulations 1973, Convention of International Trade in Endangered Species. Wildlife Regulations of Malaysia 1972. EAZA Hornbill Management and Husbandry Guidelines. 2002. European Association of Zoos and Aquaria. Doherty, J. and D. Wharton. 2005. Breeding management of Snow leopard at New York Zoological Park. Wildt, D. E., Zhang, A., Zhang, H., Janssen, D. L. and S. Ellis. 2006. Giant Pandas: Biology, veterinary

medicine and management.

SB43002 SUSTAINABLE ENVIRONMENTAL DEVELOPMENT Environmental sustainable development strongly relates to the capability in natural resource management to gain ecological, economic and social benefits sustainably. Via a highly multidisciplinary approach, this course introduces the concept of sustainable development at the local and international levels. The course explains on management trends that are being practised in environmental development. The course scrutinises different levels of development in relation to sustainability by using case studies. Undergraduates who have gone through the course are expected to be able to master good comprehension on various issues and challenges related to environmental sustainable development.


References Redclift, M. & Springett, D. (eds.) (2015). Routledge International Handbook of Sustainable Development.

Routledge, London. Ghai, D. & Vivian, L.M. (eds.) (2014). Grassroots environmental action: people's participation in sustainable

development. Routledge, London. Lafferty, W.M. & Eckerberg, K. (eds.) (2013). From the Earth Summit to Local Agenda 21: working towards

sustainable development. Earthscan, London. Domoto, A., Iwatsuki, K., Kawamichi, T. & McNeely, J. (2000). A threat to life: The impact of climate change

on Japan’s biodiversity. Biodiversity Network Japan and IUCN, Japan. Maryati, M., Kusano, T. & Jensen, S.M. (eds.) (2004). Biodiversity conservation: Forward together :

Proceedings of ‘The BBEC International Conference 2004’. BBEC Secretariat, Kota Kinabalu. Odum, E.P. (2005). Fundamentals of Ecology, 5th edition. Thomas Brooks / Cole, USA.

SB43503 WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT A course designed to introduce students to wildlife ecology and principles of wildlife management. A background of ecology, population biology and elementary statistics is essential to fully understand the topics discussed in this course. Although much information on wildlife management principles is required from research carried out elsewhere, wildlife management techniques as practiced in southeast Asia will be discussed in greater details. References Bolen, EG and Robinson WR. 2016. Wildlife Ecology and Management (5th Ed.) Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Dugatkin, LA. 2013. Principle of Animal Behavior (3rd Ed.). W.W Norton & Inc. New York. Martin, P and Bateson, P. 2007. Measuring Behaviour: An Introductory Guide (2nd Ed). Cambridge University Press. Boitani, L and Fuller, TK.2002.Research Techniques in Animal Ecology: Controversies and Consequences.Columbia University Press. Bookhout, TA. 1996. Research and Management Techniques for Wildlife and Habitats. The Wildlife Society, Maryland, USA. Bailey, JA. 1984. Principle of Wildlife Management. John Wiles & Sons, New York. Bookh out, T. A. 1996. Research and Management Techniques for Wildlife and Habitats. Wildlife Society, Maryland, USA. Bolen, E. G. and Robinson, W. R. 1999. Wildlife Ecology and Management. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. SB43703 GENETIC FOR CONSERVATION This course is a combination of ecological biology, molecular bology, population genetics, mathematical methods and evolutionary systematics. It is both basic and applied sciences. Students will be taught basic knowledge of genetic relationships of organisms and management techniques that involves conservation of biological diversity in related species. The studied organisms are from endangered population or those facing extinction. Factors that cause extinction of population will be discussed from populati on, demography, loss of gene variation, inbreeding, degradation of population migration, stress increment and community behavour and metapopulation structure. The usage of molecular variation as the basic of naming and preference of targeted taxa and a few strategic results in maximixation of genetic varians in conserved population is analysed. References Goossens, B., Chikhi, L., Jalil, M.F., Ancrenaz, M., Lackman-Ancrenaz, I., Mohamed, M., Andau, P. & Bruford,

M.W. 2005. Patterns of genetic diversity and migration in increasingly fragmented and declining orang-utan (Pongo pygmaeus) populations from Sabah, Malaysia. Molecular Ecology 14:441-456.

Frankham, R., Ballou, J.D. & Briscoe, D.A. 2002. Introduction to conservation genetics. Cambridge University Press. UK.

Allendorf, F.W. & Luikart, G. 2007. Conservation and the genetics of populations. Blackwell Scientifics. UK. Beebee, T & Rowe, G. 2004. An introduction to molecular ecology. Oxford University Press. UK. Schmitt, T. & Hewitt. M. 2004. The genetic pattern of population threat and loss: A case study of butterflies.

Molecular Ecology 13: 21-31. Avise, J.C. 1998. Conservation Genetics in the Marine Realm. Journal of Heredity. 89: 377- 382. Lande, R. Extinction risks from anthropogenic, ecological, and genetic factors. Pp. 1-22 In L.F. Landweber and

A.P. Dobson, eds. Genetics and the extinction of populations. Princeton University Press Goossens, B., Chicki, L., Ancrenaz, M., Lackman-Ancrenaz, I., Andau & Bruford, M.W. 2006b. Genetic signature

of anthropogenic population collapse in orang-utan. Public Library of Science Biology 4:285-291

SB43902 SELECTED TOPICS IN CONSERVATION BIOLOGY This couse aims to give holistic understanding on the importance of conservation and the cause to problems. Active participations and discussions in finding the solution and overcome problems will build the leadership quality of students. Invited lecturers and speakers from various backgrounds will discuss issues and challenges in the field of conservation biology. This course will also promote volunteering spirit among the students.


References Greggor, A. L., Berger-Tal, O., Blumstein, D. T., Angeloni, L., Bessa-Gomes, C., Blackwell, B. F., St Clair, C. C., Crooks, K., de Silva, S., Fernández-Juricic, E., Goldenberg, S. Z., Mesnick, S. L., Owen, M., Price, C. J., Saltz, D., Schell, C. J., Suarez, A. V., Swaisgood, R. R., Winchell, C. S., Sutherland, W. J.. 2016. Research Priorities from Animal Behaviour for Maximising Conservation Progress. Trends in Ecology & Evolution 31(12): 953-964. Latiff, A. 2012. Conservation strategies for endangered mangrove swamp forests in Malaysia. Pak. J. Bot 44:27-36 Sodhi, N. S. & Ehrlich, P. R. (eds.). Conservation Biology for All. Oxford University Press. Mohd Azlan J. Abdul Gulam Azad. 2012. Biodiversity conservation strategy in Malaysia: A Review from an Islamic Perspective. Jurnal Hadhari 4(1): 129-136 Malaysian National Conservation Strategy - Towards Sustainable Development. Volume 1 Executive Summary and The Strategy. Economic Planning Unit

SB44102 CANOPY BIOLOGY The canopy of tropical rainforest at about 70m above ground level is the richest biological varities of sub-ecosistem in the world. The canopy of tropical rainforest is least studied due to the difficulties to assess the area. The role, functions and importance of canopy has not been explored and known fully. This course will give introduction to the sub-ecosystem of the canopy of tropical rainforest from the aspect of research history, variation of organisms including insects, vertebrates and plants. The importance of the sections of forest canopy from the ecosystem services, ecological processes occurence like flowering and herbivoury, and influences of canopy on the micro climate and global weather will be discussed. A few methods to assess and study the canopy of tropical rainforest including climbing method using twin rope and remote sensing will be shown. References Lowman, M.D. & Rinker, H.B. (2004). Forest Canopies (2nd Edn.). Elsevier Academic Press. Lowman, M.D. & Nadkarni, N.M. (1995). Forest Canopies. Academic Press, New York. Basset, Y., Horlyck, V. & Wright, J. (2003). Studying Forest Canopies From Above: The International Canopy

Crane Network. Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute, Panama. Mitchell, A., Secoy, K., & Jackson, T. (2002). Global Canopy Handbook: Techniques of Access and Study in the

Forest Roof. Global Canopy Foundations. Oxford U.K. Mitchell, A.W. (1986). The Enchanted Canopy. McMillan, New York. Stork, N.E., Adis, J. & Didham, R.K. (1997). Canopy Arthropods. Chapman & Hall, London. Basset, Y., Novotny,

V., Miller, S.E. & Kitching, R.L. (2003). Arthropods of Tropical Forests. Cambridge University Press. SB44302 PROTECTED AREAS MANAGEMENT Protected areas are viewed as critical to the survival of species and ecosystems. This course will introduce students to the science and manage ment of protected areas on land. It covers topics such as the international and national policies related to protected areas, and approaches in management of protected areas. It will a lso show how important protected areas are for the livelihood of the local communities. Case studies of local organisms such as proboscis monkey and Sumatran rhinoceros will be discussed to give the students insights of local issues in protected areas. References Dudley, N. (ed.). 2013. Guidelines for Applying Protected Area Management Categories. Gland, Switzerland: IUCN. (http://www.iucn.org/publications). Hazebroek, Hans P., Tengku Zainal Adlin, Waidi Sinun, 2012. Danum Valley: The Rain Forest. Kota Kinabalu: Natural History Publications (Borneo). Ervin, J., Mulongoy, K.J., Lawrence, K., Game, E., Sheppard, D., Bridgewater, P., Bennett, G., Gidda, S.B. & Bos, P. 2010. Making Protected Areas Relevant: A guide to integrating protected areas into wider landscapes, seascapes and sectoral plans and strategies. CBD Technical Series No. 44. Montreal, Canada: Convention on Biological Diversity, 94pp. (http://www.cbd.int) Walkey, M., Swingland, I. & Russel, S. 1999. Integrated protected area management. Kluwer Academic Publishers. Wright, R.G. 1996. National parks and protected areas. Blackwell Science.Yayasan Sabah. 2014. Maliau Basin Conservation Area: Strategic Management Plan 2014-2023. Kota Kinabalu: Yayasan Sabah.

SB43208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Students will be placed in an industry or a research area for a minimum duration of ten (10) weeks under supervision of a lecturer. The training will be evaluated and the student is required to prepare a written report of the completing the industrial training.


INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY PROGRAMME (HS07)

SK12101 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL I This course will discuss advance techniques used in laboratory preparation relating to higher concepts of Physical Chemistry from SK12101 Physical Chemistry Practical I. Topics are covered as physical and chemical changes, electrochemical cell for metal analysis, enthalpy and entropy parameters uses for determine the activation energy of a chemical reaction. References Brady, J. E., Jespersen, N. D. & Hyslop, A., 2014. Chemistry. 7th Ed. John Wiley and Sons Pte. Ltd. Atkins, P. and de Paula, J., 2011. Physical Chemistry for the Life Sciences. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Atkins, P. and de Paula, J., 2010. Physical Chemistry. 9th ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

SK12201 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL I This laboratory course is to accompany SK12603 (Analytical Chemistry I). It is based upon practical experiments dealing with most of the topics discussed in SK12603, including solution preparation and concentration, stoichiometric calculations, and volumetric and gravimetric analyses. References Bruice, P. Y. 2017. Organic Chemistry; 8th ed.; Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ. Mayo, D. W., Pike, R. M. & Forbes, D.C., 2011. Microscale Organic Laboratory: With Multistep and Multiscale Syntheses; 5th Edition; John Wiley & Son Inc. New York. Schoffstall, A. M.; Gaddis, B. A. & Druelinger, M. L. 2004. Microscale and Miniscale Organic Chemistry Laboratory Experiments. Mc Graw Hill; New York.

SK12301 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL I This laboratory course is to accompany SK12703 (Organic Chemistry I). It is based upon practical experiments dealing with most of the topics discussed in SK12703, including most of the basic organic laboratory skills, covering extraction, separation, reflux, distillation, recrystallization, melting point determination, chromatography and etc. References Bruice, P. Y. 2017. Organic Chemistry; 8th ed.; Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ. Mayo, D. W., Pike, R. M. & Forbes, D.C., 2011. Microscale Organic Laboratory: With Multistep and Multiscale Syntheses; 5th Edition; John Wiley & Son Inc. New York. Schoffstall, A. M.; Gaddis, B. A. & Druelinger, M. L. 2004. Microscale and Miniscale Organic Chemistry Laboratory Experiments. Mc Graw Hill; New York.

SK12401 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL I This laboratory course is based upon practical experiments dealing with most of the topics discussed in SK12803 (Inorganic Chemistry 1), including oxidation-reduction reaction of halogens, reactions of metals, analysis of cation mixture, and the chemistry of chromium. References Shriver, D.F., Weller, M., Overton, T., Armstrong, F. & Rourke, J. 2014. Inorganic Chemistry, 6th Edition, Oxford University Press, Oxford. Housecroft, C.E. and Sharpe, A.G.. 2012. Inorganic Chemistry. 4th ed. Pearson Education Limited, U.K. Miessler, G. L., Fischer, P & Tarr, D. A.. 2013. Inorganic Chemistry. 5th ed. Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

SK12503 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I The course discusses the concepts and fundamental principles of physical chemistry. These include the properties of solid, liquid and gas, phase equilibrium, chemical equilibrium, dissolution and solution properties, chemical colloid and surface, quantum mechanics and spectroscopy, chemical thermodynamic, chemical kinetics and catalyst, and electrochemistry. References Silberberg, M. S., 2015. Chemistry: The Molecular Nature and Change. 7th ed. McGraw-Hill Company, USA Levine, I. N., 2011. Physical Chemistry. 6th ed. McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., Singapore. Atkins, P. and de Paula, J., 2010. Physical Chemistry. 9th ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Brown, T. L., Lemay, H. E., Bursten, B. E. , Murphy, C., Woodward, M. P. & Stoltzfus, M. E. 2015.. Chemistry: The Central Science. 13th ed. Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.

SK12603 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY I This course focuses on the basic procedures and practices in an analytical laboratory and chemical analyses, data handling, presentation and analysis, laboratory quality assurance, chemical and solubility equilibria, and principles and techniques of volumetric and gravimetric analyses.


References Skoog, D.A., West, D.M., Holler, F.J. & Crouch, S.R. 2014. Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry. 9th edition Brooke/Cole, Thompson Learning Inc. Christian, G.D., Dasgupta, P.K., & Schug. K.A., 2014. Analytical Chemistry. 7th edition. John Wiley and Sons, NJ Harris, D.C. 2010. Quantitative Chemical Analysis. 8th edition. W.H. Freeman & Company Harvey, D. 2000. Modern Analytical Chemistry. McGraw Hill, Boston

SK12703 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I This course focuses on the fundamental concepts, principles and reactions in organic chemistry. Included topics are nomenclature, classification, bonding, structure and stereochemistry, chemical, physical properties and application of important classes of functional groups and organic compounds (including biomolecules and natural products). Attention is given to type of reactions, i.e. substitution, addition and elimination and factors affected the reactions. The application of organic chemistry in daily life is highlighted. References Bruice, P. Y. 2017. Organic Chemistry ; 8th ed.; Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ. Carey, F. A. & Giuliano, R., 2013. Organic Chemistry; 9th ed.; Mc-Graw Hill Companies, USA. Solomon, T. W. G.; Fryhle, C. B. 2013. Organic Chemistry; 11 th ed.; John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA, Clayden, J.; Greeves, N.; Warren, S.; Wothers, P. 2012. Organic Chemistry ; 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, Inc., New York. SK12803 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY I The course discusses the fundamental concepts and principles of inorganic chemistry at a basic level with electronic configuration of atoms of elements and molecules; theories of chemical bonding and intermolecular forces, Lewis structure and VSEPR model, main group elements, features and trends in chemistry of s and p block elements, nuclear chemistry and radioactivity. References Silberberg, M. S., 2015. Chemistry: The Molecular Nature and Change. 7th ed. McGrawHill Company, USA Housecroft, C.E. and Sharpe, A.G.. 2012. Inorganic Chemistry. 4th ed. Pearson Education Limited, U.K. Miessler, G. L., Fischer, P & Tarr, D. A.. 2013. Inorganic Chemistry. 5th ed. Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Shriver, D.F., Weller, M., Overton, T., Armstrong, F. & Rourke, J. 2014. Inorganic Chemistry, 6th Edition, Oxford University Press, Oxford.

SK12902 LABORATORY SAFETY AND ACCREDITATION This course is specially designed for sciences students. The course discusses the hazard & risk in the chemical laboratory, way of handling the chemicals, glassware & equipments, chemical safety and health, management & disposal of chemical, personal safety equipment as well as the emergency preparedness. Through this course, students are also able to know the role of health and safety related Institutions such as Department of Safety and Health (DOSH), National Institute of Safety and Health (NIOSH), and Malaysia Institute for Nuclear Technology Research (MINT) References National Research Council, 2011. Prudent Practices in the Laboratory, Updated edition. National Academies Press, Washington D. C. World Health Organization, 2004. Laboratory Biosafety Manual . 3rd edition. WHO, Geneva. Abdul Khalik Bin Wood, Zaharudin Bib Ahmad and Zulkifli Bin Mohamed Hashim, 2001. Chemical Safety . Malaysia Institute For Nuclear Technology Research, Bangi. Frazier, L. M. and Hage, M. L., 1998. Reproduction Hazards of the Workplace . An International Thomson Publishing Company, USA.

SK22101 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL II This course will discuss advance techniques used in laboratory preparation relating to higher concepts of Physical Chemistry from SK12101 Physical Chemistry Practical I. Topics are covered as physical and chemical changes, electrochemical cell for metal analysis, enthalpy and entropy parameters uses for determine the activation energy of a chemical reaction. References Atkins, P. and de Paula, J., 2010. Physical Chemistry. 9th ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Atkins, P. and de Paula, J., 2011. Physical Chemistry for the Life Sciences. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Brady, J. E., Jespersen, N. D. & Hyslop, A., 2014. Chemistry. 7th Ed. John Wiley and Sons Pte. Ltd. Other

SK22201 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL II This laboratory course is to accompany SK22603 (Analytical Chemistry II). It is based upon practical experiments dealing with most of the topics discussed in SK22603, including spectroscopic techniques (UV-VIS, AAS, FTIR), chromatographic techniques (HPLC, GC, CE), and other modern techniques


References Harris, D.C. 2015. Quantitative Chemical Analyses. 9th Edition. W.H. Freeman & Co. Ltd. Christian, G.D., Dasgupta, P.K., & Schug. K.A., 2014. Analytical Chemistry. 7th edition. John Wiley and Sons, NJ 4. Harvey, D. 2000. Modern Analytical Chemistry. McGraw Hill, Boston. Holler, F.J., Skoog D.R., Crouch, S.A. 2007. Principles of Instrumental Analysis. 6th Edition. Thomson Books/Cole, Orlando, Florida. 2

SK22301 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL II This laboratory course is to accompany SK22703 (Organic Chemistry II). It is based upon practical experiments dealing with most of the topics discussed in SK22703, including most of the basic organic laboratory skills, in addition to organic synthesis reactions such as esterification, oxidation and reduction, addition and electrophilic substitution, and Aldol reactions. Chromatography methods (including column chromatography and HPLC) and spectroscopy techniques (such as IR and NMR) will be covered. References Bruice, P. Y. 2017. Organic Chemistry; 8th ed.; Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ. Mayo, D. W., Pike, R. M. & Forbes, D.C., 2011. Microscale Organic Laboratory: With Multistep and Multiscale Syntheses; 5th Edition; John Wiley & Son Inc. New York. Schoffstall, A. M.; Gaddis, B. A. & Druelinger, M. L. 2004. Microscale and Miniscale Organic Chemistry Laboratory Experiments. Mc Graw Hill; New York. Clayden, J.; Greeves, N.; Warren, S.; Wothers, P. 2001. Organic Chemistry; Oxford University Press, Inc., New York.

SK22401 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL II The course consists of inorganic and analytical chemistry experimental work. These experiments include preparations of coordination compounds (oxalates and ammine), determination of the oxalate content and also determination of zinc ion by complex-forming titration technique. References Housecroft, C.E. & Sharpe, A.G. 2012; Inorganic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Pearson/ Prentice Hall. Z.Szafran, R. M. Pike, and M. M. Singh; 2008. Microscale Inorganic Chemistry, A Comprehensive Laboratory Experience, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. R. J. Angelici, 1999. Synthesis and Technique in Inorganic Chemistry, 3th edition,; University Science Press, Mill Valley, CA

SK22503 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY II According to the quantum mechanics, state of motion and dynamics of electron are represented by the wave function that is determined by Schrodinger equation and stationary state can be treated by solving time-independent Schrodinger equation (eigenvalue problem of Hamiltonian operator). Introduction of the origins of quantum mechanics, quantum mechanical principles, translational motion, vibrational motion, rotational motion, atomic structure and atomic spectra, molecular structure and magnetic resonance, are described. Meaning of the first law of thermodynamics will be understood by learning the relation between thermal energy coming in and out of a system and its mechanical energy, and study its mathematical treatment. Second and third laws of thermodynamics will be understood through the study of entropy, which represents the sense of spontaneous change in equilibrium reaction, the techniques to apply the concept of entropy and calculate them. References Atkins, P. and de Paula, J., 2010. Physical Chemistry. 9th ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Atkins, P. and de Paula, J., 2011. Physical Chemistry for the Life Sciences. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Brady, J. E., Jespersen, N. D. & Hyslop, A., 2014. Chemistry. 7th Ed. John Wiley and Sons Pte. Ltd. House, J.E. 2007. Principles of Chemical Kinetics. 2nd Ed. Elsevier, Shaw, D. J. 1992. Introduction to Colloid and Surface Chemistry. 4th Ed. ButterworthHeinemann

SK22603 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY II This course is the progression of SK12603 Analytical Chemistry I. It will discuss principles of modern instrumental which will cover the topics of spectroscopic techniques, separation methods, electrochemical, thermal and optical technique References Holler, F.J., Skoog, D.A., Crouch, S.R. 2007. Principles of Instrumental Analysis. 6th Edition. Thomson Higher Education, Belmont, CA. Skoog, D.A., West, D. M., Holler, F.J., Crouch, S.R. 2014. Fundamental of Analytical Chemistry. 9th Edition. Thomson Higher Education, Belmont, CA. Harris, D.C. 2015. Quantitative Chemical Analyses. 9th Edition. W.H. Freeman & Co. Ltd. Christian, G.D., Dasgupta, P.K., & Schug. K.A., 2014. Analytical Chemistry. 7th edition. John Wiley and Sons, NJ


SK22703 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II The course discusses further about mechanism of organic reactions and advanced methods in organic synthesis. It covers the strategy and method of synthesis; functional group chemistry; formation of carbon-carbon and carbon-heteroatoms bonds; ring closure and opening; reduction and oxidation; protective groups and combinatorial chemistry. Emphasis is also given to the synthesis of industrial organic bulk chemicals (C1-C6). References Bruice, P. Y. 2017. Organic Chemistry; 8 th ed.; Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ. (Textbook) Mackie, R. K.; Smith, D.; Aitken, R. A. 2000. Guidebook to Organic Synthesis; 3 rd ed.; Prentice Hall: USA. (Textbook) (Note: This is an important book, no new edition yet) Clayden, J.; Greeves, N.; Warren, S.; Wothers, P. 2001. Organic Chemistry; Oxford University Press, Inc., New

York. Sundberg, R. J.; Carey, F. A. 2010. Advanced Organic Chemistry: Part B; 5th ed.; Plenum: USA. Weissermel, K.; Arpe, H.J. 2010. Industrial Organic Chemistry; 5th ed.; WIley-VCH: Germany.

SK22803 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY II The course will be an advanced aspects of inorganic chemistry covering topics such as chemistry of d-block elements (transition metals) and its coordination complexes; d-block metal chemistry and f-block metals; coordination chemistry: historical and nomenclature, structures in coordination compounds, bonding theories, rates and mechanisms and applications; and also introduction homogeneous and heterogenous catalysis. References Weller, M., Overton, T., Rourke, J. & Armstrong, F. 2014. Inorganic Chemistry. 6th ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford. Housecroft, C.E. and Sharpe, A.G. 2012. Inorganic Chemistry. 4th ed. Pearson Education Limited, U.K. Silberberg, M.S. 2014. Chemistry: The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change. 7th ed. McGraw Hill Education (Asia). Rodgers, G.E. 2012. Descriptive Inorganic, Coordination and Solid-state Chemistry. 3th ed. Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning, Canada.

SK22903 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY FOR INDUSTRY This course discusses the fundamental principles of chemistry with regard to the physical environment (i.e air, water and soil/sediment) and environmental pollution. Emphasis will be placed on how industrial activities and other anthropogenic activities contribute towards environmental degradation / pollution, and the fate of inorganic and organic pollutants in the environment. References Harrison, R.M. (editor) 2007. Principles of Environmental Chemistry. RSC Publishing, Cambridge. Manahan, S.E. 2010. Environmental Chemistry. 9th Ed. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida. vanLoon, G.W. & Duffy, S.J. 2010. Environmental Chemistry: a global perspective, 3th Ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK. Baird, C. & Cann, M. 2012. Environmental Chemistry, 5th edition, W.H.Freeman and Co, New York

SK32303 ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPY All organic and many biological chemists repeatedly use physical properties to verify or establish organic structures. The course discusses various spectrometric methods used in the characterization of organic compounds which covers IR, NMR (1-D and 2-D), MS and UV-VIS. Emphasis is given to the understanding of the principles and rules in order to interpret spectra and to determine organic structures efficiently. The students are exposed to available databases (library and Internet resources) and Chewdraw (NMR) for comparison and determination of organic structures. References Bruice, P. Y. 2016. Organic Chemistry; 8th ed.; Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ. Pavia, D. L.; Lampman, G. M.; Kriz, G. S. Vyvyan, J. R. 2015. Introduction to Spectroscopy; 5th ed.; Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning, Belmont. (Textbook) Hoffmann, E. d.; Stroobant, V. 2012. Mass Spectrometry; Principles and Applications, 3th ed.; John Wiley & Sons Ltd., West Sussex, UK. Silverstein, R. M.; Webster, F. X.; Kiemle, D. J. Bryce, D.L.. 2014. Spectrometric Identification of Organic Compounds; 8th ed.; John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken.

SK23203 MATERIALS CHEMISTRY Fundamental chemical and physical principles underlying electronic, dielectric, optical and magnetic properties

will be developed in the context of metals, semiconductors, insulators, liquid crystals and polymers. The course

will treat another aspect of the structure, properties and applications of nanomaterials. Theory and concepts of

nanomaterials will be covered, including the chemistry and physics of nanomaterials. The course will also focus

on major classes of nanomaterials, including carbon nanotubes, nanostructured materials, nanowires,

nanoparticles, nanoclays, and other nanomaterials. Applications of nanomaterials to technology areas of interest

to the class will also be discussed


References William D. Callister & David G. Rethwisch, 2014. Materials Science and Engineering : An Introduction,9th ed. John Wiley & Sons. Joel I. Gersten and Frederick W. Smith, 2001. The Physics and Chemistry of Materials, John Wiley & Sons. Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep P. Phule & Wendelin J. Wright 2011. The Science and Engineering of Materials, 6th ed. Cengage Learning, Nelson Education Ltd,Canada. Weller, M., Overton, T., Rourke, J. & Armstrong, F. 2014. Inorganic Chemistry. 6th ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

SK32603 PRINCIPLES AND TECHNOLOGY OF CHEMICAL PROCESSES This course will discuss about applications of chemistry in industries, such as thermodynamics, materials and

energy balance, fluid mechanics, heat transfer, particle technology, mass transfer, distillation, adsorption and

extraction, evaporation and drying. Ideal reactors, separation processes, humidification and dehumification will

also be discussed. 12

References Felder, R. M. & Rousseau, R. W. & Bullard, L.G., 2016. Elementary Principles of Chemical Processes, 4th Ed. John Wiley & Sons, New York, USA. Smith, J. M., Van Ness, H., and Abbott, M. 2005. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 7th ed. McGraw-Hill, New York. McCabe, W. L., Smith, J. C. and Harriott, P. 2005, Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th edition, McGraw Hill Chemical Engineering Series, McGraw-Hill, New York, USA. Gadamasetti, K., Braish, T. & Gadamasetti, K. 2008, Process Chemistry in the Pharmaceutical Industry: Challenges in an Ever Changing Climate, CRC Press, USA.

SK32103 SEPARATION TECHNOLOGY AND INSTRUMENTATION This course will discuss the types of pesticide and its toxicity, its mode of action. The passage and

transformation of residues in the environment and the consequences to the human being. Sample preparations

will be discussed elaborately where emerging new techniques will be covered. The method of pesticide’s residue

analysis will also be covered using modern instruments such as GC/MS, GC/FID/ECD/NPD, HPLC etc.

References Stenersen, J. 2004. Chemical Pesticides - Mode of Action and Toxicology . CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida. Hamilton, D. & Crossley, S. (ed), 2004. Pesticides Residues in Food and Drinking Water: Human Exposure and Risks . John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, England. Shahamat, U.K. 2000. Bound Pesticide Residues . CRC press. New York.

SK34203 PROJECT SCIENTIFIC I This course concerns with the theoretical aspect of the scientific approach of carrying out a scientific research

project. It covers background of the study and problem statement, literature review, methodology, report

presentation, and writing of a project proposal. 13

Main References Faculty of Science and Natural Resourcesy. 2014. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi: Faculty of Science and Natural Resources.

SK40106 PROJECT SCIENTIFIC II This course concerns with the practical aspects of scientific research. It involves execution of the research plans

that have been developed and evaluated in SK34203 Scientific Project 1. The students will undertake an

independent research work on the approved thesis topic in consultation with the respective supervisor. The

research results will be subsequently analysed, discussed and combined with the previous report presented in

SK34203 Scientific Project 1 and finally presented as a scientific report.

Main Reference Faculty of Science and Natural Resourcesy. 2014. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi: Faculty of Science and Natural Resources.

SK41503 APPLIED PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY This course is an extention SK12503 (Physical Chemistry I) and SK22503 (Physical Chemistry II). It focuses on principles and concepts of physical chemistry applicable, among others, in adsorption phenomena, colloidal systems, catalysis, electrochemical products and processes, and selected advanced materials. References Sibley, R.J., Alberty, R.A. & Bawendi, M. G. 2005. Physical Chemistry. 4th Ed. John Wiley & Sons, NY 2. Pashley, R. & Karaman, M. 2004. Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry. Wiley 3. Atkins, P.W & Julio de Paula 2010. Physical Chemistry. 9th Ed. Oxford University Press 4. House, J.E. 2007. Principles of Chemical Kinetics.


2nd Ed. Elsevier Ltd. 19.

SK40208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Student shall be placed in an industry or research area at least 14 weeks under industrial supervision. This training will be evaluated and student requested provide one written report after the industrial training over.

SK32503 INDUSTRIAL INORGANIC CHEMISTRY PROCESSES The course discusses the chemical principles and design aspects for the production of inorganic chemicals on an industrial scale taking into account the economic, safety, environmental and green chemistry aspects of production. Flow chart of the chemical plants, chemical reactions in each processes and the usage of each chemicals will be included in the discussion. The compounds include sodium hydroxide, chlorine, ammonia, acids: sulphuric, nitric, hydrochloric and phosphoric. General metallurgy processes for the production of metals and non-metals such as iron, aluminium, silicon, alloys, glass and cement industries are covered. Introduction to catalysis plus its development and synthesis. References Weller, M., Overton, T., Rourke, J. & Armstrong, F. 2014. Inorganic Chemistry. 6th ed. Oxford University Press, Oxford Ullmann's Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemistry, Release 2010, 7th Ed., Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA Kirk-Othmer: Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology, 2007, 5th. Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 3

SK32803 INDUSTRIAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY PROCESSES The course discusses the chemical and design aspects of manufacturing/production processes of organic compounds or organic products from non-renewable and renewable resources especially at the industrial level. This will include industrial processes from petroleum and natural gas, coal, organic chemical abundance of C1-C6, palm oil and edible oil, biodiesel, cocoa, oleochemicals, agrochemicals, wood and paper, pharmaceuticals and etc. A field work to chemical industries will be carried out. References Chiusoli, G. P. & Maitlis, P. 2006. Metal-Catalysis in Industrial Organic Processes. Royal Society of Chemsitry, Dorset Kent, J.A. 2003. Riegel’s Handbook of Industrial Chemistry. 10th edition. Springer, USA. 3 Speight, J. G.; Ozum, Baki. 2002. Petroleum Refining Processes. Marcel Dekker, NY Arpe, H.-J. & Hawkins, S., 2010, Industrial Organic Chemistry; 5th ed.; WIley-VCH: Germany

SK40303 ENVIRONMENTAL TECHNOLOGY FOR INDUSTRY This course describes the various strategies and technologies for controlling water, air and soil pollution. These include physical, secondary and tertiary methods for water and wastewater treatment involving biodegradable organics, recalcitrant organics, nutrients and heavy metals. Also, treatment technologies for controlling gaseous emissions (incl. scrubber, adsorber and catalytic systems) and particulate emissions (incl. cyclone, scrubber, baghouse and ESP). Case studies on integrated pollution control will be presented. Toxic waste management will also be reviewed with particular reference to Malaysia References

Cornwell, D.A. & Davis, M.L. 2013. Introduction to Environmental Engineering. 5th Ed. McGraw Hill

Viessman, W. Jr, Hammer, M.J., Perez, E.M. & Chadik, P.A.. 2013. Water Supply and Pollution Control. 8th Ed. Prentice Hall Vallero, D. 2007. Principles of Air Pollution. 4th Ed. Elsevier

SK32903 NANOTECHNOLOGY This course focuses on the definition, history, scope, impacts, and challenges within the rapidly emerging and revolutionary field of nanotechnology. The course discusses techniques of the production of various nanomaterials such as graphenes, silicenes, nanotubes, nanorods, colloids, dots, clusters, wires, thin films etc. The pros and cons of the “top down” and “bottom up” approach in the nanotechnology will be discussed. The state-of-the-art instruments such as spectroscopy, radiation scattering, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy and X-ray diffraction etc. that are important for the characterization of nanomaterial and nanotechnology will be discussed too. References Ball, D. W., 2015. Physical Chemistry. 2nd Ed. Cengage Learning. USA. Joel I. Gersten and Frederick W. Smith, 2001. The Physics and Chemistry of Materials, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Rao, C.N.R., Müller, A., and Cheetham, A.K., 2005. The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Volume 1 and 2, Synthesis, Properties and Applications”, John-Wiley and Sons, Inc. Michael L. Roukes, 2002. Understanding Nanotechnology, Scientific American, Inc., and Byron Preiss Visual Publications, Inc. Goodhew, P. J. , Humphreys, J., and Beanland, R., 2001. Electron Microscopy and Analysis, 3rd ed., Taylor and Francis, London.


SK32703 PRINCIPLES AND TECHNOLOGY FOR RESOURCE RECOVERY This course focuses on the principles and concepts on various chemistry discipline used in resources recovery technology. Particular emphasis is placed in describing and explaining the basic principles in resources recovery technology which is not only to minimise waste production but also to alleviate environmental problems, hence this course can be used as a medium to promote environmental sustainability to the students. Different type of biological resources especially organic wastes, will be identified and discovered to be used as a resource to recover valuable products such as nutrient, compost, biogas, biofuel, butane and biopolymers, using different technique including chemical, physical as well as biological approaches. Different factors affecting the process also will be discussed, including engineering and operation conditions in enhancing the production activities, and the use of the recovered products. This course also provides students with the knowledge to understand the importance of entrepreneurship development and will be able to adapt with real industry activity related to resource recovery processes through industrial visit and prepare a technical report related to resource recovery technology. The above matters will be discussed with particular reference to Malaysia and other developed and developing countries, through lecturers as well as project-based learning. References Sharma, S. K. & Mudho, A. 2010. Green Chemistry for Environmental Sustainability. USA: CRC Press. 2. E. Valsami-Jones, 2004. Phosphorus in Environmental Technology- Principles and Application. UK: IWA Publishing. 3. Khanal, S.K. 2008. Anaerobic Biotechnology for Bioenergy Production Principles and Applications. Wiley-Blackwell Series. USA: Wiley and Sons Ltd. 4. Metcalf and Eddy. 2004. Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse. USA: McGraw-Hill, Inc. 5. Bessant, J and Tidd, J. 2007. Innovation and entrepreneurship. John Wiley: West Sussex, SQ, England.

SK40503 PRINCIPLES AND TECHNOLOGY IN FOOD INDUSTRY This course focuses on the principles, concepts and understanding on how various chemistry disciplines are being used in food processing and technology. Students are exposed to the physical, chemical and microbiological basis for each method of preservation. Particular emphasis is placed on the application of three of the most universally used commercial processes: thermal processing, freezing, and dehydration. Also discussed is the characterization of the heating behaviour of foods and the equipment used for thermal processing. Low temperature preservation is also demonstrated with a focus on freezing. The fundamentals of the freezing process, and the techniques and equipment used in commercial freezing operations are also explained. With the understanding of these principles and technology, the student will be taught on how to translate this knowledge into entrepreneurship and business entity References Fellows, P.J. 2009. Food Processing Technology: Principles and Practice 3th Edition. Woodhead Publishing Limited & CRC Press. 2. Murano, PS. 2003. Understanding Food Science and Technology. UK: Thomson Wadsworth 3. Russell,N.J. & Gould, G.W. 2003. Food Preservatives. 2nd Edition. New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publisher. 4. Mathlouthim M. 1994. Food Packaging and Preservation. London: Elsevier Applied Science Publisher. 5. Soleha Ishak. 1995. Pengawetan Makanan Secara Pengeringan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa Pustaka 6. Zuethen,P. & Bøgh-Sørensen, L. 2003. Food Preservation Techniques. Cambridge: Woodhead Publishing. 7. Zimmerer . T.W. and Scarborough, N.M. 2008. Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management, 5th. Edition, New Jersey: Prentice Hall. 8. Megginson, L, C., Byrd, M. J. and Megginson, W.L. 2008. Small Business Management: An entrepreneur’s guidebook, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill International Edition. 9. Timmons, J.A.,2004. New Venture Creation - Entrepreneurship for the 21st. Century, 6th. Edition, Singapore: Irwin McGraw-Hill.

SK33803 POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND TECHNOLOGY The course discusses the fundamental principles of polymer chemistry and technology. The discussion covers the reactions mechanism and types of polymers based on reactions category such as chain-growth and step-growth polymerization and polymerization kinetics. The general characteristics of polymer, polymerization process/ polymer synthesis, specific characteristic of polymer including thermal and morphology and progress/ development of industrial polymers. Some polymers are uses to the advanced technologies such as membrane separations, biomedical engineering and drug delivery, electrically-conductive polymers, photonic polymers and polymer dispersed liquid crystals (PLDC). Laboratory experiments on the specific topic are considered. References Fried Joel, R., 2014. Polymer Science and Technology, 3th Edition, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New

Jersey, USA. Sperling, L. H, 2006. Introduction to Physical Polymer Science, 4th Edition, WileyIntersciecne, NY, USA Nicholson, J.W. 2012. The Chemistry of Polymers, Royal Society of Chemistry, London. Malcolm, P. Stevens, 1999. , Polymer Chemistry: An Introduction, 3rd edition, Oxford University Press. Challa, G., 1993, Polymer Chemistry: An Introduction, Ellis Horward, NY.

SK41303 PRINCIPLES AND TECHNOLOGY OF BIOCHEMICAL PROCESSES This course is to present an introduction to fundamental and applied aspects of industrial biochemical processing. Topics of lectures include principles of basic biology and biochemical processes covering cell structure and composition, cell metabolism and metabolic pathways, cell growth, enzymes, fermentation and


their applications in industry. The technology of bioreactor design, sterilization, product recovery, effluent treatment and an introduction to molecular biology techniques for improving life are covered. The main purpose of this course is to familiarise advanced undergraduates in the life sciences with applications of biochemical processes and introduce special topics in biotechnology. References Rao, D. G. 2016. Introduction to Biochemical Engineering . 2nd Ed. Tata Mc-Graw Hill Voet, D. J.; Voet, J. G. & Pratt, C. W. 2012. Principles of Biochemistry . 4th ed. John Michael L. Shuler & Fikret Kargi. 2002. Bioprocess Engineering, Basic Concepts , 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall. New Jersey. Wiley & Sons. New Jersey. 3. Companies, New Delhi. 4. Mathews C. K.; van Holde, K. E., Appling, D.R. & Anthony-Cahill, S.J. 2012 Biochemistry , 4th Edition, Pearson Education, New Jersey. 5. Borem, A.; Santos, F. R. & Bowen, D. E. 2003. Understanding Biotechnology , Pearson Education, New Jersey.

SK33203 NATURAL PRODUCTS CHEMISTRY AND DRUGS DISCOVERY The course discusses about the isolation of active compounds from natural resources, their chemical and spectroscopic characteristics and biosynthesis. Topics covered are lipids, carbohydrates, amino acids and proteins, terpenoids and steroids, aromatic compounds, flavonoids and alkaloids. Biosynthesis of terpenoids and steroids, alkaloid, polyketides, and flavonoids are also discussed. Drug discovery process, efficacy, safety and standardization as well as application of natural products are emphasized. Experiments (extraction and phytochemicals screening) and a field work will be carried out References Buss, A. D.; Butler, M. S. 2010. Natural Product Chemistry for Drug Discovery. Royal Society of Chemistry, Cambridge Bhat,S. V.; Nagasampagi,B. A.; Sivakumar, M., 2005. Chemistry of Natural Products, Springer, Berlin. Bruice, P. Y. 2017. Organic Chemistry; 8th ed.; Pearson Prentice Hall, NJ. Dewick, P. M., 2009. 3rd ed.; Medicinal Natural Products: A Biosynthetic Approach. John Wiley & Sons, West Sussex. Rydzewski, R. M., 2008. Real World Drug Discovery: A Chemist's Guide to Biotech and Pharmaceutical Research. 1st Ed. Elsevier, Oxford.

SK33403 RESIDUE AND PESTICIDE ANALYSIS This course will discuss the types of pesticide and its toxicity, its mode of action. The passage and transformation of residues in the environment and the consequences to the human being. Sample preparations will be discussed elaborately where emerging new techniques will be covered. The method of pesticide’s residue analysis will also be covered using modern instruments such as GC/MS, GC/FID/ECD/NPD, HPLC etc. References Stenersen, J. 2004. Chemical Pesticides - Mode of Action and Toxicology . CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida. 2. Hamilton, D. & Crossley, S. (ed), 2004. Pesticides Residues in Food and Drinking Water: Human Exposure and Risks . John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, England. 3. Shahamat, U.K. 2000. Bound Pesticide Residues . CRC press. New York.

SK40703 FORENSIC CHEMISTRY This course approaches the challenges, methods and analyses of forensic science from a fundamental, chemical perspective. Topics include drug analysis, arson investigation, questioned document analysis, and the analysis of paint and gunshot residue samples. References R. Saferstein .2015, Criminalistics: An Introduction to Forensic Science, 10th Edition, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River. A. Langford, J. Dean, R. Deen, D. Holmes, J. Weyers & A. Jones (2005). Practical Skills in Forensic Science. Pearson Education Ltd. England, UK. T. Kubic, N. Petraco (2003) Forensic Science: Laboratory Experiment Manual and Workbook, CRC Press, Boca Raton. B.A. J. Fisher & D.R. Fisher (2012). Techniques of Crime Scene Investigation, 7th Edition, CRC Press, Boca Raton..

SK33603 ELECROCHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY This course will cover and discuss the various topics of electrochemical technology in industries. The early lectures will be focused on electrochemical fundamental such as electrode-electron transfer, electrode processes and electrochemical dynamic. The second part of this course will address specific topics in electrochemical technology, especially examples of applications such as chemical sensor, chlorine production, metal extraction, cell an fuel cells. References Wang, J., 2006, Analytical Electrochemistry, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New Jersey.


Kanani, N. 2004. Electroplating: Basic Principles, Processes and Practice, Elsevier Ltd. Bard, A.J. and Faulkner, L.R., 2001, Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and applications, 2nd Ed. Wiley-Peterscience, New York. MATHEMATICS AND ECONOMICS PROGRAMME (HS08)

SM13103 MATHEMATICS I This course contains basic concepts of several topics such as introduction to the logic theory which must be understood by students before taking more advance subjects such as Advance Calculus. This course also covers basic mathematics in calculus which comprises of topics such as: set, number, inequalities, complex number, relation, function, limits, continuity, differentiation and integration References Stewart J., 2015. Calculus 8th edition. Brooks/Cole: Australia. Thomas G. B., Weir M. D. & Hass J. R. 2014. Thomas’ Calculus (13th Edition). Pearson. Boston. Verberg D., Purcell E. J. & Rigdon S. E. 2007. Calculus ninth edition. Pearson. United State of America. Smith R.T, Minton R.B. 2007.Calculus. McGraw‐Hill: New York. Peter Kuhfitting. 2006. Technical Calculus with Analytic Geometry. Thomson: Australia. Rosen H.K. 2003. Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications. McGraw‐Hill: New York. Ho Chong Mun & Yeo Kiam Beng. 2004. Complex Number. UMS. Sabah. Stewart J., Redlin L. & Watson S. 2006. Precalculus Fifth Edition, Mathematics for Calculus. Thomson: United State of America. Strauss M.J, Bardley G.L & Smith K.J. 2002. Calculus. Prentice Hall: New Jersey. Finney, Weir & Giordano, 2001. Thomas' Calculus. Addison‐Wesley Publishing Company. USA

SM13203 MATHEMATICS II This course contains topics such as vectors in 2D and 3D spaces, sequences and series, infinite series, power series, polar coordinate system and coordinate geometry. References Anton, H., Bivens, I.C & Davis, S. 2010. Calculus : Late Transcendentals, 9th Edition. John Wiley & Sons

(Asia) Pte Ltd Larson, R. & Edwards, B.H. 2012. Calculus, 9th Edition. Singapore : Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning.

Smith, R.T & Minton, R.B 2007. Calculus: Early Transcendentals Functions, Third Edition. KL : McGraw-Hill Stewart, J.2008.

Calculus: Early Transcendentals, 6th Edition. Singapore : Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning. Thomas, G.B., Weir, M. D. & Hass, J.R. 2010. Thomas’s Calculus : Early Transcendentals, 12th Edition, Singapore

: Pearson Education Inc.

SM13403 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING

This course provides an introduction to software construction using an object‐oriented approach; Acquire progra

mming skills in connection with mathematics or technology. Object‐oriented programming (OOP) is a programmi

ng paradigm that uses "objects" and their interactions to design applications and computer programs. It is based

on several techniques, including inheritance, modularity, polymorphism, and encapsulation. It was not commonly

used in mainstream software application development until the early 1990s. Many modern programming

languages now support OOP. From this course, students will learn the art of the object‐oriented

programming using C++ programming language after having a background in the procedural

paradigm that was introduced in the ST00702 course “Computer Programming & Simulation".

References

Gaddis, T, Walters J & Muganda G. (2012). Starting Out With C++: Early Objects. (8th ed.) US: Addison. D. S. Malik. (2011). C++ Programming: From problem analysis to program design. (5th ed.). CT. Farrell, J. (2007). Object‐Oriented Programming in C++. US: Thomson Course Technology

Deitel & Deitel. (2008). C++ How to Program. 6/E. US: Prentice Hall. Johnsonbaugh, R. & Kalin, M. (2008). Object‐Oriented Programming in C++. Prentice Hall.

Nicolai, M. J. (2010). Object‐oriented Programming in C++. John Wiley.

SM23103 LINEAR ALGEBRA Prerequisite : SM13103 & SM13203 The course starts off from basic concepts on matrices, continues with systems of linear equations and their involvement with matrices, their inverses and determinants. Finally the discussion lead to the idea of linear independence, thus paving the way to the next stage of development, which is the study of vector spaces in a subsequent course. References Gilbert Strang, 2016. Introduction to Linear Algebra, Fifth Edition Fifth Edition. WellesleyCambridge Press. David Poole, 2014. Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction. Cengage Learning. 6.


Howard Anton & Chris Rorres, 2014 . Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version C.M.Ho, K.H.Toh & A.Amran, 2007. Linear Algebra. Penerbit Universiti Malaysia Sabah, Kota Kinabalu. 2. 11th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York. 3. Beauregard, F, 1995. Linear Algebra. Addison Wesley, US. 4. Lim Voon Ka 1983. Aljabar Linear Permulaan, DBP, Kuala Lumpur. 5.

SM33103 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Prerequisite: SM13103 & SM13203 This course covers the analytical techniques to obtain a solution of the linear ordinary differential equations of the first and second-order. The topics including; the first-order differential equations: the exact differential equations, integrating factors, separable equations and linear equations; the second order differential equations will discuss functions that are linearly dep end ent or independent, reduction of order, homogeneous linear equation with constant coefficients, method of undetermined coefficients and variation of parameters; the introduction to the Laplace transform, including the inverse transform and the convolution and the solution of the linear differential equations with constant coefficients by using Laplace transform; and series solutions of differential equations including power series about an ordinary point and about singular points as commonly called the method of Frobenius. References Nagle, R.K., Saff, E.B. and Snider, A.D. 2012. Fundamentals of Differential Equations. Singapore. Addison‐Wesley, Boyce, W.E. 2008. Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems. Hoboken, New Jersey. John Wiley Polking, J., Boggesws, A. and Arnold, D. 2006. Differential Equations. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. Pearson Prentice Hall. Cushing, J.M. 2004. Differential Equations. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. Pearson Prentice Hall. Blanchard, P., Devaney, R.L. and Hall, G.R. 2002. Differential Equations. Pacific Grove, California, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning. Bronson, R. 1994. Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Differential Equations. New York. McGraw‐Hill.

S.L. 1984. Differential Equations. New York. John Wiley.

SM33503 ADVANCE MATHEMATICS I Prerequisite : SM13103 &SM13203 This course extends the method of singlevariable differential calculus (in SM10103 Mathematics I) to functions of two and more variables. This course contains basic calculus for functions of several variables with topics such as: limit and continuity, partial derivative, tangent planes, linear pproximations, differentiability, chain rule and implicit differentiation, directional derivative and the gradient followed by application of multivariable functions. References Anton H., Bivens I. & Davis S. 2016. Calculus Early Transcendentals 11th edition. Wiley. Singapore. Stewart J., 2015. Calculus 8th edition. Brooks/Cole: Australia. Thomas G. B., Weir M. D. & Hass J. R. 2014. Thomas’ Calculus (13th Edition). Pearson. Boston. Smith R.T, Minton R.B. 2007.Calculus. McGraw‐Hill: New York. Verberg D., Purcell E. J. & Rigdon S. E. 2007. Calculus ninth edition. Pearson. United State of America Fitzpatrick, P. 2006. Advanced Calculus. New York: PWS Publishing Co. Beerends R. J., Morsche H. G., Berg J. C. & Vrie E. M. 2003. Fourier and Laplace Transforms. New York. Kaplan, W. 2003. Advance Calculus. New York : Addison‐Wesley.

SM33302 NUMERICAL CALCULATION Prerequisite: ST00752 & SM23103 This course discusses various numerical methods in solving mathematical problems. Some of the problems to be discussed are non-linear equations, the system of linear equations, interpolation, Differentiation and integration, ordinary differential equations, and the two-point boundary value problem. References Richard C. Burden & J. Douglas Faires, 2010. Numerical Analysis. 9th Edition. Cengage Learning. Anthony Ralstan & Philip Rebinowitz, 2001. A First Course in Numerical Analysis. 2nd Edition. Dover Publication. Abdul Rahman Abdullah, 1990. Pengiraan Berangka. DBP. Kuala Lumpur. Atkinson. L.V. dan Harley, 1993. An Introduction to Numerical Methods With Pascal,. International Computer science series, Addison - Wesley Pub. Co. Burden, R.L, Faires, J.D. dan Reynolds. A.C. 1981. Numerical Analysis, Baton, Mass, Prindle, Weber dan Schmidt. Conter & Carl de Boor, 1993. Analisis Berangka Permulaan: Suatu Pendekatan Algoritma (Terjemahan), DBP. K.L. Smith, G. D. 1978. Numerical solution of partial differential equations: Finite Difference methods. Oxford: Oxford University Press.


SM23403 STATISTICAL ANALYSIS Prerequisite: SJ13103 This course gives the exposure on intermediate statistics with a statistical package approach. It covers several statistical methods and their applications such as experimental design, regression analysis and categorical data analysis. Statistical package usage (SPSS) will be introduced in every statistical method discussed. Emphasize will be given on the correct technique usage and output interpretation. References Devore, Jay. 2012. Probability and Statistics for Engineer and the Sciences. Brooks/Cole. Additional references supporting the course Coakes, Sheriden J., Ong, C. 2011. SPSS: Analysis without Anguish: Version 18 for Windows. Australia: John Wiley & Sons. Ahmad Syukri Y., Amran A., Darmesah G & Chin Su Na. Problems & Solutions in Statistics for Engineers & Scientists. 2008. Petaling Jaya : Prentice Hall. Miller, I & Miller, M. 2004. Mathematical Statistics with Applications Seventh Edition. New Jersey : Prentice‐Hall.

SM23203 REAL ANALYSIS This course covers some properties of rational numbers and the properties of real numbers which include the real field, the order properties, some properties of absolute value, principle of mathematical induction, inequalities, upper and lower bound, completeness axiom, cardinal numbers, finite, countable and uncountable sets, cardinal number and the algebraic properties of cardinal numbers, numerical sequences which include convergent, divergent, bounded, monotone sequences, Cauchy sequence, Cauchy’s Criterion and series which include convergence or divergence of infinite series, some basic properties of series, the comparison test, the root test, the ratio test, the integral test, the Leibnitz test, converges absolutely and converges conditionally and the Raabe’s test. References Lee Larson 2016. Introduction to Real Analysis. (Available for download at the Web address math.louisville.edu/∼lee/ira).

Bartle, G.R and Sherbert,R.D. 2011. Introduction to Real Analysis 4th Edition, John Wiley & Son, New York. Davidson, R.K and Donsig.P.A. 2002. Real Analysis with Real Applications. Prentice Hall, NJ. Ho,C.M, Amran, A and Rozaini, R. 2009. Lecture Notes on Real Analysis. School of Science & Technology, UMS, Sabah. Rudin, W. 1976. Principles of Mathematical Analysis, 3rd Edition. McGraw Hill, New York. Stoll, M. 2001. Introduction to Real Analysis 2nd Edition. Addison Wesley, New York.

SM23603 OPERATIONAL RESEARCH Prerequisite: SM13103 & SM13203 Linear Programming Formulation: Introduction to various problem solving techniques such as graph, simplex algorithm, revised simplex algorithm, primal dual, sensitivity analysis. Problem solving with integer decision variables: Gomory cutting plane. Introduction to various problems solving in transportation model, competition model and computer output interpretation: LINGO package References Taha, H.A. 2007. Operation Research: An Introduction. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Winston, W.L. & Venakataramanan, M. 2003. Introduction to Mathematical Programming. Canada: Duxbury. Michael W.C. & Camille C.P. 2001. Operations Research: A practical introduction. Boca Raton: CRC Press. Blumenfeld, D. 2001. Operations Research Calculations Handbook. Boca Raton: CRC Press. Walker, R.C. 1999. Introduction to Mathematical Programming. New Jersey: Prentice Hal References Panduan Penulisan Disertasi. Edisi ke-4. Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Alley, M. 1998. The Craft of Scientific Writing. 3rd Wilson, E.B. Jr. 1991. An Introduction to Scientific Research. Dover Publications, USA.

SM40106 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II Prerequisite : SM34203 This course concerns with the practical aspects of scientific research. It involves execution of the research plans that have been developed and evaluated in Project I (SM34203). References Panduan Penulisan Disertasi. Edisi ke-4. Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Alley, M. 1998. The Craft of Scientific Writing. 3rd Wilson, E.B. Jr. 1991. An Introduction to Scientific Research. Dover Publications, USA.


SM33202 NUMERICAL METHODS Prerequisite: ST00702 & SM33302 This course discusses on the use of computers in solving mathematical models, which is expressed in the form of partial differential equations. The topics considered are numerical methods for solving parabolic, elliptic and hyperbolic equations in multi-dimensional problems. The consistency, convergence, stability and accuracy of several numerical schemes will be included. References Arieh Iserles, 2009. A First Course in the Numerical Analysis of Differential Equations. Cambridge Text

in Applied Mathematics. Cambridge University Press. Joe D. Hoffman, 2001. Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientiest. 2nd Edition. McGraw-Hill. Abdul

Rahman Abdullah, 1990. Pengiraan Berangka. DBP. Kuala Lumpur Atkinson. L.V. dan Harley, 1993. An Introduction to Numerical Methods With Pascal,. International Computer

science series, Addison - Wesley Pub. Co. Burden, R.L, Faires, J.D. dan Reynolds. A.C. 1981. Numerical Analysis, Baton, Mass, Prindle, Weber dan

Schmidt. Conter & Carl de Boor, 1993. Analisis Berangka Permulaan: Suatu Pendekatan Algoritma (Terjemahan), DBP. K.L.

Smith, G. D. 1978. Numerical solution of partial differential equations: Finite Difference methods. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

SM40208 INDUSTRIAL TRANING Student shall be placed in an industry or research area at least 14 weeks under industrial supervision. This training will be evaluated and student requested provide one written report after the industrial training over.

SM33403 CALCULUS COMPLEX VARIABLES Pre-requisite: SM33503 This course covers topics such as regions in complex plane, connected and multi-connected domain, plane equation in complex form, complex variable functions, analysis functions, Cauchy-Riemann condition, Harmonic functions, elementary functions, Riemann domain, complex integral, Cauchy-Goursat and their applications, Cauchy integral theorem and formula, Morer a’ s theorem, Lio uville theorem and fundamental theorem of algebra, infinite series, Taylor’s theorem, Laurent theorem, interior singular points, Cauchy residue theorem and their applications. References Aminuddin Ressang, 1995. Pembolehubah Kompleks Permulaan. Jilid I dan II. DBP, Kuala Lumpur. Brown, J.W. & Churchill, R.V. 199 6. Complex Variables and Applications, 6th ed. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Singapore.

Mathews, J.H. 1988. Complex Variables for Mathematics & Engineering, 2nd ed. WCB Publisher, Iowa Ngu yen Huu Bong, 1994. Analisis Kompleks dan Penerapan. DBP, Kuala Lumpur. Osborne, A.D. 1999. Comple x Variables and Their Applications. Addison Wesley Longman, Singapore. Wunsch, A.D. 200 5.

Compl ex Variables with Applications, 3rd ed. Pearson Education Inc., Singapore.

SM43303 DECISION SCIENCES The course studies on the various techniques that help students in the analyses of complex decision-making problems rationally and logically. It starts off with introduction to conceptual and theoretical decisions by further introducing techniques of analyses including Bayesian, Network models like PERT/CPM, and Markov. Solutions using computer software packages are encouraged. References Anderson D.R., Sweeney D.J., Williams T.A. & Martin K. 2008. An Introduction To Management Science:

Quantitative Approaches To Decisión Making. Int. Ed. Thomson Learning. Hamdy A. Taha. 2003. Operations Research: An Introduction. Ed. Prentice Hall. Bernard W.T. 2004.

Introduction to Management Science. 8th Ed. Pearson Prentice Hall. Winston, W.L. & Albright, S.C. 2001. Practical Management Science. Ed. Duxbury, California. Cheema, D.S. 2005.

Operations Research. Laxmi Publication, New Delhi.

SM33603 OPTIMIZATION Prerequisite : SM23603 This course is the continuation from Operational Research (SM21003). Topics that will be discussed here are linear programming, nonlinear programming, deterministic dynamic programming, network analysis: networking optimization problem, CPM, transportation and assignment problems. Markovian, stochastic and queuing concept and applications will be introduced. Applications of computer software packages in solving optimization problems are encouraged.


References Taha , H.A. 2007. Operations Research: An Introduction. 8th Edition. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Winston, L. W. 2004. Operations Research: Application and Algorithms. 2nd ed. PWS‐Kent Publishing, Boston. Paul A. Jensen & Jonathan F. Baird. 2003. Operations Research: Models and Methods, John Wiley & Sons,

USA. Hiller, F.S. & Lieberman, G.J. 2001. Introduction to Operations Research, Holden‐Day, Inc, New York. Rohani Yaacob. 2001. Pengaturcaraan Linear & Integer, USM, Pulau Pinang

SM33803 ADVANCED MATHEMATICS II Prerequisite : SM33503 This course begins with an introduction for multiple integration, which are needed to computer the mass, moment of inertia and other important properties of three dimensional solids. This is followed by discussions on the concept of line and surface integrals of a vector integral calculus. Related aspects are introduced and discussed, including Green’s Theorem, Divergence Theorem, and Stokes’ theorem. This course ends with a discussion on Fourier series. References

Anton H., Bivens I. & Davis S. 2016. Calculus Early Transcendentals 11th edition. Wiley. Singapore..

Other reference materials :

Stewart J., 2015. Calculus 8th edition. Brooks/Cole: Australia.

Thomas G. B., Weir M. D. & Hass J. R. 2014. Thomas’ Calculus (13th Edition). Pearson. Boston.

Smith R.T, Minton R.B. 2007.Calculus. McGraw‐Hill: New York.

Verberg D., Purcell E. J. & Rigdon S. E. 2007. Calculus ninth edition. Pearson. United State of America

Fitzpatrick, P. 2006. Advanced Calculus. New York: PWS Publishing Co.

Beerends R. J., Morsche H. G., Berg J. C. & Vrie E. M. 2003. Fourier and Laplace Transforms. New York.

Kaplan, W. 2003. Advance Calculus. New York : Addison‐Wesley.

(Any Calculus books available in the library)

SM43103 MATHEMATICAL MODELING This course introduces the principles of mathematical modeling and the design process. The main objectives of this course are: to explore mathematical models of real world situations, to set up such models, and to review the mathematics needed to treat such models. Analysis of computer simulations of the models plays a major role in this course. There will be several computer laboratory sessions during the module. Students will gain experience and skills in using simulation software packages or libraries. The course work, which is a major component of the module, applies these skills in the study of a practical real-life example. References Frank R. Giordano, William P. Fox, Steven B. Horton and Maurice D. Weir. A First Course in Mathematical

Modeling (Fourth Edition), Brooks Cole, 2009. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction (Seventh Edition), Prentice Hall, 2003. F. S. Hillier and G. J. Lieberman, Introduction to Operations Research (Eight Edition), McGraw Hill, 2005. Erich Neuwirth and Deane Arganbright, the Active Modeler: Mathematical Modeling with Microsoft Excel, Brooks Cole, 2004.

Paul A. Jensen and Jonathan F. Bard. Operations Research Models and Methods. John Wiley & Sons. 2003.

SJ13203 MICROECONOMICS I This course is designed to introduce the concepts and theories of microeconomics and its applications to the real world. This course comprises of four sections stated as follows: 1) Introduction-introduces microeconomics, its scope and market; 2) Consumer decision-consumer choice, individual and market demand, and individual as a supplier; 3) Producer decision-production and cost of production; and 4) Market behaviour-introduces perfect competitive market, monopoly, monopolistic competition and oligopoly, as well as market failures. References Hway Boon. (2011). Principles of Microeconomics. Malaysia edition. Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd. David Besanko and Ronald R. Braeutigam. 2010. Microeconomics. 4th edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (ebook) Deviga Vengedasalam, Karunagaran Madhavan, and Rohana Kamaruddin. 2008. Microeconomics. Oxford University Press N. Gregory Mankiw, Goh Soo Khoon, Yen Siew Hwa, Muszafarshah Mohd Mustafa, Ong N. Gregory Mankiw. 2008. Principles of Microeconomics. 5th edition. South‐Western Cengage Learning. (ebook)

SJ123203 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT I This course is an introduction course in the field of finance. It covers the main idea in finance that starts with a general background, conceptual framework and techniques to assist in managing financial decision. The main focuses are towards fundamental principal, exercises and modern financial management procedures.


References Block S.B. & Hirt, G.A. (2009). Foundations of Financial Management. NY: McGraw‐Hill. 13

th Ed.

Ross, S.A. et al. (2007). Financial Management Fundamentals in Malaysia. Malaysia: McGraw‐Hill. 2nd Ed. Brigham, E.F. & Houstan, J.F. (2007). Essentials of Financial Management. FL: Thomson.

SJ13103 ECONOMIC STATISTICS This course gives an exposure to descriptive statistics, probability, and inferential statistics. The topics covered the concept & basic of probability, conditional probability, Bayes theorem, random variable, mathematical expectation, discrete & continuo us probability distribution, several special probability distributions such as Bernoulli, Binomial, Poisson, Multinomial, Uniform, Exponential and Normal, sampling & sampling distribution, estimation and hypotheses testing. References Devore, Jay. 2012. Probability and Statistics for Engineer and the Sciences. Brooks/Cole. Ahmad Syukri Y., Amran A., Darmesah G & Chin Su Na. Problems & Solutions in Statistics for Engineers & Scientists. 2008.

Petaling Jaya : Prentice Hall. Hogg, R.V., McKean, J.W. & Craig, A.T.2005. Introduction to Methamatical Statistics, 6th Edition. New Jersey:

Prentice hall Miller, I & Miller, M. 2004. Mathematical Statistics with Applications Seventh Edition. New Jersey : Prentice-Hall. Wackerly, D.D, Mendenhall, W & Sceaffer, R.L. 2002. Mathematical Statistics with Applications Sixth Edition. Thomson.

SJ23303 MACROECONOMICS I This course provides introductory materials for macroeconomics. This course is an introduction to the behavioral science of economics which focuses on the aggregate behavior of households, firms and the government. Topics covered include data and performance of macroeconomics, economic growth, savings, investment, monetary system, unemployment, inflation, short‐run aggregate fluctuations, international trade or open economies and macroeconomic stabilization policies. References Zubair Hasan and Habibah Lehar. 2009. Macroeconomics. Oxford University Press Mankiw, N.Gregory, 2009/2007. Principles of Macroeconomics. Thomson South‐Western (5th / 4th Edition) Mankiw, N.Gregory, 2001/2004. Principles of Macroeconomics. HarcourtCollege Publishers (2nd Edition) / Thomson South‐Western (3rd Edition) Baumol,W.J., and Blinder,A.S. 2005 (9 edition). Macroeconomics: Principles and Policy. Thomson South‐Western. Dornbusch, Fischer and Startz, 2001. Macroeconomics. MacGraw‐Hill Education.

SJ33303 FINANCIAL MATHEMATICS This course preliminary introduces to the students the basic concepts in financial mathematics. It covers the basic mathematical concepts on interests, rate of return, annuities, stocks, bonds and loans. References Stephen G. K. 2005. The Theory of Interest. 2nd Ed. Singapore: McGraw -Hill. Knox D.M., Zima P. & Brown R.L. 2001. Mathematics of Finance. New York: McGraw-Hill Shao S.P. & Shao L.P. 1998. Mathematics For Management and Finance. South-Western College Publishing. Stampfli J. & Goodman, V. 2001. The Mathematics of Finance: Modeling and Hedging. Brooks/Cole Thompson Learning

SJ23403 MACROECONOMICS II The discipline of Macroeconomics II is an extension of the Macroeconomic I where it enables the students to understand the various macroeconomic school of thoughts. References Bradford, B. & De Long. Macroeconomics, Mc Graw Hill. Gordon, Robert J. 2006. Macroeconomics, Addison Wesley. Hubbard, R. Glenn & Anthony Patric O’Brien. 2006. Macroeconomis, Pearson Education. Miller & Van Hoose. 2007. Macroeconomics. Theories, Practice and International Applications, Thomson

Learning. O’ Sullivan & Sheffrin. 2006. Macroeconomics, Prentice Hall.

SJ23103 MICROECONOMICS II This course is an extension of Microeconomics I. This course provides the basic theory for the analysis of factor markets. The course also explains some government policy interventions and the consequences or total impact of the interventions. This course also contains three basic types or degree of price discrimination and explains how a firm with market power can capture more surplus by engaging in price discrimination. Game theory is also discussed in order to understand how to make optimal decision making in competitive situations. The final topic offers an assortment of three topics at the discipline’s frontier to see how economists are trying to expand their understanding of human behavior and society.


References Mankiw, N. G., Khoon. G. S., Hwa, Y. S., Muszafarshah, M. M. and Boon, O. H. 2011. Principles of Microeconomics. Malaysia edition. Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd Besanko, D. and Braeutigam, R. R. 2006. Microeconomics. 2nd edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Deviga Vengedasalam, Karunagaran Madhavan, and Rohana Kamaruddin. 2008. Microeconomics. Oxford University Press Mankiw, N. G. 2008. Principles of Microeconomics. 5th edition. South‐Western Cengage Learning Ahlersten, Krister. 2008. Microeconomics. Ventus Publishing ApS

SJ33203 ECONOMETRICS Definition, scope and the role in econometrics; applications of mathematics and statistics in everyday life; introduction to theory of price rebounce, theory of income rebounce; Regression Model and the related topics such as heteroscedasticity, serial correlation, dummy variable specification, instrument variation, error in variable; autoregression mode l; simultaneous equations models; identification.

References Wooldridge, J.M. 2006. Introductory Econometrics: A modern Approach. Mason, Ohio: Thomson Higher Education Berndt, E.R. 1990. The Practice of Econometrics. Reading: Addison-Wesley. Carter Hill, William Griffiths & George Judge. 1997. Undergraduate Econometrics. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Judge, G.G., Hill, R.C., Griffiths, W.E. Lutkepohl, H. & Lee, T.C. 1988. Introduction to the theory and

Practice of Econometrics. New York: John Wiley and Sons. Kutner, M.H.,Nachtsheim, C.J. & Neter, J. 2008. Applied Linear Regressions Models.New York: McGraw Hill

McGuigan, J.R., Moyer, R.C. & Harris, F.H. 2008. Economics for managers. Mason, Ohio: Thomson Higher Education Ramu Ramanathan. 2002. Introductory Econometrics with Applications. London: Harcourt College Publishers

William E. Griffiths, R. Carter Hill & George G. Judge. 1993. Learning and Practicing Econometrics. New York: John Wiley & Sons.

Wooldridge, J.M. 2006. Introductory Econometrics: A modern Approach. Mason, Ohio: Thomson Higher Education

SJ43103 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS In this course, theories of international economics are introduced and their various implications are discussed. The course consists of three parts: 1) International Trade Theory, 2) International Trade Policy, 3) Open-Economy Macroeconomics and International Macroeconomic Policy. The first part of the course introduces main tenets of the various theories of the international trade. The second part examines the various issues of international trade policies. The third part focuses on the open-economy macroeconomics. It also discusses the international macroeconomic policy.

References Paul R. Krugman and Maurice Obstfeld (2007). International Economics: Theory and Policy, 8th Edition. Pearson. Beth V. Yarbrough a nd Robert M. Yarbrough (2007). The World Economy : Trade and Finance, 6th Edition.

Thomson publication. Appleyard and Field (2007). International Economics, 4th Edition. McGraw-Hill.

SJ33103 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT II This course is an extension to the Financial Management I. The course focuses on some advanced analysis of financial statements as well as cash flow estimation with risk analysis. Other relevant topics to the financial management are also covered in this course, namely shareholders’ dividends distribution procedures, decision on capital structure, management of multinational financial, hybrid financing such as preferred stock, warrants, and convertibles, initial public offerings, investment banking, and financial restructuring, mergers, LBOs, divestitures, and holding companies, and bankruptcy, reorganization, and liquidation. References Block S.B. & Hirt, G.A. (2009). Foundations of Financial Management. NY: McGraw-Hill. 13th Ed. Ross, S.A. et al. (2007). Financial Management Fundamentals in Malaysia. Malaysia: McGraw-Hill. 2nd Ed. Brigham, E.F. & Houstan, J.F. (2007). Essentials of Financial Management. FL: Thomson. MATHEMATICS WITH COMPUTER GRAPHICS PROGRAMME (HS09)

MAJOR COURSES

SW12103 CALCULUS I This course contains basic concepts of calculus as introduction to the mathematical functions which must be understood by students before taking more advance subjects such as Advance Calculus. This course also covers topics such as: limits, continuity, differentiation, integration and the applications of differentiation and integration.


References Stewart, J. 2012. Calculus 7th Ed: Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning Larson, R. & Edwards, B.H. 2012. Calculus, 9th Edition. Singapore : Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning Anton, H., Bivens, I. C. & Davis, S. 2010. Calculus : Late Transcendentals, 9th Edition. John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd Verberg D., Purcell E. J. & Rigdon S. E. 2007. Calculus ninth edition. Pearson. United State of America. Smith R.T, Minton R.B. 2007.Calculus. McGraw‐Hill: New York.

SW12203 CALCULUS II

Prerequisite: SW12103 Calculus I

This course extends the method of single‐variable differential and integration calculus to

functions of two and more variables. This course contains basic calculus for functions of several variables with topics such as: limit and continuity, partial derivative, tangent planes, linear approximations, differentiability. This is followed by discussions on the concept of line and surface integrals of a vector integral calculus. Related aspects are introduced and discussed, including Green’s Theorem, Divergence Theorem, and Stokes’ theorem. This course ends with a discussion References Stewart, J. 2016. Calculus: Early Transcendental. Cancage Learning. Boston USA Boelkin, M., Austin, D., & Schlicker, S. 2015. Active Calculus. Orthogonal Publishing Stewart, J. 2013. Multivariable Calculus: Concept and Contexts. Content Technologies, Inc. William, E. B. & Richard., C. D. 2012. Elementary Differential Equations. John Wiley and Sons Inc. Thomas G. B., Weir M. D. & Hass J. R. 2010. Thomas’ Calculus. Pearson. Boston. Verberg D., Purcell E. J. & Rigdon S. E. 2007. Calculus ninth edition. Pearson. United State of America. Smith R.T, Minton R.B. 2006.Calculus. McGraw‐Hill: New York. Fitzpatrick, P. 2006. Advanced Calculus. New York: PWS Publishing Co. Beerends R. J., Morsche H. G., Berg J. C. & Vrie E. M. 2003. Fourier and Laplace Transforms. New York. Kaplan, W. 2002. Advanse Calculus. New York : Addison‐Wesley. Finney & Thomas. 2001. Calculus (10th edition). New York : Addison‐Wesley.

SW12403 LINEAR ALGEBRA The course starts off from basic concepts on matrices, continues with systems of linear equations and their involvement with matrices, their inverses and determinants. Finally the discussion lead to the idea of linear independence, thus paving the way to the next stage of development, which is the study of vector spaces in a subsequent course.

References

Strang, G. 2016. Introduction to Linear Algebra, Fifth Edition, Cambrige Press: Wellesley. Larson, R. 2013. Elementary Linear Algebra, 7th Edition, Boston, MA: Brooks/Cole. C.M.Ho, K.H.Toh & A.Amran, 2007. Linear Algebra. Penerbit Universiti Malaysia Sabah, Kota Kinabalu. Anton, H & Busby, R, 2003 . Contemporary Linear Algebra, John Wiley & Sons, New York. Beauregard, F, 1995. Linear Algebra. Addison Wesley, US. Serge Lang, 1986. Introduction to Linear Algebra Second Edition, Springer‐Verlag, New York.

SW22103 STATISTIC This course covers basic statistics which comprises of topics such as: probability, random variable, discrete probability distributions, continuous probability distributions, parameter estimations, hypothesis testing, linear regression and correlation. References Weiss, N. 2014. Introductory Statistics. Ninth Edition. Pearson Education Limited, Edinburgh. Bluman, A.G. 2009. Elementary Statistics A Step by Step Approach.7th ed. McGraw Hill. New York Ahmad Syukri Y., Amran A., Darmesah G and Chin Su Na. Problems & Solutions in Statistics for Engineers & Scientists. 2008. Prentice Hall. Wackerly, D.D., Mendenhall III, W., and Scheaffer, R.L. 2002. Mathematical Statistics with Applications, 6th Edition. Thomson Learning:South Western Ohio. Walpole and Myers. 2001. Probability and Statistics (6th edition). Prentice Hall. New Jersey

SW22303 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS The purpose of this course is to teach students how to think mathematically by learning a particular set of mathematical facts and how to apply them. To achieve these goals, some important fields are covered: logic and proofs, matrices, graph theory, counting methods, Boolean algebra, and modeling computation. References Levin, O. 2016. Discrete Mathematics: An Open Introduction. 2nd Edition by Oscar Levin


Scheinerman, E. A. 2013. A Discrete Introduction. 3rd Edition. Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning. Rosen, K.H. 2013. Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications. 7th Ed. McGraw‐Hill. S. E. Susanna. 2011. Discrete Mathematics with Applications. 4th Ed. Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning. Malik, D.S. & Sen, M.K. 2010. Discrete Mathematics: Theory and Applications. Revised Ed. Cengage Learning Asia Pte. Ltd. Johnsonbaugh, R. 2005. Discrete Mathematics. 6th Ed. Pearson Prentice Hall. James L. H. 2003. Discrete Mathematics. Sudbury, MA. : Jones and Bartlett Pub. Norman L. B. 2002. Discrete mathematics. Oxford : Oxford University Press Sherwood W, Thomas M, Charles T. R. 2000. Reading : Addison‐ Wesley Truss, J. 1999. Discrete Mathematics For Computer Scientists. Ed. ke‐2. Singapore. Addison Wesley.

SW22503 MATHEMATICS FOR COMPUTER GRAPHICS The aim of this course is to introduce and develop mathematical skills that underpin the technical aspects of computer graphics application. It will emphasize on matrix, vector, geometry and parametric representation, general concept of Vector Calculus and Numerical Methods. For furtherunderstanding about this subject, a lot of exercises will be given. At the end of the course, students should

application.

rstand the basic probabilistic inequalities and limit results and be able to apply them to commonly arising models References J. Vince. 2015. Foundation Mathematics for Computer Science: A Visual Approach. Springer. Marschner, S & Sherly P. 2015. Fundamental of Computer Graphics 4th Edition. AK Peters Ltd. J. Vince. 2014. Mathematics for Computer Graphics, Undergraduate topics in Computer Science, Springer‐Verlag London L. Eric. 2012. Mathematics for 3D Game Programming and Computer Graphics, Third Edition, Cengage Learning,USA. J. Vince. 2012. Matrix Transforms for Computer Games and Animation. Springer J. Vince. 2011. Geometry for Computer Graphics. Springer. J. Vince. 2011. Rotation Transforms for Computer Graphic. Springer. J. Vince. 2011. Vector Analysis for Computer Graphics. Springer

SW22203 REAL ANALYSIS This course covers some properties of rational numbers and the properties of real numbers which include the real field, the order properties, some properties of absolute value, principle of mathematical induction, inequalities, upper and lower bound, completeness axiom, cardinal numbers, finite, countable and uncountable sets, cardinal number and the algebraic properties of cardinal numbers, numerical sequences which include convergent, divergent, bounded, monotone sequences, Cauchy sequence, Cauchy’s Criterion and series which include convergence or divergence of infinite series, some basic properties of series, the comparison test, the root test, the ratio test, the integral test, the Leibnitz test, converges absolutely and converges conditionally and the Raabe’s test.

References Lebl, J. 2013. Basic Analysis: Introduction to Real Analysis. Creative Common, USA. Davidson, R.K and Donsig.P.A. 2002. Real Analysis with Real Applications. Prentice Hall, NJ. Ho,C.M, Amran, A and Rozaini, R. 2009. Lecture Notes on Real Analysis. School of Science & Technology, UMS, Sabah. Bartle, G.R and Sherbert,R.D. 1992. Introduction to Real Analysis 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Son, New York. Stoll, M. 2001. Introduction to Real Analysis 2nd Edition. Addison Wesley, New York.

SW22403 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION Prerequisite: SW12106 Calculus I and SW12203 Calculus II This course covers the analytical techniques to obtain a solution of the linear ordinary differential equations of the first and second-order. The topics including; the first-order differential equations: the exact differential equations, integrating factors, separable equations and linear equations; the second order differential equations will discuss functions that are linearly dependent or independent, reduction of order, homogeneous linear equation with constant coefficients, method of undetermined coefficients and variation of parameters; the introduction to the Laplace transform, including the inverse transform and the convolution and the solution of the linear differential equations with constant coefficients by using Laplace transform; and series solutions of differential equations including power series about an ordinary point and about singular points as commonly called the method of Frobenius. References Imhoff, S. 2016. Differential Equations in 24 Hours with Solutions and Historical Notes. Outskirts Press Inc. Bronson, R. & Costa, G. B. 2014. Schaum’s Outline: Differential Equation. 4th Edition. New York: McGraw‐Hill Education


DuChateau, P. & Zachmann, D. W. 2011. Schaum’s Outline: Partial Differential Equation. 3rd Edition. New York: McGraw‐Hill Education Boyce, W.E. 2008. Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems. Hoboken. New Jersey: John Wiley. Polking, J., Boggesws, A. and Arnold, D. 2006. Differential Equations. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Cushing, J.M. 2004. Differential Equations. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Blanchard, P., Devaney, R.L. and Hall, G.R. 2002. Differential Equations. Pacific Grove, California: Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning. Bronson, R. 1994. Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Differential Equations. New York: McGraw‐Hill. Ross, S.L. 1984. Differential Equations. New York: John Wiley.

SW22603 CRYPTOGRAPHY Prerequisite: SW22303 Discrete Mathematics This course begin with the introduction to the general concept of cryptography including the security goals, security attacks, data concealing techniques and Hard Mathematical Problems. Students also will be exposed to the role of cryptography in computer security concept. After that, some mathematical techniques those needed in cryptography will be taught such as modular arithmetic, algebraic structure and prime numbers. The next topic is about the conventional type of cryptosystem such as Data Encryption Standard (DES) and Advances Encryption Standard (AES). Modern cryptosystem such as RSA, ElGamal, Rabin and Elliptic Curve cryptosystems will be introduced to the students in the next topic. Some methods of security attacks also will be taught such as direct, exploiting an error and active attacks. The last topic in this course is Digital Signature. Variation and applications of Digital Signature will be emphasized. References Conklin, WM, A. & White, G. 2015. CompTIA Security+ All‐in‐One Exam Guide. 4

th Edition. McGraw‐Hill

Education. Lachance, D. & Clarke, G. E. 2014. CompTIA Security+ Certification Practice Exams. 2

nd Edition. McGraw‐Hill

Education. Pardo, J. L. G. 2013. Introduction to Cryptography with Maple. Springer Stalling, W. 2011. Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice. 5th Ed: Pearson Prentice Hall. Swenson, C. 2008. Modern Cryptanalysis. Wiley Publishing, Inc. Katz, J. & Lindell, Y. 2008. Introduction to Modern Cryptography. Chapman & Hall/CRC. Farouzan, B. A. 2008. Introduction to Cryptography and Network Security. McGraw‐Hill. Hoffstein, J. Pipher, J. Silverman, J. H. 2004. An Introduction to Mathematical Cryptography. Springer. Wagstaff Jr., S. S. 2003. Cryptanalysis of Number Theoretic Ciphers. Chapman & Hall/CRC.

SW32103 NUMERICAL METHOD Prerequisite: ST00702 Computer Programming and Simulation This course discusses on the use of computers in solving mathematical models, which is expressed in the form of partial differential equations. The topics considered are numerical methods for solving parabolic, elliptic and hyperbolic equations in multi-dimensional problems. The consistency, convergence, stability and accuracy of several numerical schemes will be included. References

Gilat, A. & Subramaniam, V. 2014. Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientist. 3rd

Edition. Wiley. Arieh Iserles, 2009. A First Course in the Numerical Analysis of Differential Equations. Cambridge Text in

Applied Mathematics. Cambridge University Press. Abdul Rahman Abdullah, 1990. Pengiraan Berangka. DBP. Kuala Lumpur Atkinson. L.V. dan Harley, 1993. An Introduction to Numerical Methods With Pascal,. International Computer

science series, Addison ‐ Wesley Pub. Co. Burden, R.L, Faires, J.D. dan Reynolds. A.C. 1981. Numerical Analysis, Baton, Mass, Prindle, Weber dan

Schmidt. Conter & Carl de Boor, 1993. Analisis Berangka Permulaan: Suatu Pendekatan Algoritma (Terjemahan), DBP.

K.L. Smith, G. D. 1978. Numerical solution of partial differential equations: Finite Difference methods. Oxford: Oxford

University Press.

SW32303 CALCULUS COMPLEX VARIABLES This course covers topics such as regions in complex plane, connected and multi-connected domain, plane equation in complex form, complex variable functions, analytic functions, Cauchy-Riemann condition, Harmonic functions, elementary functions, Riemann domain, complex integral, Cauchy-Goursat and their applications, Cauchy integral theorem and formula, Morera’s theorem, Liouville theorem and fundamental theorem of algebra, infinite series, Taylor’s theorem, Laurent theorem, interior singular points, Cauchy residue theorem and their applications.


References Brown, J.W. & Churchill, R.V. 2014. Complex Variables and Applications, 9th Edition, McGraw‐Hill Book Co., USA. Nguyen Huu Bong, 1994. Analisis Kompleks dan Penerapan. DBP, Kuala Lumpur. Osborne, A.D. 1999. Complex Variables and Their Applications. Addison Wesley Longman, Singapore. Wunsch, A.D. 2005. Complex Variables with Applications, 3rd ed. Pearson Education Inc., Singapore. S. Ponnusamy & Herb Silverman, 2006. Complex Variables with Applications. Birkauser..

SW34203 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT I / SW40106 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II Scientific Project I concerns with the theoretical aspects of carrying out a research project. It covers background of the study and problem statement, literature review, methodology, report presentation, and writing of a project report. On the other hand, Scientific Project II concerns with the practical aspects of scientific research. It involves execution of the research plans that have been developed and evaluated in Scientific Project I (SW34203). References Panduan Penulisan Dissertasi Edisi ke‐4. Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

SW32203 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING This course introduces the principles of mathematical modeling and the design process. The main objectives of this course are: to explore mathematical models of real world situations, to set up such models, and to review the mathematics needed to treat such models. Analysis of computer simulations of the models plays a major role in this course. There will be several computer laboratory sessions during the module. Students will gain experience and skills in using simulation software packages or libraries. The course work, which is a major component of the module, applies these skills in the study of a practical real-life example.

References Meerschaert, M. M. 2013. Mathematical Modeling. Fourth Edition. Academic Press, Netherland. Erich Neuwirth and Deane Arganbright, the Active Modeler: Mathematical Modeling with Microsoft Excel, Brooks

Cole, 2004. Frank R. Giordano, William P. Fox, Steven B. Horton and Maurice D. Weir. A First Course in Mathematical

Modeling (Fourth Edition), Brooks Cole, 2009. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction (Seventh Edition), Prentice Hall, 2003. F. S. Hillier and G. J. Lieberman, Introduction to Operations Research (Eight Edition), McGraw Hill, 2005.

SW32403 ADVANCE CALCULUS Prerequisites: SW12103 Calculus I, SW12203 Calculus II, and SW22203 Real Analysis This course covers the theory and applications of differential and integral calculus of functions of several variables. Content includes vectors in n-space, real-valued functions, vector functions, limits, continuity, partial derivatives, vector and gradient fields, multiple integrals, line integrals, Green’s Theorem, Stokes’s Theorem and applications. References Stewart, J. 2016. Calculus: Early Transcendental. Cancage Learning. Boston USA Boelkin, M., Austin, D., & Schlicker, S. 2015. Active Calculus. Orthogonal Publishing Stewart, J. 2013. Multivariable Calculus: Concept and Contexts. Content Technologies,Inc. William, E. B. & Richard., C. D. 2012. Elementary Differential Equations. John Wiley and Sons Inc. Thomas G. B., Weir M. D. & Hass J. R. 2010. Thomas’ Calculus. Pearson. Boston. Verberg D., Purcell E. J. & Rigdon S. E. 2007. Calculus ninth edition. Pearson. United State of America. Smith R.T, Minton R.B. 2006.Calculus. McGraw‐Hill: New York. Fitzpatrick, P. 2006. Advanced Calculus. New York: PWS Publishing Co. Beerends R. J., Morsche H. G., Berg J. C. & Vrie E. M. 2003. Fourier and Laplace Transforms. New York. Kaplan, W. 2002. Advanse Calculus. New York : Addison‐Wesley. Finney & Thomas. 2001. Calculus (10th edition). New York : Addison‐Wesley.

SW32603 MATHEMATICAL PROGRAMMING This course will introduce the students to some mathematical techniques which are used as the tools for solving maximization or minimization model. Some important concepts such as linear programming, integer programming, non-linear programming, goal programming, transportation problems, assignment problems, game theory and network models will be covered. Computer packages such as LINGO and LIDO will be used to solve the mathematical model.

References Martin, K., Jonathan, M. & Leroy, W. 2016. Behavioral Operational Research: Theory Methodology and Practice. Palgrave Macmillan UK. Katta, G.M. 2014. Case Studies in Operations Research: Applications of Optimal Decision Making. Springer New York. Hillier, F.S. & Lieberman, G. J. 2012. Introduction to Operations Research. 9th Edition. Singapore: McGraw Hill.


Winston, W.L. & Venakataramanan, M. 2003. Introduction to Mathematical Programming. Canada: Duxbury. Jensen, P.A. & Bard, J.F. 2003. Operations Research Models and Methods. New Jersey: Wiley. Winston, W.L. 1994. Operations Research: applications and Algorithms. Delmont: Duxbury.

SW40303 CONTROL MATHEMATICS The purpose of this course is to introduce the role of mathematics in solving problems of control systems including feedback phenomena, input-output, and so on. Students will learn how to solve some of the controlled problems by using various methods such as Laplace transform and z-transform. References K. Z. Liu & Yao Yu. 2016. Robust Control: Theory and Application. Wiley. Distefano, J. & Stubberud, A. R. 2013. Schaum’s Outline of Feedback and Control Systems. 2nd Edition. Mc.Graw Hill. Zabczyk, J. 2008. Mathematical Control Theory: An Introduction. Birkhauser Boston. Engelberg, S. 2005. Mathematical Introduction to Control Theory. Vol.2. Imperial College Press. Dorsey, J. 2001. Control of Linear Systems. New York: McGraw Hill Companies. Sontag, E. D. 1998. Mathematical Control Theory: Deterministic Finite Dimensional Systems. Springer.

SW40503 COMPUTATIONAL GEOMETRY This course will provides some geometry algorithms which consider algorithm and data structure to solve problems using computer in form of discrete geometry (points, lines and polygon) especially in two and three spaces. The topics include curves and surface, convex hull, triangulation, polygon partitioning, convex hull and voronoi diagram.

References Baerentzer, J.A., Gravesen, J., Anton, F. & Aanaes, H. 2012. Guide to Computational Geometry Processing: Foundations, Algorithms, and Methods. Springer: Dordrecht. O'Rourke, J.. 1998. Computational Geometry in C. 2nd Edition. United States of America: Cambridge University Press. Marsh, D.. 2005. Applied Geometry for Computer Graphics and CAD. 2nd Edition. United States of America: Springer. Mount, D. M. 2005. CMSC 754 Computational Geometry. University of Maryland. Berg, M. D., Cheong, O., Kreveld, M. V. & Overmars, M.. 2008. Computational

SW40703 FUZZY MATHEMATICS The purpose of this course is to introduce the basic theory of fuzzy sets and its applications; including fuzzy relations, fuzzy functions, extension principle, linguistic variables, and fuzzy logic. At the end of this course the students are able to understand the concepts of fuzzy theory especially in fuzzy mathematics and fuzzy systems. References Chander, M. 2015. An Introduction to Fuzzy Set Theory and Fuzzy Logic. New Delhi, India.\ Russell, S. & Norvig, P. 2010. Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach. 3rd Edition. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Zimmerman, H.J. 2001. Fuzzy sets theory and Its application. 4th Edition. United States of America, Kluwer Academic Publisher. Buckley, J.J & Eslami, E. 2002. An Introduction to Fuzzy Logic and Fuzzy Set. Germany: Spinger. Nguyen, H.T. & Walker, E.A. 1999. A first Course in Fuzzy Logic. 4nd Edition. CRC Press. Das, N.R. & Nanda, S. 2010. Fuzzy Mathematical Concepts. United Kingdom, Alpha Science International Ltd

SW40208 INDUSTRIAL TRANING Student shall be placed in an industry or research area at least 14 weeks under industrial supervision. This training will be evaluated and student requested provide one written report after the industrial training over.

MINOR COURSES

SC12102 PROGRAMMING LOGIC AND ALGORITHM DESIGN This is an introductory course for students planning or exploring a career in software design and development. This course will emphasize a careful disciplined approach to computer programming logic. Problem solving procedure through stepwise development of algorithms will be studied. Students will learn programming logic and designing algorithm as well as exploring basic computer language and syntax. References Felix Alvaro. 2016. C: Easy C Programming for Beginners, Your Step‐ by‐Step Guide to Learning C programming (C programming series). ISBN‐13:978‐1534639287 Toni Gaddis. 2015. Starting out Programming Logic and Design, 4th Edition. Pearson. ISBN‐


13:978‐0133985078 Farrell, J. 2014. Programming Logic and Design, Comprehensive, 8th Edition. Course Technology. ISBN‐13:978‐1285776712 Corment T.H. et al. 2009. Introduction to Algorithms, 3rd Edition. The MIT Press. Silver, G.A. 1986. Learning computer programming: Structured logic, algorithms, and flowcharting. Boyd & Fraser..

SC12302 COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE This course was designed to give the understanding of basic concept of computer organization and architecture. Topics covered in this subject will be on computer performance, types of data and the representative, arithmetic manipulation, instruction execution, pipelining, memory, input/output and instruction format. At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the concept of overall computer component and realize the current technology in computer hardware. References Stalling, W. 2015. Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing for Performance 10th Edition. Edinburgh

Gate, England: Pearson. Null, L. & Lobur, J. 2014. The Essentials of Computer Organization and Architecture. 4

th Edition. USA: Jones &

Bartlett Learning Publishers. Patterson, D. A. & Hennessy, J. L. 2014. Computer Organization and Design: TheHardware/Software Interface.

5th Edition. Canada: Morgan Kaufmann. Nirmala, S. G. 2009. Computer Architecture. New Delhi: University Science Press.

SC12203 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING Prerequisite: ST00702 Computer Programming and Simulation This course provides an introduction to software construction using an object-oriented approach; Acquire programming skills in connection with mathematics or technology. Object-oriented programming (OOP) is a programming paradigm that uses "objects" and their interactions to design applications and computer programs. It is based on several techniques, including inheritance, modularity, polymorphism, and encapsulation. It was not commonly used in mainstream software application development until the early 1990s. Many modern programming languages now support OOP. From this course, students will learn the art of the object-oriented programming using C++ programming language after having a background in the procedural paradigm that was introduced in the ST00702 course “Computer Programming & Simulation".

References Gaddis,T. ,Walters, J. & Muganda, G. 2011. Starting Out With C++: Early Objects. 7 Edition. US: Addison. D.S.Malik. 2011. C++ Programming: From problem analysis to program design. 5th Ed. CT Farrell, J. 2007. Object-Oriented Programming in C++. US: Thomson Course Technology

SC22303 DATA STRUCTURES Prerequisite: SC12203 Object-Oriented Programming This course introduces data abstraction with formal specification, and algorithm analysis. Data structures are implemented as data abstractions. A variety of algorithmic techniques will be introduced and students will gain an appreciation of the use and importance of data structures. A range of well‐established data structures will be examined and their properties described so that it becomes clear which representations are appropriate under which circumstances. In addition to gaining a conceptual understanding of how data can be organized, a much more efficient common data processing tasks such as sorting and searching strategies will also be presented. References Skiena, S. S. 2012. The Algorithm Design Manual. 2nd Edition. Springer. Weiss, M. A. 2006. Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++. 3rd Edition. Boston: Addison‐Wesley. Main, M. & Savitch, W. 2011. Data Structures & Other Objects Using C++. 4

th Edition. Boston: Addison‐Wesley.

Karumanchi, N. 2011. Data Structures and Algorithms Made Easy: Data Structure and Algorithmic Puzzles. 2nd Edition. Career Monk Publication. Forouzan, B. & Gilberg, R. 2005. Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C. 2nd Edition. Thomson Course Technology. Malik, D. S. 2009. Data Structures Using C++. 2nd Edition. New York: Thomson Course Technology.

SC22203 DATABASE This course is designed to give students a solid foundation in practical database design and implementation. The course provides in-depth coverage of database design, demonstrating that the key to successful database implementation is in proper design of databases to fit within a larger strategic view of the data environment.

References Rob, P. & Coronel, C. 2015. Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management. 11th Edition. Singapore:Course Technology Incorporated Additional references supporting the course Kifer, M., Bernstein, A. & Lewis, P. M. 2006. Database Systems: An Object‐Oriented Approach. 2nd Edition.


New Jersey: Pearson International Edition. Kroenke, D. M. & Auer, D. J. 2011. Database Concepts. 5th Edition. New Jersey: Pearson International Edition. Rob, P. & Coronel, C. 2009. Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management. 9th Edition. Singapore:Course Technology Incorporated. Kroenke, D. M. & Auer, D. J. 2010. Database Concepts. 4th Edition. New Jersey: Pearson International Edition. Molina, H. G., Ullman, J. D. & Widom, J. 2009. Database Systems: The Complete Book. 2nd Edition. New Jersey: Pearson International Edition, 2009Approach. 2nd Edition. New Jersey: Pearson International Edition. Kroenke, D. M. & Auer, D. J. 2011. Database Concepts. 5th Edition. New Jersey: Pearson International Edition. Rob, P. & Coronel, C. 2009. Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management. 9th Edition. Singapore:Course Technology Incorporated. Kroenke, D. M. & Auer, D. J. 2010. Database Concepts. 4th Edition. New Jersey: Pearson International Edition. Molina, H. G., Ullman, J. D. & Widom, J. 2009. Database Systems: The Complete Book. 2nd Edition. New Jersey: Pearson International Edition, 2009

SC22403 FUNDAMENTAL OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS Prerequisite: SC12203 Object Oriented Programming The course will introduce the student to the fundamental concept and theory as well as the basic algorithmic technology required to generate computer graphics applications. The course covers the basic idea on how raster graphics and 2D primitives used to develop 2D or 3D applications. The course will also cover the standard transformation technique of 2D and 3D graphics and how virtual camera can be associated to generate digital images that comprising a synthetic environment based on the arrangement of a discrete set of pixel on a screen. Later in this course, it will cover some advanced topics, for example, lighting and illumination and texture mapping and shading for producing photo‐realistic images. References Graham Sellers, Richard S Wright Jr. & Nicholas Haemel. 2016. OpenGL Superbible: Comprehensive Tutorial and Reference (7th Edition). Pearson Education Inc. 5. John Kessenich, Graham Sellers & Dave Shreiner. 2016. OpenGL Programming Guide: The Official Guide to Learning OpenGL, Version 4.5 with SPIR‐V. Pearson Education Inc. Hearn, D., Baker, M.P. & Carithers, W. 2010. Computer Graphics with OpenGL (4

th Edition). Pearson, Inc.

Marschner, S & Sherly P. 2015. Fundamental of Computer Graphics 4th Edition. AK Peters Ltd. Angel, E. 2005. OpenGL: A Primer. Addison Wesley.

SC32103 REAL TIME GRAPHICS Prerequisite: SC22403 Fundamental of Computer Graphics This course is designed to expose students the process of developing real-time and interactive computer graphics applications. This is an intensive programming subject and students are expected to equip themselves with adequate programming skills. Interactive development such as fast polygon rendering algorithm with level-of detail, scene management, dynamic camera manipulation, real-time shading and rendering and physical simulation will be covered and integrated in the application. Throughout the course, students will design and develop a real-time computer graphics application. At the end of this course, student should be able to acquire the theory and practice of real-time computer graphics. References

Jason Gregory. 2014. Game Engine Architecture. 2 nd Edition. A K Peters/CRC Press.

Moller, T., Haines, E. & Hoffman, N. 2008. Real‐Time Rendering. 3rd Edition. A.K. Peters Ltd.

Eberly, D. H. 2002. 3D Game Engine Design: A Practical Approach to Real‐time Computer Graphics. Morgan

Kaufmann

Games Programming Gems 1‐6. USA: Charles River Media.

Rucker, R. 2002. Software Engineering and Computer Games. Addison Wesley.

Foley, J.D., Van Dam., A., Feiner, S.K. & Hughes, J.F. 1994. Computer Graphics Principles and Practice.

Addison‐Wesley

SC32303 IMAGE PROCESSING Prerequisite: SC22403 Fundamental of Computer Graphics This course is designed to expose students about techniques of digital image processing. It includes how digital images; starting from reading the image file and then convert the image format to another type are processed. The images will be manipulated and further enhanced to improve the quality. Different types of manipulation and enhancement techniques will be covered. At the end of the course, students are expected to implement concepts of image processing, generate and manipulate images. References

Gonzalez R.C. & Woods R.E. 2016. Digital Image Processing 3E. Pearson Education Janil, A.K. 2015. Fundamentals of Digital Images Processing. Pearson Education. Gonzalez R.C. & Woods R.E. 2008. Digital Image Processing: International Edition, 3rd Edition.


Pearson Addison‐Wesley. Gonzalez,R. Woods, R. & Eddins, S. 2010. Digital Image Processing Using MATLAB®. Pearson Addison‐Wesley.

SC32503 SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN The main focus of this course is to provide a practical approach of systems analysis and designing skills for the students using structured methodology. Hence the course enables students to study information system requirements for any system application within an organizational context. The contents are sequentially organized directly from planning, analysis, designing and implementation phases. The course includes some main topics such as steps in conducting systems feasibility studies, information gathering techniques, analysis and design systems tools and model within an organizational context, process-modelling technique using data flow diagram, designing model using structure chart and prepare the process specification using structured English or pseudo codes. From the resulting output of the planning and analysis phase shall enable students to form input, output and interface design. Hence a basic system prototype can be developed. References

Tegarden, D., Dennis, A., & Wixom, B. H. (2013). Systems Analysis and Design with UML. (4th Ed.). Hoboken,

NJ: Wiley.

Shelly, G.B. & Rosenblatt, H.J. (2012). Analysis and Design for Systems. (9th Ed.). Course Technology,

Cengage Learning.

Hoffer, A., George, J., & Valacich, J. (2011). Modern Systems Analysis and Design. (6th

Ed.).New Jersey:

Prentice Hall. Kendall & Kendall. (2011). System Analysis & Design. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.

Whitten, L.J., Bentley, D. L., & Dittman, C.K. (2007). System Analysis and Design Method. (6th Ed.). New York:

McGraw‐Hill.

Additional references supporting the course

Satzinger, J. W. 2007. System Analysis & Design In A Changing World. 4th Edition. Canada: Cengage Learning.

SC32203 COMPUTER INTERFACE PROGRAMMING This course provides an overview of the theoretical and practical aspect of designing an interactive system that highlights the web or mobile applications. Lectures will cover the theoretical aspect partly discussing topics such as interactions, design, and evaluation while lab sessions will focus more on the application and programming. References

Julia Case Bradley & Anita C. Millspaugh, 2010. Programming in Visual Basic 2010. Singapore : McGrawHill

Dix, A., Finlay, J., Abowd, G. D. & Beale, R. 2004. Human‐Computer Interaction. 3rd

Edition. New Jersey:

Pearson, Prentice Hall..

Zimmerer, T. W. and Scarborough, N. M. 2008. Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business

Management, 5th Edition. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.


Julia Case Bradley & Anita C. Millspaugh, 2009. Programming in Visual Basic 2008. Singapore: McGrawHill.

Paul, K. 2002. Visual Basic.Net Unleashed. USA: Sams Publishing.

Steven, R., Ron, P. & Paul, L. 2002. VB.Net Language Pocket Reference. Cambridge:

O’Reilly.

SC40103 SCIENTIFIC DATA VISUALIZATION Prerequisite: SC12203 Object Oriented Programming This course will provide students the fundamental aspects of scientific data visualization. The course aims to develop students’ knowledge on algorithm, techniques and standard programming library and function to extrapolate 3 data, point clouds data and scientific data from various sources. The implementation of techniques and algorithm of scientific data visualization will be in industry‐driven language supported with standard visualization toolkit. References

Kent, B.R .2015. 3D Scientific Visualization with Blender. Morgan & Claypool Publishers.

Marschner, S & Sherly P. 2015. Fundamental of Computer Graphics 4th Edition. AK Peters Ltd.

Liinsky, N. & Steele, J. 2011. Designing Data Visualization. O’Reilly Media, Inc

Murray, S. 2013. Interactive Data Visualization for the Web. O’Reilly Media, Inc

Munzner. T. 2014. Visualization Analysis and Design. A K Peters/CRC Press.

Graham Sellers, Richard S Wright Jr. & Nicholas Haemel. 2016. OpenGL Superbible: Comprehensive Tutorial and Reference (7th Edition). Pearson Education Inc.

Hearn, D., Baker, M.P. & Carithers, W. 2010. Computer Graphics with OpenGL (4th

Edition). Pearson, Inc.

Rhyne, T.M, Botts, M., Hibbard, B. & Treinish, L. 1996. ACM Siggraph Course outline #16. Visualizing Scientific Data and Information: Focusing on The Physical and Natural Sciences.

Fry, B. 2008. Visualizing Data: Exploring and Explaining Data with the Processing Environment. O’reilly Media


Inc: Sebastopol, CA.

Frits H., Nielson, Gregory M. Bonneau. &. Georges‐Pierre. 2003. Data Visualization: The State of the Art.The

Springer International Series in Engineering and Computer Science,Vol. 713.

Chun‐houh, C.,Wolfgang H.K. & Antony, U. 2008. Handbook of Data Visualization.Springer Handbooks of

Computational Statistics. Wright,H. 2008. Introduction to Scientific Visualization. 1st Edition. XIV, 148 p. ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE PROGRAMME (HS11)

SS11102 BASIC ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE This course applies the concept and basic principles of physics, biology, chemistry and social sciences to environmental studies. The physical, biological and chemical aspects of the environment and society will be discussed. The discussion on the physical environment covers water, atmosphere and earth; whereas the biological environment includes ecosystem and its features will be focused. The human environment includes population and sustainability. The discussion will also cover legislation and policy related to the environment; and local and global environmental management.

References Clampet, A.P. 2011. Methylmercury: formation, sources, and health effects. Nova Science Publishers. 7. Botkin, D.B. & Keller, E.A. 2011. Environmental science: Earth as a living planet. 7 th Edition, International student edition. 8. Hauppauge, N.Y. 2011. Global environment and climate change. Nova Science Publishers.

Botkin, D.B. & Keller, E.A. 2007. Environmental Science (Earth as a Living Planet), 6th Edition. John Wiley &

Sons, New York.

Pepper, I. L., Charles, P.G & Brusseau, M. L. 2006. Environmental & Pollution Science. Amsterdam; Boston:

Elsevier/Academic Press.

Paolo F. Ricci. 2006. Environmental and Health Risk Assessment and Management: Principles and Practices.

Dordrecht; [London]: Springer.

SS11203 ENVIRONMENTAL ECOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY This course will discuss in detail aspects of ecology and environmental microbiology with strong emphasis on aspects related to the environment: aquatic ecology (e.g. river ecology; marine ecology), microbial ecology; soil and water microbiology; role of environmentally-related microorganisms (ERM) in the ecosystem and in pollution control/treatment. Fieldtrips and laboratory practical will be carried out for specific topics.

References

Black, J.G. 2013. Microbiology. 8 th Edition, International student version. Burlage, R.S. 2012. Principles of Public Health Microbiology. Sudbury, MA: Jones & Bartlett Learning. Jeremy, W.D. 2013. Understanding Microbes: An Introduction to a Small World. Chichester, West Sussex, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.

Molles Jr., M.C. 2006. Ecology: Concepts and Application. 4th edition. McGraw-Hill Publishers.

Landis, W.G. & Yu, M-H. 2003. Introduction to Environmental Toxicology. Impacts of Chemicals upon ecological

systems. 3rd edition. Lewis Publisher.

SS11303 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH This course discusses and explore the concept of human health, determinants of health; epidemiology and examine the concept of promoting health within environmental health practices. The environmental health components will be discussed will include communicable disease prevention and control, food quality control and environmental sanitation. This course will also evaluate the roles of various environmental practitioner engaged in data gathering and analysis. Some aspects of health and safety in the working environment will also be discussed towards the end of the course.

References Moellar, D.W. 2011. Environmental Health. 4 th Edition. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press. Myatt, T.A. & Allen, J.G. 2013. Environmental Health: Indoor Exposures, Assessments and Interventions. Toronto: Apple Academic Press. New York: Nova Science Publishers, Inc. Rubin, I. L. & Merrick, J. 2014. Environmental Health: Home, School and Community. New York: Nova Science Publishers, Inc.

Heymann, D.L. 2008. Control of communicable disease manual. 19th Ed. American Public Health Association, Washington.

D.C. ASBN 978-0-87553-189-2.

SS11403 ENVIRONMENTAL SOIL SCIENCE Environmental soil provides a thorough introduction to the soil genesis, morphology, properties and management, which requiring both qualitative and quantitative understandings of all the chemical, physical and biological processes that occur in the soils as well as of societal implications. This subjects show the student how to optimize use and preservation of land for agriculture, forestry, recreation, transportation systems, urban development and many other endeavours. These include the land use and management, the danger associates with the danger of improper of land use, nutrient deficiencies and toxicities in plants and animals due to soil pollution.


References Huang, P.M., Li, Y., & Sumner, M.E. 2012. Handbook of Soil Sciences: Properties and Processes. 2 nd Edition. Boca Raton FL: CRC Press. Huang, P.M., Li, Y., & Sumner, M.E. 2012. Handbook of Soil Sciences: Resource Management and Environmental Impacts. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press. Singh, A. K. 2013. Handbook of Soil Science. New Delhi, India: Agrotechnology Press. Plaster, E. J. 2010. Soil Science and management. 5th Ed. Delmar Engage Learning, USA. Sposito, G., 2007. The Chemistry of Soils. Oxford University Press, USA

Singer, M.J. & Munns, D. N., 2004. Soils: An Introduction, 6th Ed. Prentice Hall

Rose, S. W. 2004. An Introduction to the Environmental Physics of Soil, Water and Watersheds. Cambridge University Press. UK

Hillel, D. 2003. Introduction to environmental soil physics. Academic Press, USA.

SS21503 ENVIRONMENTAL REMOTE SENSING This course teaches introductory level of remote sensing. Students are exposed to the importance of remote sensing as a tool for updating land cover information. Pre-processing and analysis of satellite remote sensing will be taught. Lectures on remote sensing are accompanied by practical works to ensure better understandings of the students.

References

Ni-Bin, C. 2012. Environmental Remote Sensing and Systems Analysis. Boca Raton: CRC Press. Liang, S., Li,

X. & Wang, J. 2012. Advanced Remote Sensing. 1 st Edition. Amsterdam; Boston: Academic Press. Le-

Moigne, J., Netanyahu, N.S. & Eastman, R.D. 2011. Image Registration for Remote Sensing. Cambridge;

New York: Cambridge University Press.

Jensen, J. R. 2007. Remote Sensing of the Environment: An Earth Resource Perspective. 2nd Edition, New

Jersey : Prentice Hall

Campbell. J. B. 2007. Introduction to Remote Sensing, Fourth Edition, The Guilford Press.

Jensen, J. R. 2005, Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective. Prentice Hall.

Lillesand, T. M. Kiefer, R. W. & Chipman, J. W. 2003. Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation. 5th Edition. John

Wiley & Sons Inc.

SS21203 WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS This course discusses aspects of theory and practical pertaining to methods of water analysis. The water analysis covers physical, chemical and biological parameters, and emphases are made on the sampling method, sample treatment and preservation, techniques and analytical equipments. The aspects of data analysis, quality control and data interpretation are discussed. Students will be doing a mini project towards the end of the semester as training in the application of the knowledge gained earlier. References

American Public Health Association (Author), AWWA (American Water Works Association) (Author), Water Environment Federation (Author), E.W. Rice (Editor), R.B. Baird (Editor), A.D. Eaton (Editor), L. S. Clesceri (Editor). Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 1496 pages. American Water Works Assn; 22 edition (January 5, 2012) 5. Satinder Ahuja. Monitoring Water Quality: Pollution Assessment, Analysis, and Remediation 390 pages Elsevier; 1 edition (March 29, 2013) 6. T. Roy Crompton. Determination of Organic Compounds in Natural Waters. 400 pages. Crc Pr I Llc (October 20, 2013) 7. Edzwald, J.K. 2011. Water Quality & Treatment: a Handbook on Drinking Water/ American Water Works Association. 6th Edition. New York: McGraw-Hill. 8. Quentin, G. R., & Hussey, K. 2011. Water Resources Planning and Management. Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. 9. Abdullah, M. H. 2012. Principles in Water Analysis for Environmental Science. Kota Kinabalu: Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Miroslav Radojevic, Mohd Harun Abdullah & Ahmad Zaharin Aris, 2007. Analisis Air. Publisher: Scholar Press.

Fitfield, F.W. & Haines, P.J. (eds), 1996. Environmental Analytical Chemistry. Blackie Academic & Professional,

London.

SS21403 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY AND CHEMODYNAMICS This course covers the chemistry aspects of environment. The topic of discussion is divided into two parts. The first part covers the chemistry of water, atmosphere, soil and sediment as well as the physicochemical characteristics of organic and inorganic materials in respective environment. The second part emphasis on process and interaction mechanism of organic and inorganic pollutants in the environment. These include adsorption, desorption, diffusion, degradation, biological transport and uptake.

References

Liu, G., Cai, Y., & O'Driscol, N. 2012. Environmental Chemistry and Toxicology of Mercury. Hoboken, N.J.:

Wiley. Beard, J.M. 2013. Environmental Chemistry in Society. 2 nd Edition. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press.

Warwick, P. 2011. Environmental Radiochemical Analysis IV. Cambridge, UK: Royal Society of Chemistry.

Daniel D. C. 2010. Environmental sciences, Sudbury, Mass: Jones and Bartlett Publishers. Manahan, S.E. 2010.

Environmental chemistry. Boca Raton: CRC Press/Taylor & Francis.


Sodhi, G.S. 2009. Fundamental Concepts of Environmental Chemistry. Alpha Science. Raymond Chang, 2007, Chemistry.

9th ed. McGraw-Hill Company, USA.

Van Loon, G.W. & S.J. Duffy. 2005 Environmental Chemistry: A Global Perspective, 2nd Ed. Oxford Press.

SS21303 AIR QUALITY AND NOISE ANALYSIS This course covers theoretical and practical aspects of characteristics and methodologies of air quality and noise analyses. Topic discussed in the course includes atmospheric composition and its characteristics, atmospheric chemistry and air pollution, noise pollution, air quality and noise measurement techniques and analyses (both indoor and ambient environment). In addition, related air and noise guidelines and regulations, both national and international standards will be included.

References

Arshad, M.B.J. 2015. Tren Kualiti Udara dalam Jangka Masa Panjang di Malaysia (CO, SO2 dan PM10).Furumai, H. 2011. Advanced Monitoring and Numerical Analysis of Coastal Water and Urban Air Environment. Tokyo; London: Springer. Luca, R., D’Odorico, P. & Laio, F. 2011. Noise-Induced Phenomena in the Environmental Sciences. New York: Cambridge University Press.Zhang, C. L. 2007. Fundamental of Environmental Sampling and Analysis. John Wiley and Sons. Vallero, D.

2008.Fundamentals of Air Pollution. 4th Edition. Academic Press.

Griffin, R. 2007. Principles of Air Quality Management. 2nd edition. CRC Press

Hess-Kosa, K. 2011. Indoor Air Quality: The Latest Sampling and Analytical methods. 2nd Edition. CRC Press.

Patnaik, P.

1996. Environmental Analysis: Chemical Pollutants in Air, Water, Soil and Solid Wastes. CRC Press

SS21603 ENERGY RESOURCES This course discusses the energy resources on the Earth which covers exploration, mining, generation, delivery and consumption of energy such as fossil, nuclear, solar, hydro, thermal, wind, biomass and hydrogen. Discussions include the effect of techno socio-economic on the demand of energy for a country and that the generation of energy will lead to environmental pollution.

References

Skipka, K.J., & Theodore, L. 2014. Energy Resources: Availability, Management, and Environmental Impacts. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press/Taylor & Francis Group. Sovacool, B. K., Sidortsov, R.V., & Jones, B.R. 2014. Energy Security, Equality, and Justice. London; New York: Routledge. Ginley, D.S. & Cahen, D. 2012. Fundamentals of Materials for Energy and Environmental Sustainability. Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. Enemark, C. 2008. Energy and security in Asia. Routledge.

Byrd, H. 2008. Energy and ecology: a view of Malaysia beyond 2020. Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia.

Matthew L, Daniel L., Laird, B. R. 2008. Clean Technology; bio energy, renewables, green building, smart grid,

storage, and water. CRC Press.

Fay, J.A. & D.S. Golomb. 2002. Energy and the environment. Oxford University Press.

Jackson, M. 2000. Energy and pollution control opportunities to the year 2000. The Fairmont Press.

SS21802 METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATE CHANGE This course covers the fundamentals of meteorology that includes atmospheric processes, weather and climate. Overview of current weather maps; structure of the atmosphere and the role of moisture in the development of dew, clouds, and precipitation; air masses, fronts, and cyclones, Elements of weather forecasting, instrumentation and communication are also explored. Major climatic controls; climatic classifications and comparisons of major climatic types; an overview of current climate issues such as global warming and El Nino; overview of the global climate are also discussed. References

Ahrens, C.D. & Henson, R. 2016. Meteorology Today: an Introduction to Weather, Climate, and the Environment. 11th Edition. Boston, MA, USA: Cengage Learning. 7. Filho, W.L. 2013. Climate Change and Disaster Risk Management. Heidelberg; New York: Springer. 8. Filho, W.L., & Knieling, J. 2013. Climate Change Governance. Berlin; New York: Springer.

Ahrens, C. D, 2008. Meteorology Today: An Introduction to Weather, Climate and Environment. 8th Edition.

Brooks Cole.

Nese J.M. 2008. A World of Weather: Fundamentals of Meteorology, Kendall Hunt Publishing. 5th Edition.

Hoffman, D.L. 2008. The Resilient Earth: Science, Global Warming and the Fate of Humanity, Book Surge

Publishing, 1st Edition.

Ahrens, C. D. 2001. Essentials of Meteorology- An Invitation to the Atmosphere. 5th Edition. Brooke Cole. Lutgens, F. K.

1996. The Atmosphere. An Introduction to Meteorology. 11th Edition, Prentice Hall.

SS32703 ENVIRONMENTAL HYDROLOGY This course therefore seeks to explain, characterise, discuss, and analyse the occurrence, distribution,


movement, and properties of the waters of the earth. The topic covers the basic components of hydrology in the hydrological cycle such as precipitation, interception processes, evapotranspiration, runoff generation within the hillslopes, stream hydrology, soil water, and catchment water balance. Interaction amongst hydrological components with other environmental parameters such as water quality and earth surface processes will also be discussed. References

Eslamian, S. 2014. Handbook of Engineering Hydrology: Fundamentals and Applications. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group.Maddock, I., Harby, A., Kemp, P. & Wood, P. 2013. Ecohydraulics: an Integrated Approach. Chichester, West Sussex; Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Wolanski, E. 2016. Estuarine Ecohydrology: an Introduction. Amsterdam: Elsevier

Ayub Katimon, Zulkifli Yusop & Kawi Bidin, 2007. Hidrologi Asas. Prentice Hall, Pearson

Malaysia Sdn. Bhd. 245 pgs. Viessman, W. & Lewis, G.L., 2003. Introduction to Hydrology. Pearson Education,

New Jersey. 612 pgs. Arnell, N. 2002. Hydrology and Global Environmental Change. Pearson Education Limited, dinburgh. 346 pgs.

Watson, I. & Burnet, A. 1993. Hydrology: An Environmental Approach. CRC Press, Roca Raton.

Small, R.J. 1989. Geomorphology and Hydrology. Longman, London.

SS11603 ENVIRONMENTAL LAW This course provides a framework for understanding the environmental issues which humans are faced today and their implications towards law making and policy. Topics in this course comprises an introduction to the legal system in Malaysia, the usage of tort law in managing environmental pollution and the statutory approach in the efforts of improving environmental quality. The development of laws in Malaysia in connection to the environment, such as Common Law principles, will be discussed. Agreements, conventions and issues pertaining to environment at the international level and their legal implications, are also included. Law cases on environmental issues will also be discussed References

Selected Environmental Law Statutes: 2016-2017. Education Edition. West Academic Publishing . Payus, C.M.,

Vun, L.W. & Siti Aishah, M.A. 2016. Environmental Law from Malaysian Perspective. UMS Publisher. ISBN: 978-

967-0582-48-1. Robert, J. 2011. Environmental Policy. 2nd Edition. Routledge Publisher, USA. Nancy, K.K. &

Silverman, G.S. 2013. Environmental Law. 8th Edition. Pearson, United Kingdom. Robert, V.P., Schroeder,

C.H., Miller, A.S. & Leape, J.P. 2013. Environmental Regulation: Law, Science and Policy. 7th Edition. Aspen

Publishers. Robin, C. 2016..Sullivan T.F.P. 2007. Environmental Law Handbook. 19th Edition. Publisher Rowman

& Littlefield Publication Inc. Buck S.J. 2006. Understanding Environmental Administration and Law. 3rd Edition.

Island Press Environmental Quality Act 1974, 2003. International law Book Services Sentian, J. & Mohd Tuah, P. 2001. Environmental Impact Assessment: Legislation, Procedure and Issues in

Malaysia, Universiti Malaysia Sabah

International Environmental law - http://www2.spfo.unibo.it/spolfo/ENVLAW.htm

SS21103 ENVIRONMENTAL STATISTICS This course covers the basic aspects of statistics that are commonly used to analyse both the spatial and temporal environmental data. Descriptive statistics, data presentation techniques, data distribution and normality, correlation analyses, regression analyses and statistical tests will be discussed. Within data analyses there will be emphasis on few examples of related environmental data.

References Jackson, S.L. 2014. Statistics: Plain and Simple. 3 rd Edition. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. Peck, R. 2014. Statistics: Learning from Data. Preominary edition. Boston, MA: Brooks/Cole Lay Yoon Fah & Khoo Chwee Hoon. 2012. Pengenalan Kepada Pendekatan Kuantitatif dalam Penyelidikan Pendidikan (Introduction to the Quantitative Approaches in Research of Education). Universiti Malaysia Sabah: Malaysia.

Argyrous, G. 2011. Statistics for Research: with a Guide to SPSS. 3 rd Edition. Los Angeles: SAGE.

Mendenhall, W., Beaver, R. J & Beaver, B. M. 2009. Introduction to Probability & Statistics (13th Edition).

Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning. Belmont, USA.

Bernett, V. 2004. Environmental Statistics. Willey: Chichester.

Manly, B. F. J. 2001. Statistics for Environmental Science and Management. Chapman and Hall: New York.

Best, J. 2001.

Damned Lies and Statistics. University of California Press: Berkeley

SS34203 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT I

This course concerns with the theoretical aspect of the scientific approach of carrying out a scientific research

project. It covers background of the study and problem statement, literature review, methodology, report

presentation, and writing of a project proposal

http://www2.spfo.unibo.it/spolfo/ENVLAW.htm


References

Siti Aishah Mohd Ali, Carolyn Payus & Vun Leong Wan. 2015. Environmental Science: Scientific project guidelines. Faculty of Science & Natural Resources. Faculty of Science & Natural Resources. 2014. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi: Faculty of Science & Natural Resources . Kota Kinabalu: Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Barry, M.A. 2014. Scientific Style and Format: the CSE Manual for Authors, Editors, and Publishers, 8th Edition. Chicago: Council of Science Editors; Chicago; London: in cooperation with The University of Chicago Press. Becker, L.M. 2014. Presenting Your Research: Conferences, Symposiums, Poster Presentations and Beyond. London: SAGE Publicatios Ltd. Sangkala, M. 2012. Scientific Study of Daily Temperature and Rainfall (Case Study in Kota Kinabalu: 2008-2010). School of Science and Technology. 2009. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi: School of Science and Technology

SS40303 SOLID AND TOXIC WASTE MANAGEMENT This course discusses the characteristics of solid and toxic wastes as well as the management of the wastes. The discussion is divided into two parts. The first part covers the types, classification and composition, the impact of solid waste, legislation aspect of solid waste, solid waste disposal methods, and waste-minimisation approach in solid waste management. The second part covers types and sources of toxic waste, classification and composition; legislation aspect of toxic waste, disposal methods and facilities of toxic waste storage and treatment. References

Teddy, J.A.A. 2015. International Journal of Integrated Waste Management, Science and Technology. Elsevier journal homepage: www.elsevier.com/locate/wasman. Bahadori, A. 2014. Waste Management in the Chemical and Petroleum Industries. Chichester, West Sussex, United Kingdom: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Yung-Tse, H., Wang, L.K. & Shammas, N.K. 2012. Handbook of Environment and Waste Management. New Jersey: World Scientific. Christensen, T.H. 2011. Solid Waste Technology & Management. Chichester, West Sussex, U.K.; Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley.

Solid waste and Public Cleansing Management Corporation Act 2007. Tchobanoglous, G. & Krieth, F. 2002. Handbook of Solid Waste Management. ISBN 071356231/9780071356237.

McGraw Hill.

SS40106 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II This course concerns with the practical aspects of scientific research. It involves execution of the research plans that have been developed and evaluated in SS30103 Project 1. The students will undertake an independent research work on the approved thesis topic in consultation with the respective supervisor. The research results will be subsequently analysed, discussed and combined with the previous report presented in SS30103 Project 1 and finally presented as a dissertation of 12,000 – 15,000 words.

References

Siti Aishah Mohd Ali, Carolyn Payus & Vun Leong Wan. 2015. Environmental Science: Scientific Project Guidelines. Faculty of Science & Natural Resources. Faculty of Science & Natural Resources. 2014. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi: Faculty of Science & Natural Resources Barry, M.A. 2014. Scientific Style and Format: the CSE Manual for Authors, Editors, and Publishers. 8 th Edition. Chicago: Council of Science Editors; Chicago; London: in cooperation with The University of Chicago Press. Rogers, S.M. 2014. Mastering Scientific and Medical Writing: a Self-Help Guide. 2nd Edition. Berlin: Springer. 5. Davis, M., Davis, K.J., & Dunagan, M.M. 2012. Scientific Papers and Presentations. 3 rd Edition. Amsterdam: Elsevier/AP.

School of Science and Technology. 2009. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi. School of Science and Technology

SS32403 RESOURCES & ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT This course covers various topics regarding the management of natural resources and the environment. The nature and importance of biodiversity for both terrestrial and coastal ecosystems will be discussed. Emerging and existing issues as well as problems due to human activities that lead to the degradation and loss of natural resources will also be emphasized. Various strategies and instruments are integrated to manage the environment effectively.

References

Yung-Tse, H., Wang, L.K. & Shammas, N.K. 2012. Handbook of Environment and Waste Management. New Jersey: World Scientific. 8. Mital, A., & Pennathur, A. 2015. Resources Utilization and Productivity Enhancement Case Studies. New York: Momentum Press. Lambertini, L. 2013. Oligopoly, the Environment and Natural Resources. London; New York: Routledge. Sankar, A. 2015. Environmental Management. New Delhi, India: Oxford University Press.

Castro, P. & Huber, M. E. 2007. Marine Biology 6th ed. McGraw-hill, New York.

Nybakken, J.W. & Bertness, M.D. 2005. Marine Biology- An Ecological Approach. Pearson, San Francisco.

Garrison, T. 2002.

Oceanography – An Invitation to Marine Science. Thomson Learning.

Warren, A. & French, J.R. (eds) 2001. Habitat Conservation-Managing the Physical Environment. John Wiley &

Sons, London. Jamaluddin Md Jahi. 2000. Pengurusan Persekitaran di Malaysia: Isu dan Cabarannya. PPP, UKM


SS40503 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT Provide theoretical and practical aspect on the principle, mechanism, strategy and methodology in environmental monitoring and assessment. These include the application of environmental impact assessment (EIA), social impact assessment (SIA), health impact assessment (HIA), environmental strategic assessment (SEA), environmental risk assessment (ERA), environmental audit (AU) and biological monitoring. The air quality index (AQI) and water quality index (WQI) are introduced as part of the assessment approach.

References

Mascini, M., & Palchetti, I. 2011. Nucleic Acid Biosensors for Environmental Pollution Monitoring. Cambridge, UK: Royal Society of Chemistry. Mueller, L., Saparov, A. & Lischeid, G. 2014. Novel Measurement and Assessment Tools for Monitoring and Management of Land and Water Resources in Agricultural Landscapes of Central Asia. Cham: Springer. Rosenbaum, W.A. 2014. Environmental Politics and Policy, 9th Edition. Thousand Oaks, California: CQ Press, an Imprint of SAGE Publications, Inc. Morris P. And R. Therivel. 2009. Methods in Environmental Impact Assessment. Routledge

Caroll, B., and T. Turpin. 2009. Environmental Impact Assessment Handbook. 2nd Edition. Thomas Telford Publishing Hanna,

K. S. 2005. Environmental Impact assessment: Practice and Participation. Oxford Press

Glasson, J., R. Therivel, and A. Chadwick, 2005. Introduction to Environmental impact Assessment. Routledge

Sentian, J, and P. Mohd Tuah. 2001. Environmental Impact Assesment Legislation, Procedures and Issues in

Malaysia. Penerbit UMS.

SS32603 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM This course introduces GIS basic principles, techniques and applications of GIS in the field of environmental management and research. Subjects covered include basics of GIS, data collection and management, spatial data analysis, terrain modeling, digital elevation model and GIS application in environmental. Case studies and hands-on practice allow students to gain experience in the use of GIS in environmental management. The benefits of applications of these tools in policy and decision making are also highlighted.

References

Popovich, V. 2011. Information Fusion and Geographic Information Systems: Towards the Digital Ocean. New York: Springer. Ruas, A. 2011. Advances in Cartography and GIScience: Selection from ICC 2011, Paris. Berlin; Heidelberg [u.a.]: Springer. Geertman, S.C.M., Reinhardt, W.P., & Toppen, F.J. 2011. Advancing Geoinformation Science for a Changing World. Heidelberg; New York: Springer.

Smith, J and P. Smith. 2007. Introduction to Environmental Modelling. Oxford University Press.

Hanrahan, G. 2010. Modelling of Pollutants in Complex Environmental System: Vol. I and II (Advanced Topics in

Environmental Science). ILM Publications.

Stocker, T. 2010. Introduction to Climate Modelling (Advances in Geophysical and Environmental mechanics and

Mathematics). Maguire, D.J., M. Batty, and M. F. Goodchild, 2005. GIS, Spatial Analysis and Modelling. ESRI Press

Heywood, I, SA. Cornelius, and S. Carver, 2006. An Introduction to Geographical Information System. 3rd Edition. Prentice Hall

SS32103 TECHNOLOGY OF POLLUTION CONTROL This course covers various water, air and noise pollution control technique and technology. Discussion includes fundamental theory, feature and application of each technique or technology.

References

Hanley, N. & Bhatia, S.C. 2011. Pollution Control in Chemical and Allied Industries. Singapore: Alkem Company. Soares, C. G., & Parunov, J. 2011. Advanced Ship Design for Pollution Prevention. Boca Raton, Fla.: CRC. Kumar, R., Singh, B.S. & Singh M.P. 2012. Pollution Control and Environment. New Delhi: Enkay Pub. House. Agarwal, S. K. 2009. Heavy metal pollution. A.P.H. Pub. Corp, New Delhi

Yantovsky, E. Górski, J. & Shokotov, M. 2009. Zero emissions power cycles. Boca Raton : CRC Press Vesilind, P.A. & Morgan.

S.M. 2004. Introduction to environmental engineering, 2nd Ed. Thomson Brookes/Cole.

Tchobanoglous, G., Burton, F.L. & Stensel. H.D. 2004. Wastewater engineering, treatment and reuse, 4th Ed, International Ed.

McGraw-Hill.

Hammer, M.J. & Hammer. M.J.Jr. 2004. Water and wastewater technology, 5th Ed. Pearson Prentice Hall.

SS32202 GROUNDWATER POLLUTION This course discusses the types of aquifer (such as confined and unconfined aquifers) and their medium characteristics. The categories of pollutants, groundwater flow and transportation processes of pollutants, identification and indicator of pollution, and mathematical modelling concept in groundwater pollution will be described. The sources of pollutants and pollution control strategy will be discussed. Examples of groundwater pollution cases, its sources and implications to the environment will be presented in detail.


References

Peralta, R.C., & Kalwij, I.M. 2012. Groundwater Optimization Handbook: Flow, Contaminant Transport, and Conjunctive Management. London: IWA Pub. ; Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press/Taylor & Francis. Maloszewski, P., Witczak, S. & Malina, G. 2013. Groundwater Quality Sustainability. Leiden, the Netherlands: CRC Press/Balkema. Aral, M.M. & Taylor, S.W. 2011. Groundwater Quantity and Quality Management. Reston, Va.: American Society of Civil Engineers. Todd, D.K. & Mays, L.W. 2005. Groundwater Hydrology, 3rd Edition. John Wiley & Sons. New York. Schwartz, F.W. & Zhang, H., 2003. Fundamentals of groundwater. John Wiley & Sons, New York.

Mays, L.W., 2001. Water Resources Engineering. John Wiley & Sons. New York. Domenico, P.A. & Schwartz, F.W., 1998. Physical and Chemical Hydrogeology. John Wiley & Sons. New York. Freeze, R.A. & Cherry, J.A., 1979. Groundwater. Prentice-Hall. Englewood Cliffs, NJ.

SS32503 ENVIRONMENTAL TOXICOLOGY Environmental Toxicology is a course on the study of pollutants impact upon the structure and function of ecological systems. Emphasis will be upon on interaction of the chemical with environmental factors, exposure and bioavailability; mode of action of the toxicant to the biota and effect at higher level of biological organisation. As an introduction to environmental toxicity test, risk assessment and appropriate function that would describe and predict the fate, transformation and effect of the toxicant to the environment.

References

Dixon, K.R. 2012. Modeling and Simulation in Ecotoxicology with Applications in MATLAB and Simulink. Boca Raton: CRC Press. Wexler, P. 2012. Chemicals, Environment, Health: a Global Management Perspective. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press. Newman, M.C. 2013. Quantitative Ecotoxicology. 2 nd Edition. Boca Raton, FL: Taylor

& Francis

Leeuwen, C. J. Van & Vermeire, T. G. (EDs.). 2007. Risk Assessment of Chemicals: An Introduction. 2nd

Edition. Springer. USA. Van Loon, G.W. & S.J. Duffy. 2005. Environmental Chemistry: A Global Perspective, 2nd Ed. Oxford Press.

Cronin, M. T & Livingstone, D. J. 2004. Predicting Chemical Toxicity and Fate. CRC Press, Boca Raton

Landis, W. G., 2003. Introduction To Environmental Toxicology: Impacts Of Chemicals Upon Ecological Systems. 3rd Ed.

Lewis Publishers. USA

Crosby, D. G. 1998. Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry. Oxford University Press. USA

SS40208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Student shall be placed in an industry or research area at least 10 weeks under lecturer supervision. This training will be evaluated and student requested provide one written report after the industrial training over.

GEOLOGY PROGRAMME (HS21)

SG13103 BASIC GEOLOGY I This is a course about the earth; its composition, structure and dynamics. The understanding of the way the earth works is based in the scientific method and requires that our interpretations be consistent with the fundamental laws of the creation. It includes evidence of rocks that form mountains, rock types that form the layers of earth lithosphere, minerals and rock forming minerals, crystals and their forms. This course also includes the study of earth crustal forms that can be observed at the surface of the earth today (folds, faults, fractures, etc.) and the processes that form them (tectonic, volcanism, earthquakes, sedimentation, etc.). This course also discusses how earth works globally - the building blocks of earth; earth's dynamic interior; igneous activity, plate tectonics, and mountain building. Towards the end of the course, introduction to economic resources of the earth are given. References

Brian, M & Berry, L. G. 1999. Element of Mineralogy. Freeman, London.

Carla, W. M. 1997. Fundamental of Geology. Wm. C. Brown Publication, Illinois. Frank, P. & Raymond, S. 1994.

Understanding Earth. Freeman, New York.

Hamblin, W. K. 1991. Introduction to Physical geology. 2nd Edition. Macmillan Publishing Company, New York.

Lutgens, F. K. & Tarburk, E. J. 2010. Essentials of Geology. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Philips, F. C. 1971. An Introduction to Crystallography. Oliver & Boyd, Edinburgh.

SG13203 BASIC GEOLOGY II This course is the continuation of the Basic Geology 1 and divided into two parts. The first part is focuses on the origin and history of the earth and the processes that continually act upon the earth both internally (endogenic) and externally (exogenic). Endogenic processes show how earth works internally, in particular as an evolving and dynamic system where changes are driven by energy generated within the earth. This section provides an understanding of the earth and how it “works”. Surficial (exogenic) processes associated with streams, ground water, glaciers, wind, shorelines and even up to deep marine environment, weathering and soil. The earth


system: hydrosphere, atmosphere, biosphere, and the solid earth; continents and oceans: differentiation of terrain types within continents and oceans are also discuss. As the science that considers the origin and evolution of the earth, it also discusses in the earlier section, the origin of the solar system and the nebular hypothesis. The second part is focuses on crystallography.

References

Brian, M & Berry, L. G. 1999. Element of Mineralogy. Freeman, London.

Carla, W. M. 1997. Fundamental of Geology. Wm. C. Brown Publication, Illinois.

Charles C. Plummer, C. C., McGeary, D. & Carlson, D. H. 2007. Physical Geology. McGraw-Hill Higher Education.

Frank, P. & Raymond, S. 1994. Understanding Earth. Freeman, New York.

Hamblin, W. K. 1991. Introduction to Physical geology. 2nd Edition. Macmillan Publishing Company, New York.

Klein, C. & Hurlbut, C. S. Jr. 1993. Manual of Mineralogy. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, New York.

Lutgens, F. K. & Tarburk, E. J. 1995. Essentials of Geology. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Skinner, B. J., Porter, S. C. & Park, J. 2004. Dynamic earth: An introduction to physical geology. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, New York.

SG13302 GEOMORPHOLOGY This course focuses on the shape of earth surface aspects and the geomorphological processes that act on earth surface. The topics include introduction of geomorphologic processes, weathering, erosion, mass wasting, groundwater system, river system, geomorphologic of coastal, coral reef, geomorphologic of desert, glacier areas, structural that control the geomorphology, geomorphologic of sediment area, geomorphologic of karsts, volcanic eruption areas, sea level changes and applied geomorphologic.

References

Lutgens, F.K., Tarbuck, E.J & Tasa, D.G 2014. Essentials of Geology. Elevent Edition. Pearson, USA.

Michael, F. T. 1987. Geomorfologi Tropika. Translated by Ismail Ahmad.Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala

Lumpur. Plummer, C.C, Carlson, D.H. & McGreary, D. 2007. Physical Geology. McGraw-Hill, New York

Ritter, D. F., Kochel, R. & Miller. J. R. 1994. Geomorphology Process. WCB/McGraw-

Hill. Tjia, H.D. 1987. Geomorfologi. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

SG13403 PALEONTOLOGY The course discusses the fundamentals of paleontology and its importance to the field of geology. This course covers the types of fauna and flora fossils especially fossil indicators those are used in the world of stratigraphy. A major part of the course contents discuss fossil systematic, featuring the importance of fossils and in determination of rock age. 13 References

Andrew B. S. 1994. Systematic and Fossil Record. Blackwell Scientific Pub .

London. Benton, J. M., Harper, D. A. T & Benton. D. 1997. Basic Paleontology.

Addison-Wesley Pub.

Haq, B. U. & Boersma, A. (Eds.). 1998. Introduction to Marine Micropaleontology. Elsevier Science Ltd. John C. 1990.

Paleontology of Vertebrates.Springer-Verlag, Tokyo.

Taylor, P.D. & Lewis, D.N. 2007. Fossil Invertebrates. Harvard University Press

Thompson G. R., Turk J. &.Levin. H. L 1995. Earth: Past and Present. Harcourt Brace College, London.

SG13501 GEOLOGICAL MAP This course focuses on knowledge and understanding the basic geological equipment and how to gather field data by using that equipment. Student also will learn how to interpret topographic and geological maps which can aid in the unraveling of the geomorphological setting and historical geology of an area.

References

Barnes, J. & R.J. Lisle, 2003. Basic Geologic Mapping (Geological Field Guide). 4th Edition. Wiley Blackwell.

Ibrahim Komoo, Ibrahim Abdullah & Juhari Mat Akhir, 1989. Teknik Pemetaan Geologi. Penerbit UKM, Bangi.

Mohamad Ali Hassan. 1986. Latihan Peta dan Pengenalan Kepada Peta-Peta Geologi. Dewan Bahasa dan

Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Tjia, H.D. 1984. Latihan peta geologi. Bangi: Penerbit Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Plummer, C.C., Carlson, D.H. & McGreary, D. 2007. Physical Geology. McGraw-Hill, New York.

SG13603 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY The basic principle of rock deformation and the mechanism for the development of tectonic structures such as folds, lineation, foliation, fractures and faults is discussed. The observation, recording and interpretation of these structures in the field are also discussed. The concept of plate tectonics is also introduced.


References

Hatcher, R. D. Jr. 1994. Structural Geology: Principles, Concept and Problems. Prentice-Hall, London. Lisle, R.

J. 1996. Geological Structures and Maps: A Practical Guide. Butterworth-Heinemann. McClay, K. R. 1987. The

Mapping of Geologic Structures. Geological Society Handbook, Open University, Milton Keynes.

Park, R. G. 1997. Foundations of Structural Geology. Stanley Thornes Pub.

Twiss, R. J. & Moores. E. M. 1992. Structural Geology. WH Freeman & Co.

SG23103 MINERALOGY AND PETROGRAPHY This course will discuss the main characteristics of rocks – forming mineral, especially the groups of silicate mineral (QAP and OPAM). The silicate minerals are very important in the rock formation. Petrography of the rocks will be explained according to texture, mineralogy and geochemistry. Alone this course the polarized microscope will use to study the mineralogical and petrographical aspects.

References

Deer, W. A., Howie, R. A. & Zussman, J. 1992. An Introduction to the Rock-Forming Minerals. 2nd Edition. Longman Scientific & Technical, Hong Kong.

Klein, C. & Hurtburt, C. S. 1998. Manual of Mineralogy. 21st Edition. John Wiley & Sons, New York.

Mackenzie, W. S. & Adams, A. E. 1994. A Color Atlas of Rocks and Minerals in Thin Section. John Wiley &

Syed Sheikh Almashoor. 1990. Pengenalan Mineralogi Optik. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

SG23203 HISTORICAL GEOLOGY AND STRATIGRAPHY The course contains fundamental earth history covering the development of the earth from the Archean to the Quaternary period, including the geological time scale. Several phenomenon of the earth's history including sea floor spreading, continental drift, plate tectonic and evolution of living organism are discussed. Discussion on global stratigraphy, stratigraphic classification, stratigraphic analysis, correlation and local stratigraphy are also covered. This course involves 10 days fieldwork to learn rock sequence and their geological history.

References

Doyle, P., Bennett, M. R & Baxter, A. N. 1994. The Key to Earth History. John Wiley & Sons, New York. Levin, H.

L. 2006. The Earth Through Time. 8th Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc

Sanudin Tahir & Baba Musta. 2007. Pengenalan Kepada Stratigrafi. Penerbit UMS, Kota Kinabalu. Thompson, G.

R., Turk, J. & Levin, H. L. 1995. Earth Past & Present. Saunders Golden Sunburst Series.

Wicander, R & Monroe, J. S. 2000. Historical Geology: Evolution of Earth and Life Through Time.

Brooks/Cole.Thompson Learning.

SG23303 GIS AND REMOTE SENSING This course discusses basic interpretations of aerial photographs and remote sensed digital images in geology. The interpretation includes the recognition of main elements of aerial photographs and remotely-sensed images such as relief, tone, texture, pattern and lineament to assist in the determination of lithologies, structural styles and mineral resources in a particular area. Students will also be exposed to the use of a stereoscope and image processing software, such as ERDAS to analyze satellite images and GIS to manage spatial data. References

Allum, J. A. E. 1989. Fotogeologi dan Pemetaan Kawasan. Terjemahan oleh Johari Mat Akhir, DBP, Kuala

Lumpur. Gupta, R. V. 2003. Remote Sensing Geology. Second edition. Springer, Heidelberg, Germany.

Marcolongo, B. & Mantovani. F. 1996. Photogeology: Remote Sensing Applications in Earth Sciences. Science

Publishers Inc.

Prost, G.L. 2001. Remote Sensing For Geologists: A Guide To Image Interpretation. CRC Press.

Wanless, H.R. 1986. Aerial Stereo: Photographs. Hubbard Scientific Co.

SG23403 PETROLOGY This course will discuss the igneous processes in three major tectono-magmatic environments (MORB, IAT & WPB). These three tectonic environments can be determine by using the geochemistry data (major and trace elements) of the basaltic rocks. Partial melting and fractional crystallization are the important igneous process which involves in the formation of the new oceanic crust. The tectonic history of the region can be develop in coorporate both geochemistry data and fieldwork observation. This course also describes the petrologic classification and metamorphism processes of the various types of metamorphic rocks. The metamorphic rocks which form due to the intra-oceanic thrusting and transform fault movement will be discussed. 13

References

1987. Igneous Petrology. Longman Scientific & Technical. John Wiley & Sons, New York.

– A Global Tectonic Approach. Unwin Hyman, London. 19


SG23503 SEDIMENTOLOGY AND DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENTS Geological processes such as transportation and deposition of sediments are discussed. The origin of sediments, sedimentary grain characteristics, sedimentary structures and diagenetic process are also discussed. Sedimentary petrography and facies analysis and identification of ancient sedimentary depositional environments are also presented.

References

Davies, R. A. 1992. Depositional Systems: Introduction to Sedimentology and Stratigraphy. Prentice Hall.

Pye, K. 1994. Sediment Transport and Depositional Process. Blackwell Scientific.

Reading, H. G. 1996. Sedimentary Environments: Processes, Facies and Stratigraphy. Blackwell Science Inc.

Selley, R. C. 1995. Ancient Sedimentary Environments and Their Subsurface Diagnosis. Stanley Thornes Pub.

Tucker, M. E. 1996. Sedimentary Rocks in the Field. John Wiley & Sons. New York

SG23602 MALAYSIAN GEOLOGY AND REGIONAL GEOLOGY This course discusses the stratigraphy, structure and geological history of peninsular Malaysia, Sarawak and Sabah. It also gives an introduction to the regional geology of the area, specifically the Southeast Asian region. The relationship between the earth’s economic resources (ores, petroleum and gas) and the tectonics of the region is also covered.

References Hutchison, C.S. & Tan, D.N.K. 2009. Geology of Peninsular Malaysia. Universiti Malaya & Geological Society of

Malaysia, Kuala Lumpur

Petronas. 1999. The Petroleum Geology and Resources of Malaysia. Petronas, Kuala Lumpur Hall, R. & Holloway. J. D. 1998. Biogeography and Geological Evolution of SE Asia. Backhuys Publishers.

Gobbet, D. J. & Hutchison, C.S. 1973. Geology of the Malay Peninsula: West Malaysia and

Singapore. John Wiley-Interscience, New York.

Hall, R. & Blundell, D. J. 1996. Tectonic Evolution of SE Asia. Special Publication of the Geological Society, 106.

Geological Society of London Pub.

Hutchison, C. S. 2007. Geological Evolution of Southeast Asia. Geological Society of Malaysia. Universiti

Malaya, Kuala Lumpur

SG23703 GEOCHEMISTRY The course explains the fundamentals of geochemistry and applied geochemistry. This course discusses the geochemistry of solar system, geochemistry meteorite and earth geochemistry. Mobility characteristics, pressure, temperature and variation diagram are also discussed. The lecture also discussed the compositions of felsic magma, basic magma, pegmatite composition, and aplite are also discussed. The geochemical characteristics and distribution of elements in igneous rocks, metamorphic rocks and sedimentary rocks are also discussed. The students are also taught the principles of geochemical exploration using plants, soils, river deposits, water from rivers and basement rocks. Statistical interpretation of data and chemical analysis method on samples are also introduced.

References

Brownlow. A. H. 1996. Geochemistry. 2nd Edition. Prentice-Hall. Inc.

Krauskopf, K. B. & Bird, D. K. 1995. Introduction to Geochemistry. McGraw-Hill International Edc.

Mason, B. & Moore, C. B. 1989. Prinsip-Prinsip Geokimia. Translated by Wan Fuad. Wan Hassan & Alias Salleh. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Nelson, G. 2004. Principles of Environmental Geochemistry. Thomson Brooks Cole, Victoria.

Wedepohl, K. H. 1971. Geochemistry. Rinehart dan Winston, Inc.

SG23803 MAPPING TECHNIQUE This course discusses geological mapping technique at various scales, scopes and use. It includes an understanding and knowledge of the main characteristics of a geological map, latest equipment for field mapping, preparation of base map, observation and recording in the field, plotting of field data on the base map, making geological cross-sections, producing the final map and report writing. A oneweek guided field work in a selected area will be carried out to practice the basic method of geological mapping.

References

Allum, J. A. E. 1989. Fotogeologi dan Pemetaan Kawasan. Translated by Johari Mat Akhir .Dewan Bahasa

dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Barnes, J. W & Lisle, R. J. 2003 . Basic Geologic Mapping. 4th edition.John Wiley & Sons.

Ibrahim Komoo, Ibrahim Abdullah & Juhari Mat Akhir, 1989. Teknik Pemetaan Geologi. UKM,

Bangi. Lisle, R. 2003. Geological Structures and Maps: A Practical Guide. 3rd edition.

Butterworth-Heinemann, Stow, D. 2005. Sedimentary Rocks in the Field: A Colour Guide.

Manson Publishing Ltd.


SG33103 GEOPHYSICS I This course is intended to introduce geology students to a wide variety of geophysical techniques that are traditionally used to interpret geological structures and characteristics. The course includes: optical survey techniques in the field, use of seismic wave reflection, refraction and interpretation of seismic data, gravity and geomagnetic field measurement and analysis with the gravimeter and magnetometer, geochronology and electrical method. Basic geophysical surveys using several geophysical equipments will be introduced. Students will be introduced to gather, process and interpret geophysical data and report writing.

References

Fowler, C. M. R. 2005. The Solid Earth: An Introduction to Global Geophysics, 2nd Edition, Cambridge University Press, 685 pp.

Kearey, P. and Brooks, M. 1991. An Introduction to Geophysical by Exploration. Blackwell Publishers Oxford.

Lay, T. and Wallace, T. C. 1995. Modern Global Seismology. Academic Press, San Diego.

Lowrie, W. 1997. Fundamentals of Geophysics. Cambridge University Press.

Reynolds, J. M. 1997. An Introduction to Applied and Environmental Geophysics, John Wiley & Sons.

Geldart, L. P. and Sheriff, R. E. 1991. Applied Geophysics. Cambridge University Press

SG33203 PETROLEUM GEOLOGY This course will introduce to the students some basic information on the geology of petroleum. The content will include: properties of petroleum, hydrocarbon source rock, source rock evaluation, migration, sedimentology and diagenesis of reservoirs, petroleum accumulation, geological application of wire-line logs and seismic interpretation, petroleum exploration and hydrocarbon province case studies. The coursework will involve integrated laboratory practicals involving hands-on experience with real data

References

Hunt, J. M. 1995. Petroleum Geochemistry an d Geology. WH Freeman & Co.

Lerche, I. 1992. Oil Exploration: Basin Analysis and Economics. Academic Press.

Sanudin Hj. Tahir. 2003. Geologi Petroleum. Penerbit UMS, Kota Kinabalu.

Selley, R. C. 1997. Elements of Petroleum Geology. Academic Press.

Tiab, D. E. & Donaldson, E. C. 1996. Petrophysics: Theory and Practice of Measuring Reservoir Rock and Fluid

Properties. Gulf Pub. Co.

SG33303 ENGINEERING GEOLOGY I The course discusses the mechanical properties of geological material. Characteristics of weathered rock based on mechanical properties such as moisture content, porosity, density, strength and permeability will be discussed. Soil classification based on engineering classification will introduced. Soil mechanics such as Atterberg Limit, compaction test, unconfined compression test and permeability of soil will be discussed and demonstrated in the laboratory.

References Bell, F. G. 2007. Engineering Geology. 2nd. Edition. Elsevier. Oxford, UK.

Braja, M. Das, 2002. Principles of Geotechnical Engineering. 5th edition. Brooks/Cole, USA.

Beavis, F. C. 1992. Geologi Kejuruteraan. Translated by Ibrahim Komoo and Tajul Anuar Jamaluddin. Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Head, K.H. 1992. Manual of Soil Laboratory Testing: Volume 1 Soil Classification and Compaction Test.

Pentech Press, London.

Head, K.H, 1992. Manual of Soil Laboratory Testing: Volume 2 Permeability, Shear Strength and Compressibility Test.

Pentech Press, London.

SG33403 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY The course emphasis on the physical constrains imposed on human activities by the geological processes that have shaped and are still shaping our natural environment. In a real sense these are the most basic inescapable constrains that we cannot for instance use as a resource that is not there or build a secure home or a safe dam on land that is fundamentally unstable. Geology then is a logically place to start in developing an understanding of many environmental issues. The principle aim of this course is to present the students with a broad overview of environmental geology. Because geology does not exist in a vacuum, however the course introduces related considerations from outside geology to clarify other ramifications. Likewise, the present does not exist in isolation from the past or future. It is hope that this knowledge will provide the students with a useful foundation for discussing and evaluating specific environmental issues as well as for developing ideas about how the problems should be solved. References Montgomery, G. W. 2006. Environmental Geology. 7th Edition. McGraw Hill, New York.

Pepkin, B. W., Trent, D. D. & Hazlett, R. 2005. Geology and the Environment. 4th Edition. Thompson


Brooks/Cole. Turk, H. & Thompson, G. R. 1995. Environment Geoscience. Saunders College Publishing, Florida

Arwathanarayana, U. 1995. Geoenvironment Introduction. A. A. Balkema, Netherlands. Blat, H. 1997. Our

Geologic Environment. Prentice Hall. New Jersey.

Bolt, B. A., Horn, W. L., Macdonald, G. A & Scott, R. F. 1977. Geological Hazards. Springer-Verlag.

SG33503 ECONOMIC GEOLOGY This course focuses on the earth natural resources that can be exploited and applied in the industry for metallic and non-metallic minerals. The topics include introduction to economic geology, industrial minerals and beneficiation, ore minerals, ore genesis theory on internal and surface processes, iron ore, gold mineralization, copper deposits, strata form and strata bound deposits, placer deposits, diamond, coal, hydrocarbon and the practice of economic geology in the mining cycle. Familiarization for both industrial and ore minerals were done through observation in laboratory.

References Malaysia, Pulau Pinang & Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur. Plummer, C.C. & Carlson, D.H. 2008. Physical Geology. 12th Edition. McGraw-Hill, New York. Pohl, W.L. 2011. Economic Geology: Principles and Practice. Wiley-Blackwell, UK.v Evans, A.M. 1989. Pengantar Geologi Bijih. Translated by Wan Fuad Wan Hassan. Dewan Bahasa dan

Grim, R.E. 1992. Mineralogi Lempung. Translated by Tuan Besar Tuan Sarif & Radzali Othman. Penerbit Universiti Sains

SG33603 SOIL SCIENCE This course discusses the soil formation from various types of parent material. This includes the detail discussion of factors that control the soil formation. This course also discussed the soil components such as type of minerals, organic matter, soil’s organisms. Chemical property of soil such as acidity, alkalinity; and physical property of soil such as soil structure and soil texture is also discussed. Soil classifications and soil management is also discussed. This course involved the laboratory analysis and field work. References

Baize, D. 1988. Soil Science Analyses. John Wiley, Chechister.

Brady, N. C. & Weil, R. R. 2004. Elements of the Nature and Properties of Soils. 6th Edition. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Fitzpatrick, E. A. 1996. An introduction to Soil Science. 2nd Edition. Longman, London.

Miller, R. W., Donahue, R. L & Miller, J. U. 1990. Soils: An Introduction to soils and plant growth. 6th Edition. Prentice-Hall,.

Shamsuddin Jusop. 1987. Asas Sains Tanah. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

SG33703 HYDROGEOLOGY This course discussed the geological aspects of hydrogeology such as introduction of the fundamental hydrogeology, hydrological cycle, availability of groundwater. Darcy Law which is describes the movement of groundwater will be discussed. Hydrograph, theoretical of groundwater movement, and groundwater hydraulic will be elaborated. This course will introduce the method of groundwater exploration and measurement of aquifers in sedimentary rock, igneous rock and metamorphic rock. The other aspects are groundwater pollution, effect of environment and management of groundwater. The parameters of physical and chemical of groundwater will be discussed.

References

Ingebritsen, S. E., Sanford, W. E. & Neuzil, C. E. 2006. Groundwater in Geological Processes. Cambridge

University Press.

Bowen, R. 1980. Groundwater. Applied Science Publishers.

Davis. S.N & Roger J.M. De Wilest. 1966. Hydrogeology. John Wiley & Sons, New York. Fetter, C. W. 1988.

Applied Hydrogeology. Longman Higher Education.

Todd, D. K. 1989. Hidrologi Air Tanah. Translated by Mohamad Ali Hasan.Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka, Kuala

Lumpur.

SG33803 ENGINEERING GEOLOGY II This course discuss the geological aspects in rock engineering such as mineral and rock, rock weathering, rock classification and index characteristics, useful of rock in construction work, rock engineering basic characteristics, discontinuities rock analysis, rock mass structure, rock strength and deformability, drilling design and rock workability, mechanic blasting, rock slope stability and stabilization method, and geological input in engineering work. Practical work consists of measurement of the rock physic and mechanic characteristics in laboratory and field work References

Abrahamson, L.W., Lee, T.S., Sharma, S. & Boyce, G.M. 2001. Slope Stability and Stabilization Methods. 2nd


Edition. John Wiley & Sons, New York.

Brady, B. H. G. & Brown, E.T. 1985. Rock mechanics for underground mining. Chapman & Hall.

Brown, E.T. 1981. Rock Characterization, Testing and Monitoring. ISRM Suggested Methods. London:

Pergamon Press. Duncan C. Wyllie. 1992. Foundations on Rock. E & FN Spon.

Giani, G. P. 1992. Rock slope stability analysis. A.A. Balkema, Rotterdam.

Goodman, R.E. 1989. Introduction to Rock Mechanics. John Wiley & Sons, New York.

Hoek, E. & Bray, J.W., 1981. Rock Slope Engineering. 3rd edition. Institution of Mining and

Metallurgy, London. Hudson, J.A. (Ed.). 1993. Compressive Rock Engineering. Vol. 1 & 3. Pergamon

Press, London.

Johnson, R.B. & DeGraff, J. V. Principles of Engineering Geology. John Wiley & Sons, Canada.

Wittke, W. 1990. Rock Mechanics: The Theory and Applications with Case Histories. Springer Verlay,

Berlin. Zaruba, Q. & Mench, V. 1976. Engineering Geology. Elsevier, Amsterdam.

SG33902 GEOTOURISM This course will introduce the concept of geotourism and explain the main geological features found locally and abroad which can be used for geological heritage. The detail steps of mapping, characterization and evaluation of a geological feature to be proposed as a geological heritage site will be elobarated. Development, planning and management of geological heritage sites for geotourism will also be discussed. References

Dowling, R.K. & Newsome, D. 2010. Global Geotourism Perspectives. Goodfellow Publishers Ltd:Oxford.

Weaver, D. 2006. Sustainable Tourism. Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann:Oxford.

Dowling, R.K. & Newsome, D. (Eds). 2005. Geotourism: Sustainability – Impacts and Opportunities. Butterworth-

Heinemann: Oxford.

Edgell, D.L. 2006. Managing Sustainable Tourism: A Legacy for the Future. Haworth Press: NY.

Dowling, R. K. & D. Newsome, 2006. Geotourism. Elsevier. Harris, A.G. 2003. Geology of national parks. Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company. Keller, A. E. 1999. Environmental

Geology. 8th Ed. Macmillan Pub.Co.

SG34003 GEOPHYSICS II This course covers geophysical applications in the solution of environmental, engineering and petroleum problems. Whether the problem is one of environmental site characterization, detection of buried objects, remediation of contamination spills, or the acquisition of subsurface hydrogeological parameters, a careful application of the methods of geophysics can provide insight into the geological, physical, and chemical structure and processes that operate within the near-surface. The course also examines surface and borehole geophysical methods that are currently being developed in industry, government laboratories and academia. The relationships between geophysical and hydrologic properties of soils and rocks are illustrated as the base of the deployment of geophysical surveys. Case histories are chosen from the spectrum of geophysical disciplines. References

Burger, R. H., Sheehan, A. & Jones, C. 2006. Introduction to Applied Geophysics. W. W. Norton,

Kearey, P., Brooks, M. & Hill, I. 2002. An Introduction to Geophysical Exploration. Blackwell Science, Inc.

Lillie, R. J. 1999. Whole Earth Geophysics: An Introductory Textbook for Geologists and Geophysicists. Prentice-

Hall. Reynolds, J. M. 1997. An Introduction to Applied and Environmental Geophysics. John Wiley & Sons.

Chichester. Sharma, P. V. 1997. Environmental and Engineering Geophysics. Cambridge University Press.

Telford, W. M., Geldart, L. P. & Sheriff, R. E. 1990. Applied Geophysics. University of Cambridge Press.

SG34203 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT I / SG40106 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II This course concerns with the theoretical aspect of the scientific approach of carrying out a scientific research project. It covers literature review, project proposal preparation and presentation and writing of a scientific report

SG40208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Student shall be placed in an industry or research area at least 14 weeks under industrial supervision. This training will be evaluated and student requested provide one written report after the industrial training over.

SG43103 GEOLOGICAL INTERPRETATION This course aims is to provide knowledge and understanding on the basic principle and applications of geological methods. Topics to be discussed include the geological principles applications. Geologic mapping is the main focused, mapping location selection, and subsurface investigations are keys to delineating mineral or any geological resources. The final year student is trained to perform geological resources evaluations for mining ventures or conservation easement properties, well siting for residential or industrial water supplies, and structure contour mapping for subsurface evaluation programs.

References


Hatcher, R. D. Jr. 1994. Structural Geology: Principles, Concept and Problems. Prentice-Hall, London. Hoek, E.

& Bray, J.W., 1981. Rock Slope Engineering. 3rd Ed. Institution of Mining and Metallurgy, London.




Turk, H. & Thompson, G. R. 1995. Environment Geoscience. Saunders College Publishing, Florida.

Walker, R.G. (ed.) 1992. Facies Models. Geoscience Canada Reprint Series, Geological Association of

Canada, Waterloo, Ontario 211, 317 pp.

SG43303 FORMATION EVALUATION This course explains the primary functions of the drilling in petroleum industry. Data gathering is used to provide the necessary parameters for preparing the model and identification of the reservoir. This course also covers all aspects of well logging and formation evaluation with the latest techniques. The parameters includes reservoir petrophysics, general purpose of well logs, fluid and formation resistivity’s, porosity measurements from cores, well site log interpretation, lithology, water saturation, oil saturation and types of rocks. References


Hatcher, R. D. Jr. 1994. Structural Geology: Principles, Concept and Problems. Prentice-Hall, London.

Hoek, E. & Bray, J.W., 1981. Rock Slope Engineering. Edisi ketiga. Institution of Mining and Metallurgy, London.



Turk, H. & Thompson, G. R. 1995. Environment Geoscience. Saunders College Publishing, Florida.

Walker, R.G. (ed.) 1992. Facies Models. Geoscience Canada Reprint Series, Geological Association of Canada,

Waterloo, Ontario 211, 317 pp.

SG43503 GEOLOGICAL HAZARD

This course will explain the scale and origin of natural geological hazards such as volcanic activity, earthquake,

tsunami, landslide, flood, river bank erosion, coastal erosion and subsidence. The cause and physical process of

these geological hazards, their effect on the natural and human environment, their possible prediction and

mitigation is discussed using local examples as well as from other countries

References

Bell, F. G. 2003. Geological Hazards: Their Assessment, Avoidance And Mitigation. Taylor & Francis. Coch,

N.K. 1994.

Geohazards: Natural and Human. Prentice Hall.

Dikau, R., Brunsden, D., Schrott, L. & Ibsen, M. 1996. Landslide Recognition—Identification, Movement and

Causes. John Wiley and Sons, New York.

Schanze, J., Evzen, Z & M. Jiri. 2006. Flood risk management: hazards, vulnerability and mitigation measures

(NATO Science Series: IV: Earth and Environmental Sciences). Springer.

Sidle, R. C. & Ochiai, H. 2006. Landslides: processes, prediction and land use (Water Resources

Monograph). American Geophysical Union.

PHYSICS WITH ELECTRONICS PROGRAMME (HS22)

SF12201 PHYSICS PRACTICAL I

This practical course provides a number of experiments that need to be carried out by students from

Physics with Electronics. This practical aims to improve the ability of students in the techniques of data

collecting, reviewing and analyzing scientific information through experiments that focus on the field of

classical mechanics. This practical is started with the application of basic Physics knowledge such as

pendulum, Hooke's Law, kinematics, energy conservation and momentum. As an extension of the

application of basic science, students are also given exposure to topics such as thermodynamics,

transformers, magnetic field and also various electronic devices.

References

Halliday, D., Resnick, R. dan Walker, J. 2011. Fundamentals of Physics. 9th Ed. John Wiley and Sons, New York.

Bueche, F.J. danJerde, D.A. 1995. Principles of Physics. 5th Ed. McGraw Hill, New York.

Giambattista, A., Richardson, B.M. danRicardson, R.C. 2004. College Physics. 1st Ed. McGraw Hill. New York.

Kirkup, L. 1994. Experimental Methods: An Introduction To the Analysis and Presentation of Data .John Wiley

and Son.

Nor AiniNaim, Muhammad ShaiediIshak, Vijayakumar, V. Thum Ann, Keng, K.C., Nahbibi Rahmatullah,

FaezahJasman, MohdZakiMas’uddanMohdRahimiYusoff. 2005.Experimental Physics. 2nd Ed. Pearson,

Prentice Hall.

SF22201 PHYSICS PRACTICAL II

This practical course is partly as component of Basic Electronics course. The purpose is to expose the


students with electronics laboratory instrumentation and measurement techniques that cater to enhance

understanding of electronics. The practical laboratory starts with building connection of basic circuitry which

includes series, parallel and series-parallel. Then, followed by verification of few electric circuitry laws which

covers Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s current and voltage law. The practical laboratory for AC circuit also covered

which includes the filter circuits such as RL and RC.

References

Schultz, M.E., 2015. Grob’s Basic Electronics: Fundamentals of DC and AC Circuits. 12th Edition. McGraw Hill.

C. K. Alexander & M. Sadiku, Fundamental of Electric Circuit, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill.

Robert T. Paynter, Introductory Electronic Devices and Circuits, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall.

SF12103 PHYSICS I (MECHANICS)

The purpose of this course is to introduce to students some fundamental concepts of Physics. This course will

discuss the topics as follows: Unit and dimension. Kinematics in 1 and 2 dimension.Vectors in

physicss.Newton’s Laws and applications.Work and energy. Conservation of energy and momentum, Collision

in 1 and 2 dimension, Simple harmonic motion, Universal gravitation, gravitational force, Motion of planets,

Extended systems, moment of inertia. Angular momentum, rotational dynamics, compound pendulum. Rigid

body, equilibrium, static. Elasticity, stress, strain and torsion. Young’s modulus, shear modulus and bulk

modulus. Bending of beams, bending moment. Compression of fluids, surface tension, hydrostatics,

viscosity.Hydrodynamics, continuity equation, Bernoulli equation, Poiseuille equation.Turbulent flow,

sedimentation and drag.

References

Halliday, D., Resnick, R. andWalker, J. 2011. Fundamentals of Physics. 9th Ed. Wiley.

Vuille, C., Serway, R.A. andFaughn, J.S. 2009. College Physics. 8th Ed. Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning,

Canada. Frederick J. Buecheand David A. Jerde, 2008.Principles of Physics.9th Ed. McGraw Hill, US.

Young, H.D. andGeller, R. 2007. College Physics. Addison-Wesley.

Resnick, R andHalliday, D.; terjemahanAsiahSalleh, Fizik 2. 1992. DewanBahasadanPustaka. Kuala Lumpur.

SF12603 MATHEMATICAL METHOD IN PHYSICS I

This course is to strengthen student’s mathematic skills. Topics will include the following. Complex Analysis:

Funtions of a complex variable - complex functions. Differentiation of complex functions; Cauchy-Riemann

conditions, analytic functions, singular points, power series of analytic functions, Taylor series. Complex

Integration: Cauchy integral theorem. Cauchy integral formula.Zeroes and singularities.Laurent series.Residue

theorem. Differential Equations: Ordinary linear differential equations of first order and methods of solutions.

Ordinary linear differential equations of second order – homogeneons and non-homogeneous equations and

methods of solution. Partial differential equations: Sturm – Lionrille boundary value problems. Wave equation,

Heat equation, Laplace equation - solution by separation of variables.

References

William. Mathematical Methods for Geophysics and Space Physics. (2016). Princeton University Press.

John. Mathematical Methods in Physics and Engineering (Dover Books on Physics). (2011). McGraw Hill

Roel and Kasper. A Guided Tour of Mathematical Methods for the Physical Sciences 3rd Edition. (2015).

Cambridge University Press.

SF12303 PHYSICS II (ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM)

This course will discuss various topics of theories and applications of electricity and magnetic phenomena. The

students will learn theories and applications of electricity such as static charges, electric forces, electric field,

electric potential, capacitor and dielectric, current and resistor, Ohm’s law, Kirrchoff’s law and direct current

circuits. This course will also exposed the students to theories and applications of magnetism such as

magnetic field, magnetic forces, Bio Savart’s law, Gauss law, electric motion force and circuit, Ampere’s la

w, Faraday induction’s law, inductance, properties of magnetic matter, electromagnetic oscillation,

alternative current and Maxwell’ equations.

References

Halliday, D, Resnick, R, and Walker, J. 2011. Fundamental of Physics. 9th Ed. McGraw Hill.John Wiley & Son.

Jones, E and Childers, R. 2001. Contemporary College Physics. 3rd Ed. McGraw Hill.

Cutnell, J.D. and Johnson, K.W. 2007. Physics. John Wiley& Son.

SF12403 PHYSICS III (WAVE AND OPTICS)

This course is to enhance students understanding in fundamental of physics. The first part of the course is the

discussion on the optics wave properties. This includes the discussion on the characteristics and properties


of light wave such as reflection, refraction, superposition, interference, diffraction and polarization. Some of

its applications are discussed in lenses and optical devices.

References

David Halliday, Robert Resnick & Jearl Walker. 2016. Fundamentals of Physics, 10th Edition, Wiley ISBN:

9781118731420

Rendal D. Knight, Brian Jones & Stuart Field. 2015. College Physics : A Strategic Approach, 3rd Edition,

Pearson ISBN-13: 978-0321879721.

Daniel Fleish & Laura Kinnman. 2014. A Student’s Guide to Waves. ISBN-13: 978 11 07643260.

Jedol Dayou. 2001. Pengenalan Kepada Fizik Cahaya. Kota Kinabalu: UMS.

Hecth, E. 2002. Optics (4th. Ed). San Francisco: Addison Wesly.

Ghatak, A. 2005. Optics (3rd. Ed). Boston: McGraw-Hill.

Halliday, D., Resnik, R. & Walker, J. 2003. Fundamental of Physics. John Wiley & Sons.

Buche, F. J. & Jerde, D. A. 1995 (6th ed). Principles of Physics. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Crummett, W. P. & Western, A. B. 1994. University Physics. WBC. USA.

Bauche, F. 3. 1986. Introductions to Physics For Scientists and Engineering. New York: McGraw-Hill.

SF22303 MODERN PHYSICS

The course studies the establishment of the ideas and institutions of modern physics, covering the evolution of

the discipline over roughly the last century and a half. This period has witnessed some of the field's most

dramatic developments, both intellectual and structural. The courses begin with the nineteenth-century

organization of the discipline and the debates over the classical world picture (mechanics, electromagnetism and

optics, thermodynamics and statistical mechanics). Then follow the dramatic changes that undid the classical

picture, from the discovery of radioactivity and x-rays, through Einstein's theories of relativity, on to the the

creation of quantum mechanics and accompanying philosophical disputes. We consider the elucidation of atomic

structure, the exploration of the nucleus, and the establishment of the field-theoretic description of natural

phenomena. Alongside these conceptual upheavals in addition, applications including nuclear, particle physics

and condensed matter will be covered.

References

Carlo Maria Becchi & Massimo D’Elia. (20160 Introduction to the Basic Concept of Modern Physics Special

Relativity, Quantum and Statictical Physics 3rd ed. Springer; ISBN 978-3-31920629-5

Beiser, SHobhit Mahajan & S Rai Chouchury. (2015). Concepts of Modern Physics, 7ed. McGraww-Hill.

Halliday, D, Resnick, R & Walker, J. (2007). Fundamental of Physics. 8ed. John Wiley.

Beiser, A. (2000). Concept Of Modern Physics. 6ED, McGraww-Hill.

Kenneth Krane, (1996). Modern Physics, 2ed. John Wiley & Son, Inc.

SF22201 PHYSICS PRACTICAL III

I This course includes the experiments of variety topics about semiconductor, electronic digital, solar cell, xray

diffraction techniques and vibrations. Students will exposed not only to understand of how the body of knowledge

in physics has been derived, but also see the links between theory and practice in the any topics of physics.

References

Sean Westcott and Jean Riescher. 2015. Basic Electronics: Theory and Practice. 1st ed. Mercury Learning & Information.

D. A. Neamen. 2012. Semiconductor Physics & Devices: Basic Principles. 4th ed. McGraw Hill.

Dennis L. Eggleston. 2011. Basic Electronics for Scientists and Engineers. 1st ed. Cambridge University Press

SF32101 PHYSICS PRACTICAL IV

The concept of this practical is electronics workshop. This practical course will emphasis on using electronics

equipments such as oscilloscope, multimeter, power generator and function generator. Students also will be

directed to design and produce circuits for selected electronics systems. During the experiment, students will

design and test the circuits by using protoboard and PCB. Mini projects that will be held are: dc power

generator, amplifier circuit and remote control system.

References

Thomas L. Floyd. 2012. Electronic Devices Conventional Current Version. 9th ed. Prentice Hall. ISBN 978-0-13-

254986-8.

Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky. 2012. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory. 11th ed. Pearson. ISBN

978-0132622264.

Thomas L. Floyd. 2009. Electronics Fundamentals: Circuits, Devices & Applications. 8th ed. Pearson. ISBN 978-

0135072956.

SF22503 MATHEMATICAL METHOD IN PHYSICS II


This course is to further strengthen student’s mathematic skills. The topics will include the following. Vector

algebra; definitions, addditon, subtraction of vectors, dot products and cross products of vectors, scalar and

vector fields, geometric representation, algebraic representation, transformation; unit vectors.Vector calculus;

scalar differentiation, differentiation with respect to time.Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector.Physical

examples.Consecutive differentiation, Laplacean, D’Alembertian.Physical examples.Vector integration; line,

surface and volume integrals.Gauss Theorem.Stokes Theorem.Application in Physics; potential theory, scalar

potential, vector potential.Coordinate Systems; Cartesian, curvilinear systems, cylindrical,

spherical.Differentiation and integration.Application in Physics, position, velocity and acceleration, wave

equation for electric field and magnetic. Integral transforms: general properties. Laplace transform: general

properties, applications in physical problems. Fourier transform: general properties, applications in physical

problems. Special functions/equations: Gamma, Bessel, Legendre and Associated Legendere. Fourier Analysis:

expansion of functions in terms of sine and cosine, properties, physical examples.

References

Arfken, G.B. and Weber H.J. 2000. Mathematical Methods for Physicists. 4th Ed. Academic Press. Chow, T.L.

2000. Mathematical Methods for Physicists. Cambridge University Press.

Kreyszig, E. 1985. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 8th Ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons.

Sadri Hassani. 1999. Mathematical physics: a modern introduction to its foundations. New York: Springer.

Spiegel, M.R. 1981. Theory and Problems of Vector Analysis and an Introduction to Tensor Analysis, McGraw-

Hill, New York.

SF32303 STATISTICAL PHYSICS

This course will begin with the discussion on the characteristics of macroscopic and microscopic systems.

Then followed by probability concepts and counting of states. Next topics are the postulate of equal a priori

probabilities and microcanonical ensemble and then followed by the definition of absolute temperature and

entropy including canonical ensemble and statistics of ideal quantum gases. The discussions on Maxwell-

Boltzmann statistics, Bose-Einstein statistics and Fermi-Dirac statistics. At the end, students will be exposed to

the applications of quantum statistics such as specific heat of solids, black body radiation, conducting

electrons in solids.

References

Olla, P. 2015. An Introduction to Thermodynamics and Statistical Physics. Springer International Publishing.

Briels, W. J., Dhont, J. K. G., Lang, P. R and Liu, Y. 2015. Basics of Statistical Physics. Soft Matter at Aqueous Interfaces, 189-220.

Mehran K. 2007. Statistical Physics of Particles. Cambridge University Press, New York.

SF22803 THERMODYNAMICS PHYSICS

This course is aimed to provide a complete knowledge for students in physics in solving some particular

problems in electronics. This will be started with coordinate equation state, heat and work, quasi-static process,

ideal gas equation, and Carnot’s circuit. Later on, this will be continued on the First and Second

Thermodynamic’s laws, entropy principle, entalphy and energy, Maxwell’s equation, energy equation, heat

change, phase changes and critical state. Other topics discussed are canonical coordinate, phase space,

ensemble, Liouvilles’ theorem, microcanonic, statistical mechanics and thermodynamics, classical ideal gas,

up and down energy, quantum statistics, matrix density, ideal gas quantum and quantum distribution

functions.

References

Claus Borgnakke & Richard E. Sonntag. 2013. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics. John Wiley & Son. ISBN 978

1 118 131992

Radi, H. A. & Rasmussen, H.O. 2012. Principles of Physics: For Scientists and Engineers (Undergraduate

Lecture Notes in Physics). Springer.

Peter Atkins, 2010.The Laws of Thermodynamics : A very Short Introduction. Oxford. ISBN 978 0 19957219 9

H. J. Kreuzer, Isaac Tamblyn. 2010. Thermodynamics.

Nag, P. K. 2010. Basic and applied thermodynamics. 2nd Ed. McGraw Hill

Helrich, S. C. 2009. Modern Thermodynamics with Statistical Mechanics. Springer.

SF22603 QUANTUM PHYSICS

This course is aimed to strengthen the knowledge of students in physics through the discussions of the

following topics. Development of Quantum Mechanics: Schrödinger picture and Heisenberg picture. Schrödinger

equation. Wave functions. Probability.Measureable quantities. Operators and expectation values. Stationary

state. Eigen function and Eigen value. Particle in a box. Harmonic osailator. Barrier penetration. Central field

problem.Hydrogen atom. Students will be exposed on some application of quantum theory on the electronics

circuit.


References

McMahon, D. M. (2013). Quantum Mechanics Demystified, 2nd Ed. McGraw-Hill Prof Med.

Griffiths, D. J. (2013). Introduction to Quantum Mechanics: Pearson New International Edition. Pearson Education Limited.

Le Bellac, M. (2012). Quantum Physics. Cambridge University Press.

McIntyre, D. H., Manogue, C. A., & Tate, J. (2012). Quantum Mechanics: A Paradigms Approach. Pearson.

Mohrhoff, U. (2011). The World according to Quantum Mechanics: Why the laws of physics make perfect sense after all. World Scientific.

SF22403 PHYSICS METHODS FOR EXPERIMENTS AND MEASUREMENTS

This course allows students to understand measurement problems in electronics from physics’ vie w when they

working in the final year project. Topics will be provided are data acquisition method, hardware and software

in measurements and experiments, experimental measurements of temperature, pressure, load, long distance &

precaution and sensor. To simplify the work, these problems will be solved using computers, some topics of

computational and automatic measurements, data processing including package, MathCAD, MATLAB, Lotus-

123 and graphic will also be given.

References

Holman, J.P., 2011. Experimental Methods for Engineers, Eight Editions. McGraw-Hill

Dunn, Patrick F. Measurement and data analysis for engineering and science. 2005. McGraw Hill

Hughas, I & Hase T, 2010. Measurements and their Uncertainties: A practical guide to modern error analysis, 1st Edition. Oxford University Press.

Squires, G.L., 2001. Practical Physics. Cambridge University Press

Nor Aini Naim et. al., 2003. Experimental Physics: An Introduction. Prentice Hall

SF32503 SOLID STATE PHYSICS

This course is aimed to introduce any phenomena occurred in solid state. This will be started with an introduction

to bonding types in solid state such as covalent bond, hydrogen, van der Waals and ionic. Later on,

discussions will be continued on crystal structures, symmetrical points, crystal classifications and simple

structures and also refraction of periodic structures. Dynamic properties of crystal and properties of heat in

crystal will also be given. Principle of free electron, band structure in solid state, electron motion in magnetism

and mobility phenomenon describe a real explanation in solid state followed by superconductors. Dielectric

properties in solid state, semiconductor solid state and superconductor will also be discussed.

References

Philip Hofmann. 2015. Solid State Physics. 2nd ed. Wiley-VCH-Berlin. ISBN 978-3-5274-1282-2.

S. O. Pillai. 2009. Solid State Physics. 6th ed. New Age Science. ISBN 978-1-9065-7410-9.

John J. Quinn and Kyung-Soo Yi. 2009. Solid State Physics Principles and Modern Applications. 1st

ed.Springer. ISBN 978-3-6420-2317-7.

Dan Wei, 2008. 1st ed. Solid State Physics. Cengage Learning Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore, ISBN 978-9-8142-

2797-1.

SF32103 COMPUTATIONAL PHYSICS AND MODELLING

This course introduces computer as a tool to broad and enhance understanding in physics by

increasing range of mathematical calculations that can be conveniently performed. Fundamentals and

programming concept in C is introduced such as variables, operator, library functions, data input and output,

control statements etc. Later, C programming is used in computing problems in physics such as data analysis,

data acquisition, wave equation, diffusion equation, ordinary differential equation, Monte Carlo Method and Ising

Model.

References

Sizemore, J., & Mueller, J. P. 2014. MATLAB for Dummies. John Wiley & Sons. Chicago

Kharab, A., & Guenther, R. B. 2011. An introduction to numerical methods: a MATLAB approach. CRC Press.

Franklin, J. 2013. Computational Methods for Physics. Cambridge University Press

DeVries, P. L., & Hasbun, J. E. 2011. A First Course in Computational physics. Jones & Bartlett Publishers.

Leita, E. P. (Ed.). 2010. MATLAB-Modelling, Programming and Simulations. ABM Nasiruzzaman. Scherer, P. O.

2013. Computational Physics: Simulation of Classical and Quantum Systems 2nd Edition. Springer.

SF34203 PROJECT I / SF40106 PROJECT II

Research project that supervised by a lecturer that will be done in 2 academic sessions. This course will

include proposal andresearch results presentation, thesis; that include literature review, methodology, result and

discussion.


SF40303 INSTRUMENTATION PHYSICS

This course discusses the instrumentation and meaurement. In the beginning, this course covers all aspect of

major types of electrical transducers and associated instrumentation. Different transduction principles including

displacement, pressure, flow and temperature measurement are discussed. The subsequent part includes the

instrumentation aspects on data acquisition, conversion and processing

References

Webster, J. G., & Eren, H. (Eds.). 2014. Measurement, Instrumentation, and Sensors Handbook: Spatial,

Mechanical, Thermal, and Radiation Measurement, Vol. 1. CRC press.

Placko, D. (Ed.). 2013. Fundamentals of instrumentation and measurement. John Wiley & Sons.

Zhang, T. 2012. Instrumentation, Measurement, Circuits and Systems , Vol. 127. Springer.

Chaudhry, K.K., & Nakara, B.C., 2009, Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, 3rd Edition. Tata McGraw

Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi.

SF40208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Students will be exposed in job environment in industry or research field at least in 10 weeks that will be

supervised by a lecturer. This training will be evaluated and the students have to prepare a report about the

training after finishing the 10 weeks of Industrial Training.

SF32203 LASER PHYSICS

This course is aimed to introduce the properties of laser, basic principles of laser and its applications. Topics

that will be provided are emission and absorption, Einstein’s relation, population inversion and pumping

threshold conditions. Laser modes and classes of lasers are discussed in this course too. The applications of

laser in scientific, industrial, medical and military are introduced too.

References

Allmen, M. V. and Blatter, A. 2013. Laser-Beam Interactions with Materials: Physical Principles and

Applications. Vol. 2. Springer Science & Business Media.

Silfvast, W. T. 2005. Laser Fundamentals. 2nd Edition. Cambridge University Press

Hecht, J. 2011. Understanding Lasers: An Entry-level Guide. Vol. 21. John Wiley & Sons.

Thyagarajan, K., and Ghatak, A. 2010. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications. Springer Science & Business

Media.

SF32803 X-RAY CRYSTALLOGRAPHY

Crystal structure, lattice and unit cell, Bravais lattice, symmetry and space groups, direction and crystal

plane, x-ray diffraction, Bragg’s law, reciprocal lattice, Edwald sphere and data group, basics crystallography,

x-ray diffraction equipment, phase technique and structure factor.

References

Hofmann, P. (2015). Solid State Physics: An Introduction. John Wiley & Sons.

Waseda, Y., Matsubara, E. and Shinoda, K. 2011. X-Ray Diffraction Crystallography: Introduction, Examples and

Solved Problems. Springer Science & Business Media.

Pecharsky, V. K. and Zavalij, P. Y. 2009. Fundamentals of Powder Diffraction and Structural Characterization of

Materials. Vol. 69. New York: Springer.

Ladd, M. and Palmer, R. 2014. Structure determination by X-ray crystallography. 5th Ed. New York: Plenum

Press.

SF32603 NOISE AND VIBRATION

Noise and Vibration is a course that aims to broaden students' knowledge in physics. This is because vibration

is strongly related to sound, and sound is an important element in everyday life especially in communicating to

each other.The course provides an introduction to the vibration and the models used to analyze the vibration

of a structure. Next, the sound of vibration will be discussed, followed by sound characteristics, noise

measurement methods and calculations involved in the measurement of sound. Finally, the impact of excessive

noise exposure on human will be discussed.

References

Rao, S.S. 2003. Mechanical Vibrations. 4th Ed. Prentice Hall. Balachandran, B.and Magrab, E. 2004. Vibration.

Thomson Brooks

Cole, B. and Calif, McC. K.G. 1995. Vibration testing theory and practice. Wiley-VCH, New York. Smith, B.J.,

Peters, R.J.and OwenSmith, S. 1996. Acoustics and Noise Control. Addison Wesley Longman, Harlow Kiely, G.

1995. Environmental Engineering. McGraw Hill, London.

SF33003 NUCLEAR PHYSICS

The course introduces to some general concepts and theories of nuclear physics and its applications. The

course begins with understanding the basic knowledge of atomic properties. The next topic of the course is


introducing the radiation sources and the types of ionizing radiations. Fundamental instrumentation of radiation

detection will be discussed in the next topic. Application of nuclear reaction in nuclear power plant and various

industries will be introduced at the end of the subject. In general, the course provides a basic concept of nuclear

physics and its applications in order to widening the appreciation of the knowledge to the students

References

Youngm Adams and Chastain. College physics. 2016. Pearson

Giambattista Alan, Richardson Betty McCarthy and Richardson Robert C.College Physics. 2013. Pearson

Tsoulfanidis and Nicholas. Measurement and detection of radiation. 2011. CRC Press.

Bransden and Joachain. Physics of atoms and molecules. 2003. Pearson

Lilley. Nuclear physics “principle and applications”. 2001. Wiley Sukman Sarmani. Radiokimia. 1991. Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka

SE22103 BASIC ELECTRONICS

This course will introduce the fundamental and important knowledge in the field of electronics. The topics that will

be covers from introductory to electrical circuitry concept until application of various laws that utilized in electrical

circuits. The analysis will cover both DC circuit and AC circuits. Among the main topics that will be taught are

introduction to basics electrical components such as resistor, capacitor and inductor, building electrical circuits

connection such as in series, parallel and series parallel, related mathematical laws such as ohm’s laws,

Kirchhoff’s law, current and voltage divider, node and mesh analysis, types of AC circuits, complex number in

electric circuits and finally application of RC and RL as electric filters

References

Schultz, M.E., 2015. Grob’s Basic Electronics: Fundamentals of DC and AC Circuits. 12th Edition. McGraw Hill.

Hughes, E. 2012. Electrical Technology.11th Edition, Pearson.

SE22203 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

This course introduces the basic concepts of digital electronics. In this course, digital number systems and

codes, logic circuits, Boolean algebra, combinational and sequential circuit analysis and design are also

introduced. Simplification of logic circuits using Boolean algebra, Karnaugh map method, state diagram, logic

design using MSI components are also included.

References

Tocci, R.J. 2014. Digital Systems: Principles and Applications. 11th Ed. Pearson Education.

Robert, D. & Ken, R. 2012. Digital Electronics. Delmar Cengage Learning.

Tokheim, R. 2008. Digital Electronics: Principles & Applications. McGraw Hill.

Floyd, T.L. 2006. Digital Fundamentals. 10th Ed. Pearson Education

SE32303 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS

This course is intended to present the concepts of analysis and design of electronic circuits and systems.Know

and understand electronic components with emphasis on operational amplifier circuits. The course begins with

the basic physical operation of P-N junction diodes, JFET’s and BJT transistors. This followed by the basic

transistor circuit configurations (CE, CC, CB, CS, CD, CG), its DC bias, small signal analysis, simple

multitransistor circuits, diff-amp, current mirror, frequency response and how these devices are used in typical

analog circuits, such as power supplies, amplifiers, and comparators will also emphasized.

References

Robert L.Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky. 2014. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory. 11thEdition. Pearson

International Edition.

Robert T.Paynter, 2006. Introductory Electronic Devices and Circuits. 7th Edition. Prentice-Hall.

Malvinho, A.P, 1999. Electronic Principle. 6th Edition. McGraw Hill.

SE32203 SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS

The course begins by reviewing fundamental theories and concepts pertaining to solid state materials and

energy bands. This will lead to studies of the characteristics and working mechanisms of semiconductor

materials such as intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, static and charge carriers characteristics, diffusion and

the basic PN junction. The course continues with characteristic and working mechanism of devices such as

bipolar junction transistors PNP and NPN, field effect transistors, MOSFET and other related devices.

References Neamen, Donald. 2012. Semiconductor Physics and Devices. 4th Edition. McGraw-hill. S. M. Sze. 2012. Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology. 3rd Edition. John Wiley. Charles Kittel. 2005. Introduction to Solid State Physics. John Wiley and Sons, New York..


SE40103 SEMICONDUCTOR TECHNOLOGY

This course is to provide an overall view of semiconductor fabrication technology used in semiconductor

industry. It begins with crystal growth processes and continues with thermal oxidation, diffusion, ion implantation,

lithography and metallization in forming integrated devices and circuits. The course will concentrate on silicon

since more that 95 % of the microelectronics industry is based on this material.

References

Van Zant, P. 2013 Microchip Fabrication: A Practical Guide to Semiconductor Processing. 6th Ed. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Brewer, G. (Ed.). 2012. Electron-beam technology in microelectronic fabrication. Elsevier.

Peter, Y. U., & Cardona, M. 2010. Fundamentals of semiconductors: physics and materials properties. Springer Science & Business Media.

Cambell, S. A., 2001. The Science and Engineering of Microelectronic Fabrication (2nd Edition). John Wiley, New York.

Masuri Othman, 2002. Teknologi Peranti Mikroelektronik. Penerbit UKM.

SE32403 COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS

This course has been designed to provide the knowledge and understanding of techniques used in digital

communications with particular emphasis placed on optical and mobile communications. Topics such as

amplitude & frequency modulation, multiplexing, radio wave propagation, satellite communication and fibre optic

communication are among the topics to be covered in this course.

References

Leon, W.C. 2013. Digital and Analog Communication Systems.8th ed. Pearson International Edition.

Haykin, Simos S, 2005. Modern Wireless Communication, Prentice Hall, Saddle River.

Forouzan,B.A.2004. Data Communications and Networking. McGraw Hill.

A. Bruce Carlson, Paul B.Crilly and Janet C.Rutledge. 2002. Communication System. 4thed. McGraw Hill.

Frenzel, L.E. 2000. Communication Electronics: Principles and Applications. 3rd ed. McGraw Hill.

Wayne Tomasi, 2004. Electronic Communication Systems: Fundamentals Through Advanced. Prentice Hall.

SE32503 OPTOELECTRONICS

The goal of this course is to provide upper level undergraduate with knowledge and understanding of the

principles and practices of modern optoelectronics devices and their important functions in optical

communication, signal processing and sensing. Topics include wave nature of lights, planar dielectric

waveguides and fiber optics, light emitting diodes and stimulated emissions device, photodetectors, photovoltaic

devices, modulation and display devices, optical communication systems

References

Kasap, S. O. 2013. Optoelectronics & Photonics: Principles & Practices: International Edition.

Pearson Higher Ed.

Piprek, J. 2013. Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices: Introduction to Physics and Simulation.

Academic Press.

Chuang, S. L. 2012. Physics of Photonic Devices. Vol. 80. John Wiley & Sons.

Träger, F. (Ed.). 2012. Springer Handbook of Lasers and Optics. Springer Science & Business Media.

Quimby, R. S. 2006. Photonics and Lasers. Wiley-Interscience.

SE32602 SPECIAL TOPICS IN PHYSICS ELECTRONICS

Selected topics in physics and electronics will be discussed to expose the students on current development and

technology. Topics to be covered (but not limited to) including superconductivity and its applications, advances in

acoustic and vibration, nuclear generator, reactor and applications, vacuum science and technology, and

radiation physics. The topics will be varied from time to time to meet current demands on student’s knowledge.

References Conibeer, G. (2014) Third-Generation Solar Cells, in Solar Cell Materials: Developing Technologies (eds G. Conibeer and A. Willoughby), John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, Chichester, UK. John Barell, 2007. Problem-Based Learning 2ed. Corwin Press.

SE40503 MICROPROCESSOR

This course introduces students to microprocessor architecture and assembly language programming in general.

Then discuss, in details, how to program in assembly language for common microprocessors; the Intel 8086 to

80386. Finally interfacing techniques in theory between the Intel 8086 and 80386 microprocessor to the

peripheral devices is then given.


References

Muhammad A.M, Janice G.M and Rolin D.M., 2013. The 8051 Microcontroller, A System Approach Pearson Education.

Brey B., 2009. The Intel 32 bit Microprocessors, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Singh A., and Triebel W.A. 2003. The 8088 and 8086 Microprocessors, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Uffenbeck J., 2002. The 80x86 Family Design, Programming and Interfacing, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Brey B., 1996. Programming the 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium-based Personal Computer, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

SE40703 ELECTROACOUSTICS

This course discusses about process involves in converting signal from sound wave to electrical signal and vice

versa, that is from electrical signal to sound wave. There are two important elements to be stressed in this

course, which are the application of acoustical physics which includes the theory of sound wave and how it can

be used in detection of sound and application of electronics in sound signal detection. Contents of the

course are includes discussion on transducers to convert sound signal to electrical signal such as

microphones and their types; discussion on transducers to convert electrical signal to sound signal such as

loudspeakers and their types. In general, this course is a combination of application between physics knowledge

in sound and electronics, which is strongly related to instrumentation.

References

Leach, W.M. 1999. Introduction to Electroacoustics and Audio Amplifier Design.2nd Ed. Kandell/Hunt Publishing

Company. Eargle, J.M. 1996. Loudspeaker handbook. Norwell, Massachusetts: Kluwer Academic Publishers.

Eargle, J.M. 1994. Electroacoustical reference data. New York: Van Nostrad Reinhold Hunt, F.V. 1982.

Electroacoustics.Acoustical Society of American Publication. Gayford, M.L. 1970. Electroacoutics: microphone,

earphones and loudspeakers.

SE40903 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

This course is to expose on processing methods of digital signal such as from analogue to digital, input and

output, noise, filtration, various forms of discrete time signal and sequence system. The course is also covering

several types of Fourier’s transform and Z transform, their applications and importance examples in signal

processing. Further, these will be followed by advanced understanding of Fourier’s transform using computer

package and numerical analysis solutions for input-output.

References Diniz, P. S., Da Silva, E. A. and Netto, S. L. 2010. Digital signal processing: system analysis and design.

Cambridge University Press.

Antoniou, A. 2006. Digital signal processing. Toronto, Canada: McGraw-Hill

Paulus, D. W. and Hornegger, J. 2003. Applied pattern recognition: algorithms and implementation in C++.

Springer Science & Business Media.

.

AQUACULTURE (HS27)

SQ12103 PRINCIPLES OF AQUACULTURE

This course is designed to provide basic knowlegde of the various types of aquaculture systems and the

concepts of sustainable aquaculture management. Topics that are given special emphasis include aims and

scope of aquaculture practices, biology principles underlying the aquaculture development, desired qualities of

cultivated organisms, and socio-economic importance of aquaculture for Malaysia.

References

Boyd, C.E. 2015. Aquaculture: Resource use, and the Environment. John Wiley & Sons Inc.

Bunting, S. W. 2012. Principles of sustainable aquaculture: Promoting social, economic and environment resilience (Earthen food and agriculture). Routeledge, New York.

Lucas, J. S. & Sothgate, P. 2013. Aquaculture: Farming aquatic animals and plants. Blackwell Publishing.

Muchlisin, Z.A. 2012. Aquaculture. Intech.

Tidwell, J.H. Aquaculture production system. 2012. John-Wiley & Sons, Inc.

SQ12303 BIOLOGY OF AQUACULTURE ANIMAL I (FISH)

This course is intended to provide an account of some aspects of the biology of fish. Students will learn outline

classification, diversity, structural organization, essential life functions and an introduction to the various links

in the life cycle of fishes. Methods of determining food and feeding habits, age, growth and breeding will be

given special emphasis. Application of biological data in aquaculture of the target animals will be elaborated.

Practical work will be carried out in the laboratory, aquarium, hatchery and in the field.


References

Mustafa, S. & Shapawi, R. 2015. Aquaculture Ecosystems. John Wiley and Sons, Ltd.

Bone, Q. & Moore, R. H. 2008. Biology of Fishes (3rd Edition, Latest). Taylor & Francis Group.

Domenici, P. & Kapoor, B. G. 2010. Fish Locomotion: An Eco-ethological Perspective. Science Publishers.

Huntingford, F., Jobling, M. & Kadri, S. 2012. Aquaculture and Behavior. John Wiley and Sons, Ltd.

Evans, D. H., Claiborne, J. B. & Currie, S. 2014. The Physiology of Fishes (4th Edition). CRC Press.

SQ12203 MOLLUSC CULTRE

This course introduces various commercially important bivalve species which are currently being cultured and

potentially be the species of aquaculture candidate. In this course, students will be taught the biology,

ecology and culture of these economically important bivalves. At the end of the course, students are expected

to be able to identify species of bivalve, its ecology and the culture methods.

References

Chee, K.Y. 2012. Mussel watch in Malaysia. Penerbit UPM, Selangor, Malaysia.

Lucas, J.S. 2011. Aquaculture: Farming Aquatic Animals and Plants. J. Wiley & Sons.

National Research Council. 2009. Shellfish Mariculture. National Academic Press, Washington, D.C.

Shumway, S. 2011. Shellfish aquaculture and the environment. Ames, Iowa: Wiley-Blackwell.

Shumway, S and Rodrick, G.E. 2009. Shellfish safety and quality. Woodhead, Gambridge.

SQ12403 WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT

This course is intended to inculcate in students the knowledge pertaining to the importance of water quality in

aquaculture, the factors that degrade the quality and the methods required for controlling pollution for

sustaining the culture systems. Initially started the course with the structure of water and covers dissolved

gases in water, nutrients, other materials and pollutants. Factors that affect water quality are explained.

Water management and disposal methods are given special emphasis. Next half of the course deals with

water pollution and its control. Topics of discussion include effects of pollution

on aquaculture – problems associated with survival, growt hand reproduction, pollution induced diseases and

abnormalities in fish and shellfish, and public health problems. Students are also made familiar with the

measures required for controlling pollution in aquaculture.

References

Lekang, O-I. 2013. Aquaculture Engineering (2nd Edition, Latest). Wiley-Blackwell.

Kruglick, A. 2012. Water Quality Management in a Pilot Marine Integrated Aquaculture System. Biblio Bazaar


Tidwell, J. 2012. Aquaculture Production System. Wiley-Blackwell.

Parker, R.O. 2012. Aquaculture Science (3rd Edition, Latest). Delmar Cengage Learning.

SQ12603 BIOLOGY OF AQUACULTURE ANIMAL II (INVERTEBRATE)

This course contents will discuss on the biology of some commercially important invertebrates in aquaculture.

The main topics including an introductory account (diversity, body design and capability to solve problems

of existence in varied aquatic ecosystems as well as aquaculture importance), classification and biology of

selected invertebrates of several phyla (Cnidaria, Platyhelminths, Nematoda, Rotifera, Mollusca, Annelida,

Echinodermata, Arthropoda). The discussion will be oriented to the aspects of basic structure, life functions

and distribution as well as culture and production of of these animals.

References

Pechenik, J.A. 2015. Biology of the Invertebrates, 7th Edition. Mc Graw Hill Inc.

Tarling, G. 2010. Biology of Northern Krill. Academic Press.

Koenemann, S. & Jenner, R.A. 2005. Crustacea & Arthropod Relationships. Taylor & Francis/CRC Press.

Ruppert, E.E., Fox, R.S., and Barnes, R.D. 2004. Invertebrate Zoology- A Functional Evolutionary Approach, 7th Edition. Thomson Brooks/Cole.

Verma, A. 2005. Invertebrates Protozoa to Echinodermata. Alpha Science International Ltd.

SQ12802 SWIMMING AND WATER SAFETY

This course focuses on swimming skills particularly for knowledge of swimming, which includes theory

and practical. Emphasis is placed on techniques on front crawl, physical warm up, floating, diving, water

immersion and other related techniques on swimming. Content of the course includes knowledge on water

safety.

Reference

Gordon, B. 2014. NCAA Men’s and Women’s Swimming and Diving Rules. The National Collegiate Athletic Association. USA


Laughlin, T. 2012. Total Immersion: The Revolutionary Way to Swim Better, Faster, and Easier. Simon & Schuster, Inc.

Shapton, L. 2012. Swimming Studies. Blue Rider Press.

Lucero, B. 2011. Strength Training for Faster Swimming. Meyer & Meyer Sport, Ltd.

McLeod, I. 2010. Swimming Anatomy. Human Kinetics.

SQ22103 HATCHERY SYSTEM, DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT

This course discusses the design and management of fish hatcheries, including the equipment and accessories

needed for their effective operation. Topics of discussion also include water supply, water storage and

distribution, water recirculation and reconditioning facilities; operation and maintenance of hatcheries; brood

stock management, spawning and seed production; handling, feeding and rearing of larvae and juveniles and

harvesting.

References

Agnihotri, S.B. 2013. Aquaculture Management and technology. Swastik Publication, Delhi.

Lekang, O-I. 2013. Aquaculture Engineering (2nd Edition, Latest). Wiley-Blackwell.


Tidwell, J.H. 2012. Aquaculture production system. John Wiley & Sons.


SQ22303 BROODSTOCK MANAGEMENT AND SEED PRODUCTION

This course discusses the broodstock management and seed production of several commercially

important aquatic organisms in Malaysia and the Southeast Asia region. Selected species are: tilapia

(Oreochromis niloticus), patin (Pangasius hypophthalmus), African catfish (Clarias gariepinus) seabass (Lates

calcarifer), groupers, tiger prawn, giant freshwater prawn, crabs, lobsters, abalones, oysters and sea cucumber.

References

Chakraborty, C. & Sadhu A.K. 2013. Biology hatchery and culture technology of tiger prawn and giant freshwater

prawn. Daya Publishing House, India.

Tidwell, J. 2012. Aquaculture Production Systems. Wiley-Blackwell.

Lucas, J.S. & Southgate P.C. 2012. Aquaculture: Farming aquatic animals and plants. Blackwell Publishing, UK

Pandian, T.J. 2011. Sex Determination in Fish. CRC Press.

Fotedar, R.K. & Philips, B.F. 2011. Recent Advances and New Species in Aquaculture. Wiley-Blackwell.

SQ22503 GROW-OUT SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT

This course will provide understanding about farming system with various system and techniques. Topics

selected for discussion include freshwater fish farming, marine fish farming, prawn farming, feedings for

aquaculture farm and products of aquaculture farms. Detail knowledge on site selection, topography, design and

construction of farm. Environmental criteria and production efficiency of aquaculture farm will be explained.

Important facilities in fish farm such as aeration system, water re-circulation and management will also be

covered in detail.

References Boyd, C.E. 2015. Aquaculture: Resource use, and the Environment. John Wiley & Sons Inc. Lucas, J. S. & Sothgate, P. 2013. Aquaculture: Farming aquatic animals and plants. Blackwell Publishing. Lekang, O-I. 2013. Aquaculture Engineering (2nd Edition, Latest). Wiley-Blackwell. Muchlisin, Z.A. 2012. Aquaculture. Intech. Tidwell, J.H. Aquaculture production system. 2012. John-Wiley & Sons, Inc.

SQ22403 NUTRITION AND FEED DEVELOPMENT

This course covers a basic understanding of nutrition, nutrient requirements of fish and use of practical diets in

aquaculture. Interdisciplinary nature of the science of nutrition, digestion, absorption, and feeding types are briefly

explained. Nutrient and en erg y requirements are covered in d etail. Next part of the course describes

principal types of artificial feed and their ingredients, preparation and processing of fresh and dry feeds, diets

formulation, chemical composition of feeds, ration size, feeding schedules, and feed calculations (feed

conversion, protein efficiency, food quotient, feed costs, etc.).

References Davis, D.A. 2015. Feed and Feeding Practices in Aquaculture. Woodhead Publishing. Pohlenz, C., Gatlin III, D.M. 2014. Interrelationship between fish nutrition and health. Aquaculture 431, 111-117. Merrifield, D. and Ringø, E. (Eds.) 2014. Aquaculture Nutrition. Gut health, probiotics and prebiotics. Wiley Blackwell. Holt, G.J., 2011. Larval fish nutrition. John Wiley & Sons Inc.


Turchini, G. Ng, W.K. & Tocher, D. 2011. Fish Oil Replacement and Alternative Lipid Sources in Aquaculture Feeds. CRC Press, USA.

SQ22203 LIVE FEED MANAGEMENT

This course will provide introductory to cultivation technique and culture of different species of aquatic

organism including plant and animal as guideline, especially species having commercial value. The course shall

also discuss the importance and technique for cultivation of life-food such as phytoplanktons, zooplanktons,

nematodes, worms, insect larvae for fish larvae feeding during the early stages of fish, crustaceans and bivalve

molussc. The course provides the theoretical and practical aspects of layout and principles of operation of

various types of livefeed production. Special emphasis is given to the technology component of these

systems. Distinguishing features of these facilities and basic principles of their operation are elaborated. Details

of design and construction (shape, size, and material), site selection (environmental criteria and facilities),

management and advantages and disadvantages of each system will be covered.

References

Perumal, S., hirunavukkarasu, A.R and achiappan, . 2015. Advances in Marine and Barckishwater Aquaculture.

Springer.

Richmond, A. & Hu, Q. 2013. Handbooks of Microalgal Culture (2nd Edition). Jogn Wiley & Sons, Ltd.

Dhont, J.,K. Dierckens, . Stottrup, G.Van Stappen, M. Willie and P.Sorgeloos. 2013. Rotifers, Artemia and

Copepods as live feeds for fish larvae in aquaculture. Woodhead Publishing Limited, UK.

Kim, S.K. 2011. Handbooks of Marine Microalgae: Biotechnology and Phycology. John Wiley & Sons Inc.

Likens, G.E. 2010. Planktons of Inland Waters: A Derivative of Encyclopedia of Inland Waters. Academic

Press/Elsevier.

SQ22603 ORNAMENTAL CULTURE

This course is designed to provide knowledge on the culture of selected ornamental organism with emphasis on

broodstock management, larval rearing, food and nutrition, health and disease management, and the use of

biotechnological tool in improving the quality of the ornamental organism. Seed production of the selected

ornamental organisms is also part of the course content. Other topic on aquarium design and aquascaping is

also included.

References

Huntingford, F., Jobling, M. & Kadri, S. 2012. Aquaculture and Behavior. Wiley-Blackwell.

Ploeg, A. Fossa, S.A. Bassleer, G. 2012. Iinternational transport of live fish in the ornamental aquatic industry (second revised and expanded edition 2012). Ornamental Fish International.

Andrews, B. 2011. Ornamental fish farming. BRIAN ANDREWS


Roberts, H.E. 2010. Fundamentals of ornamental fish health. John Wiley and Sons Ltd.

SQ22802 SHARED FARMING I & SQ32702 SHARED FARMING II

This is a practical course. It is unique because there is no formal lecture, but the student will be involved

directly in fish farming operation. The assessment of the course will be based on the student performance and

their capability to handle, manage and produce product. Start from the 2nd semester, 1st year, the student will

be given responsibility based on their level of knowledge and when they proceed to the next semester, the

responsibility will be changed qualitatively. It is to ensure that the farming is done based on a shared

responsibility, however, each of the student have to know the whole aquaculture farming operational process.

The university will provide infrastructure while the student is expected to produce high quality products through

an effective cost and management from the procurement of seed, rearing of the seed to a marketable size and

finally the market their end product.

SQ32103 SEAWEED CULTURE

This course aims to introduce economically important seaweed species and their biology; to highlight the

abundance of seaweed species in Malaysia and its potentials; to teach some basic culture techniques, and

an understanding of the challenges and problems in the seaweed industry. Lectures will focus on the

fundamentals of phycology and introduction of varieties of economically important seaweed species that are

being cultivated around the world. An in-depth preview of seaweed diversity in Malaysia with emphasis on the

availability of seaweed resources as a lucrative seaweed-based industry will be given. Selected topics on

seaweed variety, distribution and the biological features of local seaweeds; seaweed culture practices and state-

of-the-art protoplast generation techniques; harvesting, seaweed diseases and post-harvest practices;

extraction of commercially important carrageenan and the problems faced in this industry will be discussed.


References Chakraborty, S & Santra, S.C. 2012. Biochemical and Enzymatic Analysis of Marine Benthic Macroalgae: Nutrient Composition, Pigments and Enzyme Activity of Marine Benthic Marcoalgae of Sunderban Mangrove Ecosystem, India. LAP LAMBERT Academic Publishing. 180 p. McConnaughey, E. 2012. Sea Vegetables, Harvesting Guide. Naturegraph Publishers, Inc. 242 p. Mouritsen, G.O. 2013. Seaweeds: Edible, Available and Sustainable. University of Chicago Press. 304 p. Wiencke, C & Bischof, K. 2012. Seaweed Biology: Novel Insights into Ecophysiology, Ecology and Utilization (Ecological Studies). John Wiely & Son, Ltd. 592 p Kim, S.K. 2011. The Handbook of Macroalgae: Biotechnology and Applied Phycology. John Wiely & Son, Ltd.

SQ32303 CRUSTACEAN CULTURE

This course provides comprehensive coverage on several aquaculture economically important crustacean

species including marine shrimp, freshwater prawn and mangrove crab. Topics cover for discussion and

practical training are the biology and identification of aquaculture crustacean species, crustacean aquaculture

management and methods, environmental requirements for aquaculture of crustacean, breeding and seed

production of crustacean in hatchery, nursery and grow-out system, health care and disease, nutrition, and

elements of sustainable culture management.

References

Philips, B.F. 2013. Lobsters: Biology, Management, Aquaculture and Fisheries (2nd Edition). Wiley-Blackwell.

Cahyono, B. 2011. Buku Terlengkap Budidaya Udang Laut. Pustaka Mina.


Quinitio, E.T and Parado-Estepa, F.D. 2008. Biology and hatchery of mud crabs Scylla spp. Aquaculture Extension Manual no. 34. Southeast Asian Fisheries Development Center, Philippines.

Alday-Sanz, V. 2010. The shrimp book. Nottingham University Press.

SQ32503 FISH HEALTH AND DISEASES

This course discusses the types of common diseases that affects the aquaculture animals, including fish and

shrimp. It focuses on non-infectious diseases (environmental, nutritional and genetic) and infectious

diseases caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi and parasites. It describes the clinical signs of each disease, mode

of infection and life cycle of the pathogen. It covers prevention and treatment options that are required for a

holistic fish health and disease management.

References Gudding, R., Lillehaug, A. & Evensen, O. (2014). Fish Vaccination. Wiley-Blackwell Publishing Patrick T.K. Woo & Buchmann, K. 2012. Fish Parasites: Pathobiology & Protection. CABI. Woo, P.T.K. & Bruno, D.W. (2011). Fish Disease and Disorders: Volume 3: Viral, Bacterial and Fungal Infections (2

nd edition). CAB International, Massachusetts, USA.

Noga, E.J. 2010. Fish disease: Diagnose and Treatment (Second edition). Wiley-Blackwell Publishing. Plumb, J.A. & Hanson, L.A. (2010). Health Maintenance and Principal Microbial Diseases of Cultured Fishes. Wiley-Blackwell Publishing.

SQ30103 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT l AND SQ30206 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II

This course is a research exercise where students select and conduct a short-term research project under the

supervision of an academic staff. Students will be presenting their pr oject proposal and research result in

the form of a seminar presentation. Students must submit a research report in the form of a thesis for

examination, and defend their research outcome in a viva voce session. Students together with their research

supervisor are encouraged to submit their research findings for publication

SQ32403 GENETICS OF AQUACULTURE ANIMALS

Discussion of the importance of breeding and genetic selection in knowledge-based aquaculture development.

Major topics include genetic principles, genetic material of cells, phenotypes and genotypes, autosomal and

sex-linked genes, genetic diversity, application of biotechnology and genetic concepts in aquaculture,

development and maturation of gametes, broodstock management, egg quality, breeding cycle, induced

breeding, inbreeding problems, and hybridization.

References


Fletcher, G.L. & Rise, M.L. 2012. Aquaculture Biotechnology. Wiley-Blackwell.

Gomelsky, B. 2011. Fish Genetics: Theory and Practice. VDM Verlag Dr. Muller, Saarbuken, Germany.

Dunham, R.A. 2011. Aquaculture and Fisheries Biotechnology: Genetic Approaches (2nd Edition, Latest).

CABI, UK.

Siraj, S.S. 2011. Genetic Manipulation in Farmed Fish: Enhanced Aquaculture Production. Penerbit Universiti

Putra Malaysia.


SQ32603 IMMUNOLOGY OF AQUACULTURE ANIMALS

This course is designed to focus on basic and applied knowledge on immune system of aquatic animals. This will

include on the composition, function and regulation of the immune system of aquatic animals. It will provide on

the basic understanding of immunology and its benefit for aquatic animals health, as the cost of infectious to

aquaculture can be great, making failure of immunity a major risk for commercial fish farming. Students will

have the chance to acquire knowledge in basic immunology laboratory tools and methods for the

characterization of the immune response in aquatic animals.

References

1Secombes, C.J. and Ellis, A.E. (2012) The Immunology of Teleosts, in Fish Pathology, Fourth Edition (ed R. J.

Roberts), Wiley-Blackwell, Oxford, UK.

Patrick T.K. Woo & Buchmann, K. 2012. Fish Parasites: Pathobiology & Protection. CABI.

Montet, D. & Ray, R.C. c2009-c2011. Aquaculture Microbiology and Biotechnology (Vol 2). Science Publishers.

Zaccone, Z., Meseguer, J., Gracia-Ayala, A. and Kapoor, B.G (eds.). 2009. Fish Defenses Vol. 1: Immunology

(Teleostean Fish Biology: A Comprehensive Examination of Major Taxa). Science Publishers.

Scaree, A.D., Lee, C.S. & O’Bryen, P.J. 2008. Aquaculture Biosecurity: Prevention, Control, and Eradication of

Aquatic Animal Disease. Blackwell Publishing.

SQ42303 FISH POST-HARVEST AND PROCESSING

The course is designed to introduce the need for post-harvest handling of fish/aquaculture products; to highlight

parameters that contribute to the food spoilage and devaluation of food products; and to emphasize proper

measures that need to be taken to avoid food spoilage. Post harvest handling and processing of fish, with

emphasis to aquaculture products will be discussed in this course. Basic concepts pertaining to moisture, water

activity and spoilage will be given weight. Main topics will be factors contributing to food spoilage, damage

control, salting, dehydration, antibiotic treatment, deep-freezing, cold and heat sterilization, canning and quality

control. Basic principles on the bacterial and fungal activities on the food and principles of controlling them will

be taught. On the whole, this course will delve upon the processes and utilization of marine food resources via

scientific methods

References

Balachandran, K.K. 2013. Post-Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish Products. Daya Pub. House.

Boziaris, I.S. Seafood Processing: Technology, Quality and Safety. 2013. John Wiley & Sons Inc.

Hall, G.M. 2011. Fish Processing: Sustainability and New Opportunities. Blackwell Pub..

Bratt, L. 2010. Fish Canning Handbook. Blackwell Pub.

Shumway, S.E. & Rodrick, G.E. 2009. Shellfish Safety and Quality. Woodhead.

SQ42503 FISHERIES STOCK ENHANCEMENT AND SEA RANCHING

This course is designed to include discussion of concepts, objectives, methods and practices of stock

enhancement and sea ranching. Topics that will receive special attention are: responsible and effective stock

enhancement strategies, modern approaches to restoring depleted marine fish populations and augmenting

fisheries production, determining the role of habitat improvement and artificial habitat structures in

population enhancement, and measuring effectiveness of sea ranching as a tool of sustainable fisheries

management. Constraints and opportunities for different types of sea ranching and methods of economic

evaluation for different species of marine animals will also be elaborated.

References

Mustafa, S., Shapawi, R. 2015. Aquaculture Ecosystem: Adaptability and Sustainability. Wiley Blackwell.

Tyus, H. M. 2012. Ecology and Conservation of Fishes. CRC Press.


Hunter, W. 2011. Fisheries Management and Conservation. Apple Academic Press.

He, P. G. 2010. Behavior of Marine Fishes: Capture Processes and Conservation Challenges. Wiley-Blackwell.

SQ40208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

This course aims to provide students hand-on experience before completing their undergraduates study. The

student shall be placed in aquaculture related industry or research area for at least 10 weeks training.

During the industrial training, student will be led by field supervisor from industry that is accredited by University

together with lecturer. Student has to do a mini project related to aquaculture during their training with the

industry. This mini project provides an opportunity for the student to implement all theories and practical

related to aquaculture that has been learned in the university during their training. It also trained disciplined

students in time management case, evaluate matters crisis, made decision and constructed mental maturity.

Performance of student will be evaluated through practical training, mini projects and written reports.

MARINE SCIENCE PROGRAMME (HS40)


SL10403 BASIC NAVIGATION AND SEAMANSHIP

The aim of this course is to provide basic skills that would put the students at the Able-bodied Seaman Level of

training and will prepare them to work safely and efficiently onboard research vessels and at sea. The course

exposes the students to the theory and practice of basic navigation and seamanship required of a

knowledgeable seaman. It is divided into 4 parts, I: Ship Knowledge and Safety; II: Seamanship, III: Ship

Organization; and IV: Ship Handling and Basic Navigation. The topics covered in these parts include type and

built of ships and boats, fire fighting and safety of life at sea (SOLAS) procedures, various knots and rope

works, anchors and cables, basic ship organization, marine communication, ship maintenance and ship

supervision practices, steering, navigating, and basic piloting, and International Navigation Laws. Students

will be sailing onboard the research vessel UMS STENELLA and learn to use marine electronic (e.g. GPS,

Echo-Sounder, Raster Scan Radar, Auto-Pilot, VHF & SSB Radio) and mechanical (e.g. Hydraulic A-Frame &

Anchor Winch) equipment. At the end of the course, the student will have gained the basic knowledge and

skills to work safely and efficiently onboard research vessels and at sea.

References

Hobbs, R. R. (1990). Marine navigation: piloting and celestial and electronic navigation (3rd. Ed). Naval

Institute Press, Annapolis, Maryland.

House, D. J. (2013). Seamanship Techniques: Shipboard and Marine Operations. Butterworth-Heinemann

(Elsevier), Oxford, U.K.

Kapten Ahmad Idris. (1982). Panduan Asas Pelaut. Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Noor Zukhi Harun, Muhammad Razin Abdullah & Yacob Ismail. (1995). Manual Admiralti Ilmu Kepelautan (Jilid

1). Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Wan Ahmad Wan Omar & Zainal Ashirin Shahardin. (1992). Prinsip dan Amalan Ilmu Pelayaran. Dewan Bahasa

& Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Worster, W. T. 2010. United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea: S.T.S. No. 1982/MULT/SEA. Uitgeverij Nieuwe Rijn. U.S.A

SL10503 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY

This course offers an introduction to physical processes in the ocean, an important part of the global climate

system. The elementary knowledge of the water masses, circulation, currents, eddies, tides, waves and

turbulence will be introduced. The observational basis, fundamental concepts and models required for

describing and understanding the range of phenomena such as El Nino, which directly affect the nature and

behaviour of the atmosphere and ocean would also be described.

References

Brown, J., Colling, A., Park, D., Phillips, J., Rothery, D, and Wright, J., 1997. Waves, Tides and Shallow-Water Processes.

The Open University, UK.

Harold V. Thurman & Alan P. Trujillo, 2004. Introductory Oceanography, 10th Edition,

Prantice Hall. Pickard, G. and Emery, W., 1990. Descriptive Physical Oceanography.

Butterworth Heinamann Robert

H. Stewart, 2004. Introduction to Physical Oceanography, Texas A&M University, USA.

Tom Garrison, 2005. Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science, 5th Edition, Thomson Publishers

SL10703 BIOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 1: FLORA

This course is aimed at providing students with an introduction to the autotrophic component of the marine biota,

principally the diversity, biology and ecology of marine flora. The course content encompasses ecological factors

which affect life in the ocean, taxonomic classification and ecology of micro- and macro-algae, seagrasses and

mangrove trees and the significance of these marine flora on the marine ecosystem.

References

Castro, P., and Huber, M.E. (2015). Marine Biology. Fourth ed. McGraw-Hill, New York. Garrison, T. S. (2015).

Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science. 9th ed. Thomson Brooks/Cole, California.

Miller, C. B. and Wheeler, P. (2012) Biological Oceanography. 2nd Edition Wiley-Blackwell, Chichester, UK.

Morrissey,J.,Sumich,J.L.,Pinkard-Meier,D.R.(2016). An introduction to the biology of marine life. Jones & Bartlett

Learning. 11th edition.

SL10803 BIOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 2: FAUNA

This course covers the fundamental aspects of biological oceanography with emphasis on biology and ecology

of marine fauna. Almost all groups, ranging from the smallest form to the mega size marine fauna found around

the world are in the course modules to highlight diversity, evolutionary relationships, classification, habitat

preference as well as biotic and abiotic factors influence the population.


References

Garrison, T. S. (2007). Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science. Thomson Brooks/Cole, California.

Witherington, B. (2006). Sea Turtles: an extraordinary natural history of some uncommon turtles. Voyageur Press. USA

Thurman, H.V., and Trujillo, A.P. (2004). Introductory Oceanography. Tenth ed. Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Castro, P., and Huber, M.E. (2003). Marine Biology. Fourth ed. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Stiassny, M.L.J., Parenti, L.R., and Johnson, G.D. (eds). (1996). Interrelationships of fishes. Academic Press, San

Diego. Sumich, J.L. (1996). An Introduction to the Biology of Marine Life. Wm.C. Brown Publishers, Dubuque,

Iowa.

SL10902 SWIMMING AND WATER SAFETY

This course focuses on swimming skills particularly for knowledge of swimming, which includes theory

and practical. Emphasis is placed on techniques on front crawl, physical warm up, floating, diving, water

immersion and other related techniques on swimming. Content of the course includes knowledge on water

safety.

References

Gordon, B. (2014). NCAA Men’s and Women’s Swimming and Diving Rules. The National Collegiate Athletic Association. USA

Laughlin, T. (2012) Total Immersion: The Revolutionary Way to Swim Better, Faster, and Easier. Simon & Schuster, Inc.

Shapton, L. (2012) Swimming Studies. Blue Rider Press.

Lucero, B. (2011) Strength Training for Faster Swimming. Meyer & Meyer Sport, Ltd

McLeod, I. (2010) Swimming Anatomy. Human Kinetics. .

SL20303 MARINE ECOSYSTEM

This course will be discussing the basic attributes of marine ecosystems. Some of the topics emphasized are

the diversity of marine life, adaptations, community structure, niche segregations and the importance of

marine ecosystems. Physical and chemical factors affecting the dynamics of tropical marine ecosystems will

also be discussed. Marine habitats selected for special emphasis include mangrove forests, seagrass beds and

coral reefs.

References

Millero, F.J. (2013) Chemical Oceanography. CRC Press.

Parsons, T.R., Maita, Y., and Lalli, C.M. (1984) A Manual of Chemical and Biological Methods for Seawater Analysis. Pergamon Press. Great Britain.

Michael E.Q. Pilson. 2012) Introduction to the chemistry of the sea. Second edition. Cambridge University Press.

Williams, R.G and Fellows, M.J 2011 Ocean Dynamics and the Carbon Cycle: Principles and Mechanisms: Cambridge University Press

SL20603 CORAL REEF ECOLOGY

This course will discuss aspects related to the ecology of coral reefs. Emphasis is placed on coral

community structure, classification and distribution worldwide, and more specifically in Malaysia. Factors

affecting and threatening the ecology of corals reefs will also be discussed. Students will also be exposed to

the importance of conservation as well as aspects of management and rehabilitation of coral reefs.

References

Goffredo, S. and Dubinsky, Z. (2016) The Cnidaria, Past, Present and Future. Springer International Publishing

Switzerland.

Kelley, R. (2009) Indo Pacific Coral Finder. BYO Guides.

Birkeland, C.(Ed) (2015) Coral Reefs in the Anthropocene. Springer Dordrecht Heidelberg. .

Dubinsky, Z. and Stambler, N. (Eds) (2010) Coral Reefs: An Ecosystem in Transition. Springer-Verlag Berlin

Heidelberg.

Sheppard, C. R. C., Davy, S. K. and Pilling, G. M. (2009) The Biology of Coral Reefs. Oxford UniversityPress,UK

SL20703 MARICULTURE

This course discusses principles and technologies applied to the culture of commercially important marine

organisms such as fish, shellfish and seaweeds. History, basic components of mariculture systems, survey of

species and systems available locally are elaborated. The principles of water quality and disease prevention will

also be emphasized for their importance in the success of mariculture systems worldwide. Mariculture business

concepts are briefly introduced with an understanding of knowledge gained through visits to hatcheries and

farms.


References

Agnihotri, S.B. (2013) Aquaculture Management and technology. Swastik Publication, Delhi.

Lekang, O-I. (2013) Aquaculture Engineering (2nd Edition). Wiley-Blackwell.

Lucas, J.S. & Southgate P.C. (2012) Aquaculture: Farming aquatic animals and plants. Blackwell Publishing, UK

Parker, R.O. (2012) Aquaculture Science (3rd Edition). Delmar Cengage Learning.

Tidwell, J. (2012) Aquaculture Production Systems. Wiley-Blackwell.

SL20903 CHEMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY

This course provides a basic knowledge of chemical oceanography comprising chemical composition, mixing

processes and energy flow. Aspects of physical and chemical characteristics of seawater, major chemical

components and trace elements, dissolved gasses, nutrients and their importance, as well as the carbon

cycle in the sea are also explained. Students will be exposed to techniques in measuring chemical water

properties in practical lab and field work.

References

Millero, F.J. (2013) Chemical Oceanography. CRC Press.

Parsons, T.R., Maita, Y., and Lalli, C.M. (1984) A Manual of Chemical and Biological Methods for Seawater Analysis. Pergamon Press. Great Britain.

Michael E.Q. Pilson. 2012) Introduction to the chemistry of the sea. Second edition. Cambridge University Press.

Williams, R.G and Fellows, M.J 2011 Ocean Dynamics and the Carbon Cycle: Principles and Mechanisms: Cambridge University Press.

SL21203 METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATE CHANGE

Meteorology is the study of the atmosphere’s motion and other phenomena to aid in forecasting weather and

explaining the processes involved. It presents information about the science of the atmosphere and its effects

on the surface of the Earth and on life in general. The course outlines include the history, structure and dynamics

of the atmosphere including fronts and frontal weather; observational methods; storms; temporal changes in

climate. By the end of this course, students should have a good knowledge about weather and climate that will

broaden their scope of knowledge in the geosciences. An accu- rate appreciation of weather signs and

prognostics, the ability to read and understand meteorological instruments and the understanding of weather

reports and charts are necessary knowledge in marine science and fisheries activities.

References

Than Hung, Sidik, Saleh and Hussein. (2013) Atmosphere and Ocean: An introduction to marine science. Penerbit University of Malaysia Sabah, Kota Kinablau Sabah, Malaysia.

Danielson, E. W. (2003) Meteorology. 2nd Ed. Boston, McGraw-Hill.

Ahrens, C. D. (2007) Meteorology Today: An Introduction to Weather, Climate and Environment. 8th Ed. Thompson Higher Education, USA.

Ahrens, C.D. (2001) Essentials of Meteorology. 3rdEd. Pacific Grove, CA.

SL21403 FISHERIES SCIENCE AND MANAGEMENT

This course is intended to provide students with the knowledge and tools for studying wild fish stocks. Emphasis

is given on tropical coastal fisheries resources. Topics include a briefing on the current status of the fishing

industry of Malaysia, fishing gears and techniques, the effects of fishing on the marine ecosystem, aspects of

fish ecology, and fisheries concepts and economics. Students will also be taught how to estimate management

indicators of a fishery. Approaches in the assessment of exploited population stocks include recent advances in

catch and effort data analyses, whilst perspectives on management concepts include precautionary principle

and ecosystem approach.

References

Morais, P. & Daverat, F. (eds.) (2016) An Introduction to Fish Migration. CRC Press.

Kruse, G.H., An, H.-C., DiCosimo, J., Eischens, C.A., Gislason, G.S., McBride, D.N., Rose, C.S. & Siddon, C.E. (eds.) (2015) Fisheries Bycatch: Global Issues and Creative Solutions. Sea Grant Alaska.

Pandian, T.J. (2014) Environmental Sex Differentiation in Fish. CRC Press.

Sass, G.C. & Allen. M.S. (2014) Foundations of Fisheries Science. American Fisheries Society.

Almeida, E.A. d & Ribeiro, C.A.d. (eds.) (2013) Pollution and Fish Health in Tropical Ecosystems. CRC Press.

SL30303 MARINE POLLUTION

This course provides a basic understanding of marine pollution, the types and the sources of pollution in the

coastal area as well as in open seas. The impact of pollution on marine organisms and ecosystem are also

explained. Emphasis will be given on implications of marine pollution on society, and methods of monitoring and

controlling pollution.


References

Weis, J.S. (2015) Marine Pollution. What everyone needs to know. Oxford University Press. USA

Hester, R.E. and Harrison, R.M. (2011) Marine Pollution and Human Health. RSC Publishing, UK

Hofer, T.N. (2008) Marine Pollution: New Research. Nova Science Publi. USA

Clark, R.B, Frid, C. and Attrill, M. (2005) Marine Pollution. 5thEdition. The Bath Press. Bath. Great Britain.

Preston, M.R. (1989) Marine Pollution. In. Chemical Oceanography. J.P. Riley (ed.) Academic Press.

London.

SL30503 COASTAL PROCESSES

This course seeks to develop the students’ understanding of coastal and estuarine processes. The basic

concepts of wave mechanics, hydrodynamics, sediment transport, beach profile changes, tidal

hydrodynamics and estuarine processes, coastal structure, and shoreline management will be covered in the

discussion. Skills of applying theoretical knowledge for solving real world problems will be developed through

field observations and other forms of practical exercises. Although the course outline is generally descriptive,

the importance of analytical thinking will be explained for an interactive learning experience and motivation to

use knowledge to address the problems of the coastal zone.

References

Johnson, M. and Bayley, A. (2016) Coastal Change, Ocean Conservation and Resilient Communities. Springer.

Dyke, P. (2016) Modeling Coastal and Marine Processes: 2nd Edition. Imperial college Press.

Aubrey, D.G. and Weishar, L. (2013) Hydrodynamics and Sediment Dynamics of Tidal Inlets (Coastal and

Estuarine Studies). Springer Science Media, LLC. New York.

Dominic Reeve and Andrew Chadwick (2012) Coastal Engineering: Processes, Theory and Design Practice.

CRC Press. Boca Raton.

Alan, P.T. andThurman, H.V. (2010) Essentials of Oceanography 10th Edition. Pearson Prentice Hall, Upper

Saddle River.

Garrison, T. S. (2015) Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science. Thomson Brooks/Cole. Belmont

SL30903 MARINE ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

This course will cover topics in marine organic chemistry encompassing the various chemical states, processes

and changes that occur in seawater and sediment. Carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur and phosphorus cycles will

be correlated with natural processes in the marine ecosystem. Besides, production, degradation and diagenesis

of organic matter will be explained. Other aspects such as chemistry of sediments, origin of petroleum and

chemistry of marine natural products will also be discussed.

References

Luis M . Botana. (2014) Seafood and Freshwater Toxins Pharmacology, Physiology, and Detection, Third

Edition. CRC Press

Jianming. Xu, Jianjun. Wu, Yan. He (2013) Functions of natural organic matter in changing environment.

Conference proceedings. eBook

Ramawat, K.G, and M rillon, J-M. (2013) Natural Products: Phytochemistry, Botany and Metabolism of

Alkaloids, Phenolics and Terpenes. Springer link

Fattorusso, E., Gerwick, W.H. and Taglialatela-Scafati, O. (2012) Handbook of marine natural products. eBook.

Amazon.com.

Weimin Zhao (ed.) (2011) Introduction to Natural Products Chemistry. CRC Press.

SL31003 COASTAL MODELING

The main objective of this course is to develop skills for modelling coastal area so that reliable quantitative

predictions can be made based on defined environmental forces and human interactions. This course will

explore a number of software that can present field data into map, produce, simulate and predict models. Among

the common software are surfer, Delt3D and, ArcView. Students will experience data acquisition and analysis

using remote sensing and global information system (GIS) techniques. Some established models on wave

hindcasts, circulation, and wave propagation sediment transport and water quality will also be discussed

References

Anders Omstedt (2016) Guide to Process Based Modeling of Lakes and Coastal Seas (2nd ed). Springer.

New York.

Deltares (2014) Delft3D-Flow: Simulation of multi-dimensional hydrodynamics flows and transport phenomena,

including sediments. User manual. Deltares.

DHI, (2014) MIKE 21 & MIKE 3 Flow Model FM: Hydrodynamic Module Step by step training guide.

Dyke, P. (2016) Modeling Coastal and Marine Processes (2nd ed). Imperial college Press.

Garrison, T. S. (2015) Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science. Thomson Brooks/Cole. Belmont.

Golden Software, Inc. (2014) Surfer User’s Guide: powerful contouring, gridding and surface mapping.


Golden Software.

Aubrey, D.G. and Weishar, L. (2013) Hydrodynamics and Sediment Dynamics of Tidal Inlets (Coastal and

Estuarine Studies). Springer Science+ Media, LLC. New York

SL31103 ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS AND ETHICS

This course provides students an understanding of the importance and roles of laws and regulations in the

sustainable use and conservation of natural marine resources and the need to maintain environmental standards

based on current practices and scientific knowledge. This is followed by discussion on the ethics in

exploitation and conservation of resources for development and modernisation. The teaching module includes

visit to external organisation(s) to learn the actual implementation of relevant laws by enforcement agencies, to

complement classroom activities.

References

Boylan.M. (ed.) (2015) Environmental Ethics (2nd Edition). Wiley-Blackwell.

Rayfuse, R. (ed.) (2015) Research Handbook on International Marine Environmental Law. Edward Elgar Publishing.

Doelle, M. & Tollefson, C. (2013) Environmental Law: Cases and Materials (2nd Edition). Carswell.

Curry, P. (2011) Ecological Ethics (2nd Edition). John Wiley & Sons. Inc.

Sarkar, S. (2012) Environmental Philosophy: From Theory to Practice. Wiley-Blackwell.

SL31203 BIOLOGY OF MARINE MAMMALS

This course covers several biological aspects of marine mammals, from evolution to current conservation issues.

The course focuses on how the three major taxonomic groups of marine mammal, including Cetaceans,

Sirenians and Carnivora have adapted to life in the marine environment. It will enable students to acquire

knowledge in current marine mammal biology and ecology, and basic skills in marine mammal observations in

their natural environment. The specific topic s in the course comprise taxonomy, evolution, functional

morphology, anatomy, physiology, foraging behaviour, mating strategies, reproduction, distribution, and

threats to the populations. This course also includes discussion of procedures to monitor inshore Cetacean

populations from a vessel, current issues of marine mammal interactions with human, prospect in ecotourism, and

several conservation management efforts conducted around the world and in Malaysia.

References

Aragones, L. V., Jefferson, T. A. and H. Marsh. 1997. Marine mammal survey techniques applicable in developing countries.

Asian Marine Biology, 14: 15-39.

Jaaman, S. A. 2004. A Review of Current Knowledge on Marine Mammals in Malaysia and Adjacent Waters.

ASEAN Review of Biodiversity and Environmental Conservation (ARBEC) Online Journal, September 2004.

[Available at: http://www.arbec.com.my/marinemammal].

Jaaman, S. A. and Y. U. Lah-Anyi. 2003. Dugongs (Dugong dugon Muller, 1776) in East Malaysian Waters. ASEAN Review of Biodiversity and Environmental Conservation (ARBEC) Online Journal, October 2003. [Available at: http://www.arbec.com.my/dugongs]. Jefferson, T. A., S. Leatherwood, and M. A. Webber. 1993. FAO species identification guide: Marine Mammals of The World. FAO, Rome.

Perrin, W. F., Donovan, G. P. and J. Barlow (eds.). 1994. Gillnets and Cetaceans. Reports of the

International Whaling Commission, 46.

SL31403 MARINE BIOTECHNOLOGY

This course contains topics that emphasize the role of marine biotechnology in utilization of living marine

organisms or their products for environmental management and welfare of the society. Discussion will include

molecular techniques and their application for conservation of natural marine populations and sustainable

development of marine resources, new horizons of aquaculture biotechnology, marine natural products and their

biomedical uses, seafood biotechnology, biofuel from algae and bioremediation among other topics.

References

Babiuk, L.A., Philips, J.P., and Moo Young, M. (eds.) 1989. Animal Biotechnology Pergamon Press Ltd., Oxford

Backer, E.W. 1994. Microalgae: biotechnology and microbiology. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Bhojwani, S.S. (ed.) 1990. Plant Tissue Culture: application and limitations. Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Baker, K.H. 1994. Bioremediation. McGraw-Hill, New York

Liu, Z. 2007. Aquaculture Genome Technologies. Blackwell Publ. Ames Lowa.

Moses, V., and Moses, S., (1995). Exploiting biotechnology. Australia: Harwood Academic Pub.

Murray, J.A.H. (ed.) 1992. Transgenesis. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York

Tzotzos, G.T. (ed.) 1995. Genetically Modified Organisms: a guide to biosafety. CAB International. Stanbury,

P.F., and Whitaker, A. 1984. Principles of Fermentation Technology. Pergamon Press Ltd., Oxford

http://www.arbec.com.my/marinemammal

http://www.arbec.com.my/dugongs


SL34203 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT I

This course concerns theoretical aspects of the scientific approach of carrying out research projects. It

covers literature review, project proposal preparation and presentation, and writing of a scientific report

consistent with the standard requirements for such work.

References

Fakulti Sains dan Sumber Alam (2014). Panduan penulisan disertasi edisi ke 5. Universiti Malaysia Sabah

SL40106 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II

This course concerns the practical aspects of scientific research. It involves execution of the research plans that

have been developed and evaluated in Scientific Project I (SL34203). The students will undertake an

independent lab and/or field work on the approved thesis topic in consultation with his/her supervisor/adviser.

The results will be subsequently analyzed, discussed and combined with the previous report (SL34203), and

finally presented as a dissertation.

References

Fakulti Sains dan Sumber Alam (2014). Panduan penulisan disertasi edisi ke 5. Universiti Malaysia Sabah

SL40303 INTEGRATED COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT

This course exposes the students to the concept, approach and tools of coastal zone management in

showing the implica-tions on the marine environment if planning and development is not integrated.

Numerous case studies on the management and impacts of activities on the coastal zone will be highlighted

and discussed.

References

Brown, B.E. 1997. Integrated Coastal Zone Management: South Asia. Dept. Marine Science Coastal Management.

University of Newcastle Upon Tyne, U.K.

Burke, L., Selig, E. and Spalding, M. 2002. Reef at Risk in Southeast Asia. A publication of the World Resources

Institute in collaboration with the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP), World Conservation

Monitoring Centre (WCMC), the World Fish Center (ICLARM), and the International Coral Reef Action

Network (ICRAN), Washington D.C, USA.

Harvey, N. and Caton, B. 2003. Coastal Management in Australia. Oxford University Press. Australia.

KrishnamurthyR. R; Bruce C. Glavovic; Andreas Kannen; David R. Green; AL. Ramanathan; Zengcui Han;

Stefano Tinti and Tundi Agardy (Eds), 2008, Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM), Research

Publishing Services, USA.

SL40503 BIOLOGY OF MARINE REPTILES

This course looks into the biology and ecology of marine reptiles, with special attention given to sea turtles,

crocodiles and sea snakes. Topics covered include taxonomy, growth dynamics, sex determination,

reproduction, natural habitats, and co-existence with humans.

References

Dutton, P.H, Squires, D. and Ahmed, M. (2011). Conservation of Pacific Sea Turtles. University of Hawai’i Press,

Honolulu, U.S.A

Gopalakrishnakone, P. (1994). Sea Snake Toxinology. Singapore University Press, Singapore. Heatwole, H.

(1999). Sea Ssnakes. UNSW Press, New South Wales, Australia.

Lutz, P. and J. A. Musick. (1997). The Biology of Sea Turtles. CRC Press, Boca Raton, USA.

Lutz, P., J. A. Musick, and J. Wyneken. (2003). The Biology of Sea Turtles. Vol II. CRC Press, Boca Raton, USA.

Webb, G.J. W. and S.C. Manolis. (1989). Crocodiles of Australia. Reed Books Pty Ltd., New South Wales, Australia.

Witherington, B. (2006). Sea Turtles: an extraordinary natural history of some uncommon turtles. Voyageur Press. USA.

SL40208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

This course aims to provide students hands-on experience before completing their undergraduate study. They

are placed in marine science- related industries or institutions for 10 weeks of exposure and training. During this

attachment program, the students are assigned a supervisor from the host company/institution to facilitate the

implementation of their work protocol. This training provides an opportunity to students to implement knowledge

that has been learned in the university during their training. Performance of students is evaluated through

practical training, mini projects and written report.

SL40703 SEAFOOD SECURITY

This course introduces seafood security as a concept whereby human populations will have access to


sufficient quantities of seafood which is nutritious while safe to consume. Seafood production systems are

discussed. The threats to seafood security caused by natural phenomena and human actions are elaborated.

Issues, constraints and strategies related to seafood security are presented. The ecological paradigm in

seafood security is explained.

References

Granata, L.A., Flick, G.J. & Martin, R.E. (2012). The Seafood Industry: Species, Products, Processing, and Safety. Wiley-Blackwell, Oxford.

OECD (2013). Global Food Security: Challenges for the Food and Agricultural Systems. OECD, USA.

Saleem, M. (2015). The Ecological Paradigm in Seafood Security. Penerbit Universiti Malaysia Sabah, Kota

Kinabalu. Saleem, M. & Rossita, S. (2015). Aquaculture Ecosystems: Adaptability and Sustainability. Wiley-

Blackwell, Oxford.

SL40903 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS OF MARINE RESOURCES

This course is structured to focus attention on economics of marine resources. Topics selected for

discussion broadly include: economics of ocean resources, link between environment and the resource

economics, international treaties, conventions and conflicts related to economic interests in marine resources,

factors affecting marine economics, methods of valuation of marine resources and strategies for developing blue

economy for sustainable socio-economic benefits. Roles and responsibilities for ocean stewardship will also be

explained in detail.

References

Millennium Ecosystem Assessment (2005). Ecosystems and Human Wellbeing. Island Press, Washington, D.C.

Kolstad, C.D. (2010). Environmental Economics. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Saleem, M. (2011). Green World Order: Delaying the Doom in a Changing Climate. LAP, Koln.

SL41103 MEIOBENTOLOGI

This course is an extension of marine biology (fauna) that specially focused on the meiofauna groups that

includes the diversity, ecological and biological aspects. It explores their ecological roles of meiofauna in marine

ecosystem together with their potential usage as tool for biomonitoring.

References

Castro, P., and Huber, M.E. (2003). Marine Biology. Fourth ed. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Cruzado, A. (2012). Marine Ecosystems. InTech, Croatria.

Garrison, T. S. (2007). Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science. ThomsonBrooks/Cole, California. Giere,

O. (2009). Meiobenthology. Springer-Verlag Berlin, Heidelberg

Pechenik, J.A. (2004). Biology of the Invertebrates: 5th (fifth) Edition. McGraw Hill.

BIOTECHNOLOGY PROGRAMME (HG07)

SY12103 BASIC BIOTECHNOLOGY

The course is a general introduction to biotechnology. Definition of biotechnology will be explained before

ancient, classical and modern biotechnology is discussed. It describe on the nature of biotechnology that

involved multidiscipline, but main focus is given on the roles of molecular biology in understanding the biological

processes at the cellular level and the exploitation of animal cell, microorganisms and plant for the purpose of

agriculture, medical and health.

References

Sharma, J., Soni, M. and Pathak, A. (2015). Basic Tools and Techniques in Biotechnology. Saarbrücken: Omniscriptum Gmbh & Company Kg.

Bansal, M. P. (2013). Molecular Biology and Biotechnology: Basic Experimental Protocol. New Delhi: TERI.

Karp, G. (2013). Cell and Molecular Biology: Concept and Experiments. 7th Ed. Wiley and Sons Ltd.

Reinhard, R. (2008). Biotechnology for Beginners. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg.

Smith, J. E. (2009). Biotechnology. Cambridge University Press.

SY12202 GENETICS

The course commences with an overview of Mendelian and non-Mendelian inheritance and introduces concepts

of importance to both prokaryote and eukaryote breeding. The theory and practice of manipulating and mapping

the location of genes on chromosomes are discussed. The science of extra nuclear inheritance and chromosome

genetics are briefly introduced. Changes in chromosome number and structure in humans, plants and animals

are discussed as are the important areas of quantitative genetics, population genetics, evolution and behavioral

genetics.


References

Klug, W.S., Cummings, M.R., Spencer, C.A. and Palladino, M.A. (2015). Essentials of Genetics. 9th Edition. Pearson Education, New Jersey.

Brooker R.J. (2014). Genetics: Analysis and Principles. 5th Edition. McGraw Hill, New York, USA

Harwell, L.H. and Goldberg, M.L. (2014). Genetics: From Genes to Genomes. 5th Edition. McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., USA.

Pierce, B. A. (2013). Genetics: A Conceptual Approach. 5th Edition. Freeman Publishing CO., New York.

Snustad, P.D., Simmons, M.J., Jenkins, J.B. (2006). Principles of Genetics. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Canada.

SY12403 BIOCHEMISTRY

The course is designed to review the biochemistry of the fundamental cellular components underlying the

mechanism of life. The physio-chemical characteristics of biomolecules and the role of proteins, lipids,

carbohydrates, and nucleic acids in cells function will be considered. Enzymology, especially enzyme kinetics

(including enzyme inhibition and activation) and the effect of cofactors and coenzymes (vitamins) will be

discussed. Bioenergetics, especially the structure of the mitochondrion, tricarbocyclic acid cycle, electron

transport and oxidative phosphorylation as well as photosynthesis will be explained briefly. Essential pathways of

intermediary metabolism such as glycolysis, glycogenesis, glycogenolysis, gluconeogenesis, hexose

monoposphate shunt, β oxidation of fatty acids, lipogenesis, catabolism of ketogenic and glycogenic amino acids

and the urea cycle will be considered. Chemistry as well as the roles of DNA and RNA in protein biosynthesis will

also be discussed. Students will also expose to a range of practical techniques including those fundamentals

experimental in related to biochemistry of carbohydrates, proteins, fatty acids, lipids and enzymes. Data

collection, qualitative and quantitative analysis, chromatography separation, enzyme assay and interpretation of

those data through the presentation of a full practical report will also be emphasized.

References

Ridgway N., McLeod R. (2015). Biochemistry of Lipids, Lipoproteins and Membranes, Sixth Edition. Elsevier Science.

Nakamura Y. (2015). Starch: Metabolism and Structure 2015th Edition. Springer.

Bettelheim F.A., Brown W.H., Campbell M.K., Farrell S.O., Torres O.J. (2012). Introduction to General, Organic and Biochemistry. 10th edition. Brooks/Cole.

Nelson D.L., Cox M.M. (2012). Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry. Sixth Edition. W.H. Freeman.

Sauro H.M. (2012). Enzyme Kinetics for Systems Biology. Second edition. Ambrosius Publishing

Roger K. (2011). The Components of Life: From Nucleic Acids to Carbohydrates (Biochemistry, Cells, and Life). Rosen Education Service.

SY12603 MICROBIOLOGY

The course aims to present modern and balanced view of microbiology in our world and their possible roles and

implications in biotechnology. This course will be taught in such a way to expose the students with the foundation

as well as to introduce the diversity members of microorganism, later to look into the current microbiology

research topics. Besides, this course will also expose students to practical experience of basic techniques in

microbiology. The emphasis will be given to the cultivation of microorganisms, the establishment of pure

cultures, sterilization and aseptic techniques. It also introduces fundamental techniques in microbial taxonomy

and enumeration and techniques in characterization and identification. The course will introduce microbiology

and its relevance to biotechnology.

References

Tortora, G.J., Funke, B.R., Case, C.L. 2016. Microbiology: An Introduction. (Twelfth edition). Pearson

Black J. G & Black L.J.2015. Microbiology: Principles and Explorations, 9th Edition.Wiley

Madigan, M.T., Martinko, J., Bender,K. Buckley D and Stahl, D. 2015 (14th edition). Brock-Biology of

Microorganism. Pearson.

Leboffe, M. & Pierce B. 2015. Microbiology:Laboratory Theory and Application (4th Edition). Morton Publishing

Company.

Leboffe, M. & Pierce B. 2011. A Photographic Atlas for The Microbiology Laboratory. 4th edition. Morton

Publishing Company.

SY22103 BIOPHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

This course is designed to discuss the basis phenomenon of thermodynamics in biological systems including

concepts of thermodynamics, characteristic of biological molecules; such as proteins, DNA, carbohydrates,

determination of molecular weight of macromolecules, techniques applied in biomolecule studies. The principles

of various techniques in biotechnology are discussed. In addition, techniques that are used in structural

characterisation of macromolecules such as mass spectrometry, x-crystallography and NMR are also discussed.

References

Hammes G.G., Hammes-Schiffer S. (2015) Physical Chemistry for the Biological Sciences.


Kalsi P.S. (2013). Biophysical Chemistry. New Academic Science.

Kaltashov I.A., Eyles S.J., Desiderio D.M., Nibbering N.M. (2012). Mass Spectrometry in Structural Biology and Biophysics: Architecture, Dynamics, and Interaction of Biomolecules. 2 edition. Wiley.

Poole C.F. and Poole S.K. (2012). Chromatography Today. 5 edition, Elsevier Science.

Buxbaum E. (2011). Biophysical Chemistry of Proteins: An Introduction to Laboratory Methods. Springer

SY22202 MOLECULAR GENETICS

This course has been designed to introduce students to the fundamental principles and processes associated

with molecular genetics. The course commences with an introduction to the fundamental terminology used in

molecular genetics which is then reinforced during the knowledge delivery process. The knowledge is structured

on the basis of the three components encountered in genetics which encompass the genome, the transcriptome

and the proteome. Genomics focuses on both prokaryotic and eukaryotic organisms and the controlling elements

associated with genomes including the mechanism of DNA methylation. Transcriptomics covers the mechanism

of RNA transcription in both eukaryotic and prokaryotic organism and includes specific mechanisms such as

splicing. Proteomics focuses on the translation of RNA into protein. The students are required to read scientific

papers on specific topics which they are assigned to at the beginning of the course and make a presentation by

consolidating their ideas within the context of the principles of molecular genetics. This final phase completes the

reinforcement process.

References

Nicholas H. Bergman, Comparative Genomics (Volume 1 and 2) 2007, Totowa Press, New Jersey.

James D. Watson, Molecular Biology of the Gene (6th Edition) 2007, Pearson Publishing. Benjamin Lewin,

Genes IX 2009, Jones and Bartlett Publishers.

Weaver, Molecular Biology 2006, McGrawHill. Brown TA. Genomes 2007, Wiley-Liss.

SY22303 IMMUNOLOGY

This subject is designed to introduce the basic concepts of immunology for students planning careers in

biomedical research, biotechnology and diagnostic pathology. The cells of the blood, bone marrow and immune

tissues are studied in detail with regard to their identification, morphology and function. The development of

these cells (haematopoesis) and their role in haemostasis and immune function is investigated. The study of

immune function is structured in such a way that it follows the course of an immune response, from initial non-

specific reactions to the development of adaptive responses and immunological memory. Emphasis is given to

the basic concepts that underlie the recognition of foreign bodies by the host and the immune response to

infection. The practical sessions introduce students to the variety of immunological techniques routinely used in

pathology and research laboratories

References

Murphy, K. and Weaver, C. (2016). Janeway’s Immunobiology, 9th edition, Garland Science.

Mahmoudi, M (2016). Immunology Made Ridiculously Simple, 1st edn, Medmaster Inc.

Abbas, A. K., Lichtman,A. H. H., Pillai, S. (2015). Basic Immunology, 5th edition, Elsevier

Abbas, A. K., Lichtman, H. H. (2014). Cellular and Molecular Immunology, 8th edition. Saunders

SY22403 PRINCIPLES OF CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE

The basic concept of totipotency in plant cells will be explained. The principles and techniques in plant cultures

will be discussed. Application of plant cell and tissue cultures in clonal propagation (micropropagation), haploid

culture, protoplast technology and production of secondary metabolites will be explained.

Sharma, V. and Alam, A. (2015). Palnt Tissue Culture. New Delhi: I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

Smith, R. (2012). Plant Tissue Culture: Techniques and Experiments. (3rd. edition). Cambridge: Academic Press.

Kumar, A and Roy, S. (2011). Plant Tissue Culture and Applied Plant Biotechnology. New Delhi: Aavishkar Publisher. Santosh, N. and Madhavi, A. (2010). Practical Book of Biotechnology & Plant Tissue Culture. New Delhi: S. Chand & Company Ltd.

Trigiano, R. N. and Gray, D. J. (2010). Plant Tissue Culture, Development and Biotechnology. Boca Raton: CRC Press.

George, E. F., Hall, M. A., and De Klerk, GJ. (2008). Plant Propagation by Tissue Culture (3rd Edition). Dordrecht: Springer.

SY22503 VIROLOGY

This course will explore the concept of virology, with an emphasis on the viral structure, viral genetic material, classification and viral replication strategies in different host. Student will be exposed to some principle of virus inoculation and isolation and also detection and assay techniques. In addition, some important example of virus transmission within host and distantly related host, diseases caused by viruses and control of viruses will be learned at the end of the course.


References

Flint S.J, Racaniello V.R, Rall, G.F., Skalka, A.M. & Enquist, L W (2015), Principle of Virology, Volume I:

Molecular Biology, Vol II: Pathogenesis and Control.ASM PresS. Washington

Wagner, E.K, Hewlett,M.J, Bloom, D.C and Camerini, D. (2008). Basic Virology (Third edition), Blackwell

Publishing. Malden

Carter and Saunders (2007) Virology (Principles and Applications). John Wiley & Sons.

Dimmock N., Easton A. Leppard, K. (2007). Introduction to Modern Virology 6th Edition

SY22603 MOLECULAR CELL BIOLOGY

This course deals with the biology of cells of higher organisms: The structure, function, and biosynthesis of

cellular membranes and organelles; cell growth and oncogenic transformation; transport, receptors, and cell

signaling; the cytoskeleton, the extracellular matrix, and cell movements and cell division will be emphasized.

References

Thomas D Pollard; William C Earnshaw; Jennifer Lippincott-Schwartz; Graham T Johnson. (2017) Cell Biology. 3rd Edition. Philadelphia PA Elsevier.

Lodish, Berk, Matsudaira, Kaiser, Krieger, Scott, Zipursky, and Darnell. (2016) Molecular Cell Biology. 8th ed. New York, NY: W.H. Freeman and Company.

Allberts B. Johnson A., Lewis J, RaffM, Roberts K, Walter P. (2014). Molecular Biology of the Cell . 6th Edition. Garland Science.

Bruce Alberts, Dennis Bray, Karen Hopkin, Alexander Johnson, Julian Lewis, Martin C. Raff, K. Roberts, Peter Walter ( (2014) Essential Cell Biology. Garland Science

Gerald K. (2013) Cell and Molecular Biology: Concepts and Experiments. 7th Ed. Wiley.

SY22803 INSTRUMENTATION AND APPLICATION

This course is designed to equip students with the basic instrumentation and application of some major

equipments in a common biotechnology lab. The lecture will be divided into four basic concepts namely the

separation of biomolecules and spectroscopy, gene delivery equipments, DNA labelling and gene analyzer tools.

In the separation of biomolecules, students will learn on some basic concepts of chromatography. In addition, the

fundamental and concept of spectroscopy will be explained using UV, atomic, and fluorescence spectroscopy. In

the gene delivery section, students will investigate some basic equipment used to insert a desired gene into plant

cells such as biolistic gun and electroporator. Apart from that, students will be introduced to equipment for

cryopreservation and CO2 incubator. In gene labeling section, students will study the basic concepts of DNA

labeling and radioactivity measurements using Geiger counter, Liquid Scintillation Counter and autoradiography.

In the last section of gene analyzer, concepts of DNA sequencing will be studied using the manual and

automated machine as well as the microarray systems.

References

Day, J.G & Stacey G.N (Eds). (2015) Cryopreservation and Freeze-dying Protocols, 3rd Edition. Humana Press.

New Jersey.

Skoog, P.A. Holles, F.J., Nieman, T.A. (2014).Principles of Instrumental Analysis. 6th. Ed. Harcourt Brace

College Publishers, USA.

Skoog, P.A., West, D. M., Holles, F.J., Crouch, S.R. (2013). Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry. 9th. Ed.

Thomson Learning, USA.

Hollas J M (2010) Modern Spectroscopy 4th Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

SY32103 BIOCHEMICAL ENGINEERING

This course introduces the basic concept of biochemical engineering. It is suitable for students who have limited

knowledge or no knowledge on life science and it will focus on engineering aspects of biological system. The

syllabus consists of enzymes, its kinetics, microbial growth stoichiometry and product formation, substrate

kinetics application, biomass production, transport in bioprocess system, bioreactor design, how to obtain and

purify product and bioprocess application in biological system.

References

Shuler, M., Kargi, F, Delisa,M. (2017). Bioprocess Engineering: Basic Concept. Prentice Hall; 3 edition.

Najafpour, G. (2015). Biochemical Engineering and Biotechnology, Elsevier Science; 2 edition.

Rao, D.G. (2010). Introduction to Biochemical Engineering. Tata McGraw-Hill Publising Company Limited. New

Delhi.

Rajiv, D. (2008). Fundamentals of Biochemical Engineering. Springer Verlag; 1 edition.

Doble, M., Gummadi, S.N. (2007). Biochemical Engineering. Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited. New Delhi.


SY32203 INDUSTRIAL BIOPROCESS

This course aims to complement the knowledge and concepts presented in SY32103 (Biochemical Engineering).

In this course the student is introduced to the more important topics about fermentation process and apparatus

design. It focuses on the downstream processing aspects of biotechnology and will allow students to be aware of

how products and processes are commercialized. Topics to be discussed include microbial growth techniques,

isolation, presentation, media characteristics, sterilization, fermentation, downstream processing of products

including separation and purification technology, process design, standard operating procedures, compliance

and regulatory requirements and the commercialization considerations in the design of a downstream process

are extensively taught. The course also will allow the students to understand the relationship between other unit

of operations and fermentation process. Applications of fermentation technology were covered at the end of the

syllabus.

References

Shuler, M., Kargi, F, Delisa,M. (2017). Bioprocess Engineering: Basic Concept. Prentice Hall; 3 edition.

Stanbury, P. F., Whitaker, A.., Hall,S.J.(2016). Principles of Fermentation Technology. Butterworth-Heinemann; 3 edition.

Liu, S (2016) Bioprocess Engineering, Second Edition: Kinetics, Sustainability, and Reactor Design, Elsevier; 2 edition.

Najafpour, G. (2015). Biochemical Engineering and Biotechnology, Elsevier Science; 2 edition.

Katz, S. E. (2012) The Art of Fermentation: An In-Depth Exploration of Essential Concepts and Processes from around the World, Chelsea Green Publishing; Later prt. Edition.

SY32302 GENETIC ENGINEERING

This subject is an extension of Applied Molecular Genetics (SY22202). It covers the basic classes of DNA

manipulating enzymes and leads on to the application of these enzymes in recombinant DNA technology. An in-

depth study of gene structures and expressions in prokaryotic and eukaryotic organisms will be covered. The

techniques in developing recombinant DNA through gene cloning and the use of various vectors such as

plasmids, cosmids, phagemids will be studied. Gen isolation techniques from cDNA libraries will also be

discussed. The course also covers the use of present day gene manipulation in model organisms such as Mus

musculus, C. elegans, Drosophila melanogaster and Arabidopsis thaliana. Transgenic techniques used to

produce gene knockouts and gene knockdowns will be addressed. Finally, the ethical values concerning the use

of genetically modified organisms (GMOs) and the national regulatory scheme for controlling these GMOs

activities in Malaysia will also be discussed in details.

References

Hartwell, L., Hood, L., Goldberg, M., Fischer, J. and Aquadro, C. 2015. Genetics: From Genes to Genomes.

McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., USA. Fifth Edition.

Watson, J.D., Baker, T.A., Bell, S.P., Gann, A., Levine, M. and Losick, R. 2014. Molecular Biology of the Gene.

CSHL Press, Benjamin Cummings, Pearson Education Inc. USA. Seventh Edition.

Peccoud, Jean (Ed.). 2012. Gene Synthesis: Methods and Protocols. Humana Press. USA.

Malaysia. 2012. Biosafety Guidelines: For Contained Use Activity of Living Modified Organism (LMO).

Department of Biosafety, Ministry of Natural Resources and Environment.

Malaysia. 2012. Biosafety Guidelines: Risk Assessment of Genetically Modified Microorganisms. Department of

Biosafety, Ministry of Natural Resources and Environment.

SY32402 NATURAL PRODUCT BIOTECHNOLOGY

This course aims is to provide knowledge and understanding on the basic principle and applications of natural

products. Topics to be discussed include the classes of natural products, mechanisms employed in the

biosynthesis of the main compound groups and their physiological functions. Following the basic concepts, the

course also focuses on isolation and purification of natural products and modern approach for determination of

bioactivity of natural compounds. The central theme of this course involves the potential uses of microbial, plant,

and fungi cells for generating the high value products including antibiotics, vaccines, enzymes, recombinant

proteins etc and fundamental strategies employed for large scale production. At the end of the course, the

current advances of the research in the biosynthesis, characterization and biotechnology applications of natural

products are also highlighted.

References

Siddiqui W.S. (Editor), Bansal V, Prasad K. (2016) Plant Secondary Metabolites, Volume Two: Stimulation, Extraction, and Utilization. Apple Academic Press, Canada.

Herbert R.B. (2013). The Biosynthesis of Secondary Metabolites 2nd Edition. Chapman and Hall, London.

Mohd Shahid, Anwar Shahzad, Abida Malik, Aastha Sahai .2013. Recent Trends in Biotechnology and Therapeutic Applications of Medicinal Plants. Springer.Bucher

Hans-Jörg Bart, Stephan Pilz (Eds).2011. Industrial Scale Natural Products Extraction. John Wiley & Sons. Weinheim. Germany


Leland J. Cseke, Ara Kirakosyn, Peter B. Kaufman, Sara L. Warber, James A. Duke and Harry L. Brielmann. 2006. Natural Product from Plants (2nd Edition). CRC Press, Taylor and Francis, USA.

Lixin Zhang and Arnold L. Demain (Eds). 2005. Natural Products: Drug Discovery and Therapeutic Medicine. Humana Press Inc, New Jersey, USA

SY32502 TECHNIQUES IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND GENETIC ENGINEERING

The course employs a combined lecture/laboratory format. This course possess practical experience in man of

the molecular and genetic engineering techniques used in basic and applied research laboratories Students will

learn principles of transformation, agarose gel electrophoresis, nucleic acid purification (plasmid and genomic

DNA, RNA), nucleic acid quantification, DNA restriction digestion and analysis, library construction, polymerase

chain reaction (PCR). In addition, students will learn about the nature and selection of DNA cloning vectors,

restriction enzymes, modifying enzymes, polymerases, and other reagents used in molecular genetics. At the

end of the course, basics of computer based DNA sequence analysis and data acquisition over the internet also

highlighted.

References

Sambrook, J. and Green, M. R. 2012. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press. New York, USA. Fourth Edition.

Sue Carson, Heather Miller, D. Scott Witherow. 2012. Molecular Biology Techniques: A Classroom Laboratory Manual. Academic Press.UK.

Jeremy W. Dale, Malcolm von Schantz, Nicholas Plant. 2011. From Genes to Genomes: Concepts and Applications of DNA Technology. John Wiley & Sons. UK

Jocelyn Krebs, Stephen Kilpatrick, Elliott Goldstein (Eds) .2011. Lewin's GENES X, Volume 10. Jones & Bartlett Learning,

SY32603 ENZYME TECHNOLOGY AND BIOSENSOR

The course will discuss some aspects of the production, extraction and the use of enzymes (especially the

amylolytic, cellulolytic, ligninolytic, pectinolytic and proteolytic enzymes) in industry. The potential use of

enzymes as catalysts in the production of special chemical substances is to be emphasized. Immobilised

enzyme formulations and the operation of reactors, which allow the sustained, continuous use of enzymes will be

examined. Also, how coupling of the enzymes influences the kinetic properties of these biocatalysts will be

explained. The course will survey some of the application of enzymes in industry, basic sciences and medicine.

The last part of this course focus more on biosensors, its different types and various applications in day today

life.sequence analysis and data acquisition over the internet also highlighted.

References

Helmut Uhlig. (2015) Industrial Enzymes and Their Applications. John Wiley & Sons.

Yang,V.C., Ngo,T,T. (2013). Biosensors and their applications, Springer.

Prasad,N.K. (2011). Enzyme technology,Pacemaker of Biotechnology. PHI.

Li, S., Singh J., Li, H., Banerjee IA.(2011). Biosensor Nanomaterials, Wiley-VCH; 1 edition.

Pandey,A., Webb, C., Fernandes,M., Larroche,C. (2010) Enzyme Technology, Springer.

Rastall, R. (2007) Novel enzyme technology for food applications. Woodhead Food Series 150, Woodhead Publishing Limited

Wolfgang, A. (Ed.) (2007) Enzymes in Industry Production and Applications. Wiley-VCH.Technology. John Wiley & Sons. UK

Jocelyn Krebs, Stephen Kilpatrick, Elliott Goldstein (Eds) .2011. Lewin's GENES X, Volume 10. Jones & Bartlett Learning,

SY32703 BIOINFORMATICS

The sequencing of the human and other genomes have provided biological researchers with a plethora of DNA

sequences data. Moreover, as the sequencing cost have dramatically been reduced with the used of next

generation sequencing platforms different data sets are being generated present different set of informatics and

data processing challenges Various application of microarray technology such as whole genome expression data

that allows for a more thorough the study of the organism or cells, involves processing data in the form of image

intensity will be introduced. Student will be introduced to (for example) pair and multiple sequence alignment, the

theory and processes of it and especially in analyzing the results obtained from running the applications

involved. The working environment in bioinformatics will also be introduced.

References

Pevsner, J. (2015). Bioinformatics and Functional Genomics, 3rd edition, Wiley-Blackwell.

Lesk, A. M. (2014). Introduction to bioinformatics, 4th edition, Oxford, UK.

Chouduri, S. (2014). Bioinformatics for beginners, 1st edn., Academic Press.

SY32802 AGRICULTURE BIOTECHNOLOGY

This is course is designed to be a capstone course for students of biotechnology. Students will be exposed to


recent and advanced aspects of molecular biology and other techniques related to agricultural biotechnology

through lectures, discussions and seminars.

References

Stewart, C.N.J. (ed) (2016). Plant Biotechnology and Genetics: Principles, Techniques and Applications . 2nd

Edition. Wiley-Blackwell.

Lugtenberg, B. (Ed). 2015. Principles of Plant-Microbe Interactions: Microbes for Sustainable Agriculture.

Springer.

Altman, A & Hasegawa, P. M. (Eds) 2012. Plant Biotechnology and Agriculture: Prospects for the 21stcentury.

Academic Press. UK.

Popp, J.S, Jahn, M.M, Matlock M.D and Kemper,N.P (Eds). 2012.The Role of Biotechnology in A Sustainable

Food Supply. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge.

Hood, E.E., Nelson, P. and Powell, R. (Eds). 2011. Plant Biomass Conversion. Wiley-Blackwell.

Ahmad,I., Ahmad,F., and Pichtel, J .2011. Microbes and Microbial Technology: Agricultural and Environmental

Applications . Springer.

SY34203 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT I/SY40106 SCIENTIFIC PROJECT II

This course concerns with the theoretical aspects of the scientific approach of carrying out a scientific

research project. It covers literature review, project proposal preparation and presentation, and writing of a

scientific report. It involves execution of the research plans that have been developed and evaluated in Scientific

Project I (SY34203). The students will undertake an independent lab and/or field work on the approved thesis

topic in consultation with his/her supervisor/adviser. The results will be subsequently analysed, discussed and

combined with the previous report (SY34203), and finally presented as a dissertation of 12,000 – 15,000

words.

SY40208 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Student shall be placed in an industry or research area at least 16 weeks under lecturer supervision. This

training will be evaluated and student requested provide one written report after the industrial training over.

SY40302 SPECIAL TOPICS IN BIOTECHNOLOGY

The principle of cryopreservation will be explained and the applications of the technology in conservation and

medical will be discussed. Application of biotechnology in agriculture - specifically in securing food supply, in

cleaning up contaminated area (bioremediation) and the use of plant for the production of therapeutics

(molecular farming) will be explained. The mechanism and components in signal transduction of cell will be

discussed in depth. Its application in medical biotechnology such in cancer and personal therapeutic will be

outlined. The ethical, social and economic aspects associated with the application of biotechnology in agriculture

and biomedical will be discussed.

References

Letourneau, D. K., and Burrows, B. E., 2002. Genetically Engineered Organisms : Assessing Environmental

and Human Health Effects. Boca Raton: CRC Press.

Slater, A., Scott, N. and Fowler, M. 2003. Plant Biotechnology: The genetic Manipulation of Plants. Oxford: University Press.

Razdan, M. K., and Cocking, E. C., 2000. Conservation of Plant Genetic Resources In Vitro, Vol 2:

Applications and Limitation. Plymouth: Science Publishers, Inc.

Latest updates of recent development as reported in journals.

Primrose, S.B., Twyman, R.M. and Old, R.W. 2005. Principles of Gene Manipulation. Wiley-Blackwell; Sixth edition.

SY40503 ADVANCED BIOCHEMISTRY

Biochemistry is the chemical language of life. It is a broad and complex discipline that encompasses many

specialized areas. Emphasis will be placed on identification and quantitative determination of substances,

studies of their structure, determing how they are synthesized and degraded in organisms, and elucidating their

role in operation of the organism. In addition, membranes transport, catalytic proteins-enzymes, hormone

action, muscular contraction will also be discussed. At the end of the course, biochemistry of deadly disease

such as cancer and AIDS their remedies to protect human health will be learned.

References

Anderson J.L. 2014. HIV and AIDS: Symptoms, Testing, Treatment, Risk Factors, Preventions, Nutrition,

Marriage, Having Children, Legal Issues. CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform.

Florkin M., Stotz E.H. 2014. Metabolism of Vitamins and Trace Elements: Comprehensive Biochemistry:

Metabolism of Vitamins and Trace Elements. Elsevier.

Lieberman M, Ricer R. 2013. BRS Biochemistry, Molecular Biology, and Genetics (Board Review Series) Sixth

Edition. LWW.


McKee T., McKee J.R. 2013. Medical Biochemistry - An Illustrated Review (Thieme Illustrated Reviews). Sixth

edition. Oxford University Press.

Bettelheim F.A., Brown W.H., Campbell M.K., Farrell S.O., Torres O.J. 2012. Introduction to General, Organic

and Biochemistry. 10th edition. Brooks/Cole.

Hiraku Y., Kawanishi S. Cancer and Inflammation Mechanisms: Chemical, Biological, and Clinical Aspects.

Wiley.

Morimoto R., Selkoe, D.J., Kelly J.W. Protein Homeostasis 1st Edition. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press.

SY40703 MEDICAL BIOTECHNOLOGY

In this course, students will be uncovered to the current challenge of human diseases. In addition, students will

be exposed to various biotechnology researches throughout the globe in the effort of improving human health.

References

Chapel H., Haeney M., Misbah S., Snowden N (2014) Essential Clinical Immunology 5th Edition, Blackwell Publishing

Rabson A., Roitt IM., Delves PJ 2014. Really Essential Medical Immunology. 2nd edn. Blackwell Publishing

Bernard R. Glick, Terry L. Delovitch, Cheryl L. Patten. 2014. Medical Biotechnology.ASM Science

Shetty N., Tang, J. W., Andrews, J. (2011) Infectious Diseases, Wiley-Blackwell

Murray Moo-Young (Editor). 2011. Comprehensive Biotechnology: Medical biotechnology and healthcare, Volume 5.Elsevier

Chapel H., Haeney M., Misbah S., Snowden N 2007 Essential Clinical Immunology 5th Edition, Blackwell Publishing

SY40902 BIOSAFETY, BIOETHICS AND PATENT

This act aims to enhance the health of human beings and the quality of human life by creating conditions that

allow for the development of life sciences and biotechnologies. Additionally, this course aims to attain awareness

to human dignity and to prevent harm to human beings by ensuring that these life sciences and biotechnologies

are developed safely and in accordance with the principles of bioethics. The course is divided into 3 main

sections. In the first section, students introduced to Malaysian Biosafety Act 2007 and the roles of National

Biosafety Commission in protecting human health, animal and plant, environment as well as biological diversity

in Malaysia. In section two, students will be discusses bioethics issue in biotechnology such as human cloning

for the purpose of obtaining children and for medical purposes. Discussion will be focussing on the need for

cloning itself from the aspects of morality, ethics and main religion in the world. In section three the definition,

similarity and differences between trademark, copyright, intellectual property and patent will be discussed in

detail. Also the procedure and requirement to obtain a patent and some examples of patent in Malaysia also be

explained.

References

Lewis L. (2016). Bioethics: Principles, Issues, and Cases, 3rd Edition, Oxford

Richard Stim (2016) Patent, Copyright & Trademark: An Intellectual Property Desk Reference, 14 Edition.

Nolo, US

Deepa Goel and Shomini Parashar (2013) IPR, Biosafety and Bioethics. Pearson, Delhi.

Bethany J. Spielman (2007). Bioethics in Law. Humana Press, Totowa

World health Organization (2004). Laboratory Biosafety Manual (3rd Edition).

INTERNATIONAL TROPICAL FORESTRY PROGRAMME (HG19)

FS20103 SURVEY

Theory and practice of land surveying is an important aspect in forestry. Lecture topics include the theory of land

surveying and mapping using the field and office tools. Understanding the aspects of spatial technology in

survey. Emphasis will be given on developing individual skills in the use of survey equipment in the field.

Students will acquire technical competence in computer applications in the field survey and forestry.survey and

forestry. Case studies will be used to increase student understanding of the course.

References

El-Rabbany, A., 2006. Introduction to GPS: The Global Positioning System, (2nd ed.). Artech House Publishers.

USA. Glilani, C.D. and Wolf, P.R.,2008. Elementary Surveying: An Introduction to Geomatics (12th ed.). Prentice

Hall. USA. Groves, R.M., Fowler, F.J., Couper, M.P., Lepkowski, J.M. and Singer E., 2009 Survey Methodology.

John Wiley & Sons Inc. Kavanagh, B.F. 2008. Surveying: Principles and Applications (8th ed.) Prentice Hall.

USA.

Sickle, J.V. 2008. GPS for Land Surveyors. (3rd ed.). CRC Press. USA.

FS20303 MANAGEMENT AND CONSERVATION OF BIODIVERSITY

This course will expose students on the importance of biodiversity and tropical forest towards nature


environment and the influence of human in biodiversity destruction. Issues on biodiversity threats which includes

endangered species and problems faced in terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems will be discussed. Emphasize will

be given towards biodiversity assessment, design planning of protected areas and management of protected

areas in an effort to conserve biodiversity at the species, population and community level. The role of

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) in the management of protected areas and biodiversity, efforts in

conserving biodiversity at the government and international level, as well as issues pertaining conservation and

future challenges will also be discussed.

References

Boenigk, J., Wodniok, S. and Glucksman, E. 2015. Biodiversity and Earth History. Springer Heidelberg, New York.

Chirici G., Winter, S., & McRobert, R.E. 2011. National Forest Inventories: Contributions to Forest Biodiversity Assessments. Springer.

Crowe, T.P. and Frid, C.L.J. (eds.) 2015. Ecology, Biodiversity and Conservation. Cambridge University Press, UK.

Gardner, T. 2010. Monitoring Forest Biodiversity Improving Conservation Through Ecologically-Responsible management. Earthscan

Lindenmayer, D., Barton, P. and Pierson, J. (eds.). 2015. Indicators and Surrogates of Biodiversity and Environmental Change. CRC Press, Australia.

Ninan, N.K. 2009. Conservation and Valuing Ecosystem Services and Biodiversity: Economic, Institutional and Social Challenges. Earthscan, USA.

Root, T.L., Hall, K.R., Herzog, M.P. and Howell, C.A. (eds.). 2015. Biodiversity in a Changing Climate: Linking Science and Management in Conservation. University of California Press, USA.

Spicer, J.J., 2009. Biodiversity. The Rosen Publishing Group, USA.

Other references

Related links and web-sites regarding biodiversityissues will be given in class and SMART-UMS.

FS20203 FOREST FIRE MANAGEMENT

Forest fires are one of the factors contributing to the destruction and extinction of flora and fauna diversity. In

addition, it is also a contributing factor to the occurrence of haze that causes air pollution and thus brought

disaster to the environment and human life. However, forest fires also contribute to the displacement process for

the dynamics of natural forests. Therefore, this course is very important learned to know the basic concepts of

knowledge management, particularly forest fires in the tropics.

References

Chuvieco, E. 2009. Earth Observation of Wildland Fires in Mediterranean Ecosystems. Springer. Ganeri, A. 2009. Forest Fire.

Franklin Watts Books.

Perona, G. and Brebbia, C. A. 2010. Modelling, Monitoring and Management of Forest Fires II. WITPress. Piehl, J. 2008.

Forest Fires. Lerner Pub Group.

Rathore, S.K. 2010. Fire Fighting & Fire Safety: Concepts, Mehods, Tools & Techniques. Anson Publishing/Unipress

FS20403 SILVICULTURE

This course will cover two areas namely Plantation silviculture and natural forest silviculture. Plantation

silviculture includes areas in nursery and plantation establishment. Topics on nursery will include types,

establishment and management. Plantation silviculture will include aspects of establishment, planting distance,

fertilizing, protection, thinning, pruning and rotation. A fundamental of natural forest silviculture practices entails

areas such as general silviculture systems in the tropics, development of silviculture in Malaysia and current

silviculture system, scope and future challenges.

References

Evans, J. & Turnbull, J. W. 2007. Plantation Forestry in the Tropics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Günter, S., Weber, M., Stimm, B., & Mosandl, R. 2011. Silviculture in the Tropics. Springer.

Nyland, R.D. 2016. Silviculture: Concepts and Applications. 3nd Edition. Waveland Pr. Inc..

Finegan, B. 2015. A 21st Century Viewpoint on Natural Tropical Forest Silviculture. Springer

O’Harda, K. 2014. Multiaged Silviculture: Managing for Complex Forest Stand Structures. Oxford University Press.

FS20603 FOREST INVENTORY

This course is designed to give students a comprehensive knowledge of the methods commonly used in

measuring the standing trees and logs as well as forest stands. This course will focus on tree and forest


measurement techiques for evaluating income from timber with detailed coverage of products such as logs,

attribute measurement for standing trees, conduct inventory of forest stand volume and prediction of individual

tree growth and stand of tress. Sampling technique using plot sampling and point sampling will be taught. The

main emphasis of this course is to impart adequate knowledge and understanding to students on how to apply

the measurement procedures to solve problems in forestry. Experience in field operations for the techniques

taught in this course will be achieved through exercises in a real forest. Methods in problem solving solution are

taught and applied to actual problems and forestry data.

References

Kangas, A. and Mastamo, M. 2009. Forest Inventory: Methodology and Application (Managing Forest Ecosystem), Springer.

Mandallaz,D..2007. Sampling Techniques for Forest Inventories. Chapman and Hall. CRC

Press. USA. Van-Emden,H..2008. Statistics for Terrified Biologists. Wiley-Blackwell Publication. USA.

Van-Laar, A. and Akca, A.2007. Forest Mensuration (Managing Forest Ecosystems). 2nd ed. Springer Netherland. West, P.

2009. Tree and Forest Measurement 2nd ed. Springer. USA.

FS30103 FOREST MANAGEMENT I

This course covers the fundamentals of forest planning and management in a multiple-use forest landscape.

Students will learn the principles of multiple-use forest management in defining management objectives that

satisfies the ecological, economical and social context of sustainable forest management. Apart from being able

to understand the planning framework, students will also be taught the basic techniques in terrestrial inventories

covering biological and non-biological data which are essential in forest planning and management.

Reference

Bettinger, P., Siry, J., Boston, Grebner, D.L. 2009. Forest Managemnet and Planning. Academic Press.

ISBN: 9780123743046

Gane, M. 2007. Forest Strategy: Strategic Management and Sustainable Development for the Forest Sector. Springer. ISBN 978-1-4020-5964-3

Hill, C. 2011. An Introduction to Sustainable Resource Use. Earthscan. ISBN: 9781844079278.

Parkash, R. 2006. Forest Management. International Book Distributors. ISBN: 9788170890829

Spathelf, Peter. 2010. Sustainable Forest Management in a Changing World: A European Perspective. Springer-Verlag. ISBN: 9789048133000

Surhone, L.M., Timpledon, M.T., Marseken, S.F. 2009. Sustainable Forest Management: Sustainable Development, Forest Principles, Natural Environment, Earth Summit, United Nations Forum on Forests, Forest Management, Analog Forestry. Betascript Publishers. ISBN: 9786130301675

Other references

Humphreys, D. 1996. Forest Politics. London: Earthscan UK.

Nussbaum, R., mayers, J., Judd, N., Higman, S. & Bass, S. 1999. The Sustainable Forestry Handbook. London: Earthscan Publications Ltd.

FS30303 INTERNATIONAL AND REGIONAL FORESTRY

This course will cover two areas namely Plantation silviculture and natural forest silviculture. Plantation

silviculture includes areas in nursery and plantation establishment. Topics on nursery will include types,

establishment and management. Plantation silviculture will include aspects of establishment, planting distance,

fertilizing, protection, thinning, pruning and rotation. A fundamental of natural forest silviculture practices entails

areas such as general silviculture systems in the tropics, development of silviculture in Malaysia and current

silviculture system, scope and future challenges.

References

Evans, J. & Turnbull, J. W. 2007. Plantation Forestry in the Tropics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Günter, S., Weber, M., Stimm, B., & Mosandl, R. 2011. Silviculture in the Tropics. Springer.

Nyland, R.D. 2016. Silviculture: Concepts and Applications. 3nd Edition. Waveland Pr. Inc..

Finegan, B. 2015. A 21st Century Viewpoint on Natural Tropical Forest Silviculture. Springer

O’Harda, K. 2014. Multiaged Silviculture: Managing for Complex Forest Stand Structures. Oxford University Press.

FS30503 FOREST ENGINEERING

This course introduces students to the design, construction and maintenance of forest roads, bridges and

culverts based on sound engineering principles. Key topics that will be covered include soil mechanics,

slope stability, drainage and the engineering properties of retaining wall. The course will also cover topics that

enables students to identify and select the right choice of road machines based on their technical specifications,

comparative advantages and costs.


Reference

Anonymus .2010. A Manual of Forest Engineering for India, Volume 3. BiblioBazaar. Jones, R. 2010. Green

Harvest. CSIRO Publishing/ APAC Pub .

Mohd.Hasmadi Ismail 2010. Allocating Access Road for Forest Harvesting Using GIS.Lambert Academic

Publishing Sessions, J. 2007. Harvesting Operations in the Tropics.Springer.

Society of American Forester 2010. Terms Used in Forestry and Logging. BiblioBazaar

FS30202 FOREST AND WOOD PRODUCTS CERTIFICATION

Forest certification arises in an effort to address environmental issues and awarensess in the need of

sustainable forest management. There are several institutions involved in forest certification and forest product

certification bodies including several regional and international levels. Criteria and indicators used in the process

of forest certification is an instrumentthat can ensure that forests or forest plantations are managed properly

based on the principles of sustainable forest management. Certification of forest management and labeling

of forest products trade is identified as an approach to promote sustainable forest management.

References

Bettinger P., Siry J., Boston K.and Grebner D. L. 2009. Forest management and planning.

Elsevier. Burger D., 2005. Forest certification: an innovative instrument in the service of

sustainable development? Dt. Ges. für Techn. Zusammenarbeit.

Higman, S. Mayers, J., Bass, S., Judd, N. and Nussbaum, R. 2005. The sustainable forestry handbook. 2nd ed.

Earthscan. Kubba S., 2009. LEED practices, certification, and accreditation handbook. Butterworth-Heinemann

McDermott C., Cashore B. and Kanowski P., 2010. Global Environmental Forest Policies: An International Comparison.

Earthscan.

Nussbaum R, and Simula M., 2005. The Forest certification handbook. Earthscan

Tollefson C., Gale F. and Haley G., 2009. Setting the Standard: Certification, Governance, and the Forest

Stewardship. UBC Press.

FS30403 FOREST VALUATION

This course begins with an introduction of the array of goods and services that forest provides, and highlights the

need to subscribe appropriate values to them in light of competing forest landuses. Recent advances in valuation

techniques will be presented in this course using market price approach, surrogate market price approach,

production function approache, stated preference approaches and cost-based approach. The strengths and

weaknesses of these valuation approaches will be discussed using case studies found in the region.

References

Kimmins, H., Blanco, J.A., Selly, B., Welham, C., & Scoullar, K. 2010. Forecasting Forest Futures: A Hybrid

Modelling Approach to the Assessment of Forest Ecosystems and their Values. Earthscan. ISBN: 978-1-84407-

922-3.

Patnaik, P. 2010. Handbook of Environmental Anaysis. CRC Press. ISBN: 9781420065817

Pedroso, K.B., Spiecker, H., & Higa, A.R. 2010. Sustainability Assessment of Forest Systems in the Brazilian

Amazon. Lambert Academic Publishing. ISBN: 9783838361864.

Sada, R. 2010. Resource Assessment of Non-Timber Forest Products. Lap Lambert Academic Publishing.

ISBN: 9783838348605.

Zhang, D., & Pearse, P.H. 2011. Forest Economics. University of British Columbia Press. ISBN: 9780774821520

Other references

Barbier E.B., J.C. Burgess, J. Bishop, B. Aylward. 1994. The Economics Of The Tropical Timber Trade.

Earthscan, London

Karsenty A. 2000. Economic Instruments For Tropical Forests. The Congo Basin case. Bogor.

Klemperer, W.D. 1996. Forest Resource Economics And Finance. McGraw-Hill, Inc. New York. 551p.

Price, C. 1989. The Theory And Application Of Forest Economics. Basil Blackwell Ltd. UK. 402p.

Pearce D.W. 1993. Economic Values And The Natural World. Earthscan, London

FS30603 FOREST MANAGEMENT II

This course covers the essentials of preparing a forest managemnet plan that subscribes to multiple-use

concept. Key topics will include forest zoning, resource inventory, annual allowable cut calculation, forest

management prescription, human resource planning and budgeting into practice. Students will translate their

theorectical learning into practice by preparing a forest managment plan using primary and secondary data.

References

Hasenaeur, H. 2009. Sustainable Forest Management. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg. 398p.

Kangas, A., Kangas, J., & Kurttila, M. 2008. Decision Support for Forest Management. Springer.

SBN: 978-1-4020-6786-0

Pretzsch, H. 2010. Forest Dynamics, Growth and Yield. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg.


ISBN: 9783642148613

Md. Danesh. 2010. Forests to Climate Change Mitigation. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg.

ISBN: 9783642132520.

Peter, L., Sam, M., & Matsubayashi, H. 2007. Sustainable Use of Tropical Forests by Reduced-Impact Logging

In Deramakot Forest Reserve, Sabah, Malaysia. Springer. ISBN: 978-4-73237-2.

Morris, P.2009. Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment. 3rd Edition. Earthscan

ISBN: 978-0-203-89290-9.

Other references

Environmental Conservation Department. 2002. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) guidelines for logging

and forest clearance activities. Kota Kinabalu.

Ong, R., Kleine, M. 1995. DIPSIM. A dipterocarp forest growth simulation model for Sabah. FRC Research

Papers No 2, Sandakan.

Sabah Forestry Department. 1997. Manual on Reduced Impact Logging.

FS40103 COMMUNITY FORESTRY AND FOREST EXTENSION

Community forestry refers to any situation in which rural communities participate in the planning and

implementation of forest resource use on community land, on land owned by the state, or on private land. These

activities are based on their socio-economic needs, skills and knowledge and are integrated into the overall

livelihood system of the communities with the objective to improve their living conditions on a sustainable basis.

The course will impart the importance of community forestry in the context of rural development, introduce the

characteristics of different community forestry concepts applied in Southeast Asia, and explain the role of

forestry extension.

References

Angelsen, A., Larsen, H.O., Lund, J.F., Smith-Hall, C., & Wunder, S. 2011. Measuring Livelihoods and

Environmental Dependence: Methods for Research and Fieldwork. Earthscan. ISBN: 9781849711333.

Arts, B., Bommel, S. V., Ros-Tonen, M., & Verschorr, G. 2012. Forest-people interfaces: Understanding

Community Forestry and biocultural diversity. Wageningen Academic Publishers.

Muhammad Arif Atto. 2011. Identification and Analysis of Stakeholders in the Context of Forests: Implications for

Forestry Extension and Rural Development. Lambert Academy Publishing. ISBN 978-3844308082.

Sikor, T., & Stahl, J. 2011. Forests and People: Property, Governance, and Human Rights Earthscan. ISBN:

I9781849712804.

Bullock, R. C. L., & Hanna, S. K. 2012. Community Forestry: Local Values, Conflict and Forest Governance.

Cambridge University Press. ISBN 9780521137584.

FS40302 SEMINAR: SPECIAL TOPICS

This course will expose students towards current issues in sustainable forest management which includes

international institutions, international agreements, forest operations, forest industries, biodiversity, forest

destruction, potential effects of natural environment disasters on soil, water, climate, genetic richness and

uncontrolled economic resources from forested areas, forest community and forestry education. This course

offers chances for students to work on interesting topics in forest management and present the findings for class

discussions.

References

Anon., 2011. Biodiversity and Livelihoods REDD-plus Benefits. Secretariat of the Convention on Biological Diversity United Nations, Montreal and GIZ, Germany. (pdf)

Anon., 2011. CDB Technical Series No. 59. REDD-Plus and Biodiversity. Secretariat for the Convention on Biological Diversity, Canada. CBD, 2013. Quick Guides to the Aichi Biodiversity Targets. Ver. 2. Convention on Biological Diversity.

Davis, L.S. 2015. Forest Management (4th ed.). CBS Publishing, USA.

Freer-Smith, P.H. & Broadmeadow, M.S.J. 2007. Forestry and Climate Change. CABI.

WWF, 2009. High Conservation Value Forest (HCVF) Toolkit for Malaysia. 1st ed. WWF-Malaysia. Other references

Related links and web-sites regarding current forestry issues will be given in class and SMART-UMS.

FS40503 FOREST POLICY AND LEGISLATION

This course discusses the policies and programs for conservation of forest resources in Malaysia, including

Sabah, Sarawak and Peninsular Malaysia. Development and current status of legislation and policies relating

to biodiversity conservation, forestry, wildlife, national parks, water and related issues to implementation of

policies and legislation will be emphasised. This includes terms of approach and process and policy analysis

related to forestry.


References

Lyster, R., MacKenzie, C. , and McDermott, C. 2013. Law, Tropical Forests and Policy and Carbon: The Case of REDD+.

Cambrige University Press, USA. ISBN: 9781107028807.

Maguire, R. 2013. Global Forest Governance: Legal Concepts and Policy Trends. Cheltenham: Edward

Elgar. ISBN: 9780857936066.

McDermott, C., Cashore, B., and Kanowski, P. 2010. Global Forest Policies: An International Comparison.

Earthscan, London. ISBN: 9781844075904.

Schenck, C.A. 2010. Forest Policy. General Books LLC.

Tacconi, L. 2008. Illegal Logging: Law Enforcement, Livelihoods and the Timber Trade. Earthscan.

NATURE PARKS AND RECREATION PROGRAMME (HG20)

FP10203 FOREST HYDROLOGY

This course will expose students to the field of physical hydrology in the forest ecosystem. Detail discussion on

the water cycle components will help students to understand the importance of each process involved, and able

to apply the knowledge further in the management of forest or specifically in water catchment area. Students will

also be trained to do hydrological data observation for example, rainfall, interception, infiltration, evaporation and

river discharge. Other topics that will also be discussed are variation in the weather, climate change, monitoring

and water quality analyses and human impacts on hydrological regime.

References

Brutsaert, W. 2005. Principles of Hydrology: An Introduction. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.

Chang Mingteh, 2006. Forest Hydrology: An Introduction to Water and Forest. London : CRC Press.

Mohd Harun Abdullah. 2012. Principles in Water Analysis for Environmental Science. Kota Kinabalu Sabah : Penerbit Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

Venkatesh, B., Purandara, B. K. & Ramasastri, K. S. (Eds). 2007. Forest Hydrology. New Delhi :

Capital Pub. Co.

Viessman, Jr. W. and Lewis, G.L. 2012. Introduction to Hydrology. 5th ed. USA : Pearson Education International.

FP10403 PARK PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT I

This course is an introductory course to the background establishment and development of protected areas or

nature parks such as National Park and Wildlife Sanctuary. The initial discussion will include topics on historical

aspects, concept and park categories. Other relevant topics such as various framework examples, agreements,

laws and policies both at national and international level will also be discussed. Based on relevant study cases,

issues of park establishment in the perspective of land use at regional scale, as well as social issues on park

planning and management, related to local community will be given more attention during further discussion.

References

Buckley, R. C. 2010. Conservation Tourism. New York : CABI Publishing.

Brockington D., Duffy R., and Igoe J. 2008. Nature Unbound: Conservation, capitalism and the future of protected areas. London : Earthscan.

Chape S., Spalding M.D., Jenkins M.D. and Steiner A. (eds.). 2008. The world’s protected areas : Status, values & prospects in the 21st century. University of California Press.

Lankford S., Lankford J. and Wheeler D. 2011. An introduction to park management. 3rd Edition. Urbana IL : Sagamore Publishing.

Peterson J.A. and Hronek B.B. 2011. Risk management for park, recreation & leisure services. 6th Edition. Urbana IL : Sagamore Publishing. Additional references:

Sabah Parks, 2004. Master Plan for Park Management of Crocker Range Park, Kota Kinabalu.

FP20103 PARK PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT II

This course is a continuation of Park Planning and Management I. This course teaches approaches in park

planning and management. Components and preparation of park management plan will be discussed. Emphasis

is given on zoning in sustainable park management. Recreation resource inventory, trail planning and visitor

management are important topics in this course. Issues related to sustainability will also be given attention.

References

Phua M.H., Maznah, M., and Kamlisa, U.K. (Editors) 2016. Protected Area and Recreation Management, UMS Publisher.

Moiseichik, M. (Editor). 2010. Management of Park and Recreation Agencies 3rd Edition, National Recreation and Park Association, Sagamore Publisher. IUCN, 2008. Management planning for natural world heritage properties: a resource manual for practitioners.


IUCN World Commission on Protected Areas ; World Heritage Centre; Unesco - Gland, Switzerland : IUCN Programme on Protected Areas. Warren, R. , Payne, S., and Rea, P. 2007. Park and Recreation Maintenance Management 4th Edition, Sagamore Publisher.

Borrini-Feyerabend, Grazia, 1996. Collaborative management of protected areas: tailoring the approach to the context. IUCN, Social Policy Group - Gland: IUCN.

FP20203 ZOOLOGY AND WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT

Wildlife management is the application of ecological knowledge about vertebrate wildlife populations and

relationship with plants and other living organisms to achieve a balance between the needs of humans and

wildlife. This course exposes students to the concepts and principles of wildlife management problem solving.

After learning the basics of zoology and the factors that lead to the extinction of species, the students will gain an

understanding of the selection, design and management of protected areas for wildlife and assess threats to

species, methods of management and species protection to minimize the threat of extinction. Students will

prepare a management plan for a group to be presented at the end of the semester.

References

Bolen, E. G. and Robinson W. L. 2016. Wildlife Ecology & Management (6th ed.). Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River.

Hickman Jr., C.P., Roberts, L.S., Larson, A., I’anson, H. and Eisenhour, D.J. 2012. Integrated Principles of Zoology (15th ed.). McGraw-Hill, New York.

Hilty, J. A., Lidicker Jr., W. Z. and Merenlender, A.M. 2011. Corridor Ecology: The Science and Practice of Linking Landscapes for Biodiversity Conservation. Island Press, Washington.

Mills, S. C. 2007. Conservation of Wildlife Populations: Demography, Genetics, and Management. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford.

Pullin, A. S. 2002. Conservation Biology. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge

FP20401 LANDSCAPE DRAWING TECHNIQUE

The course comprise two main topics namely graphic and information. Information fundamental such as the

concept of space, critical considerations and practical elements for construction will be the materials delivered to

students. The second topic will focus on geometric and angle technique, as well as layers and surface. Also

included are the principles for problem solving, graphic, skills and communication integration. Students will also

be introduced to certain tools in designing concept development and three-dimensional view solution.

References

Jensen, C. H., Helsel, J. D., Voisinet, D.D. 1996. Computer-aided engineering drawing using AutoCAD. Glencoe/Mcgraw-Hill.

Grant, W. 2002. Landscape Graphics: Plan, Section and Perspective Drawing of Landscape Spaces. Revised Edition. New York: Watson-Guptill Publications.

Additional references supporting the course :

Nik Ismail Azlan. 2000. Grafik Asas Senibina Landskap, Edisi pertama. Universiti Teknologi Mara.

Nik Ismail Azlan. 2001. Grafik Asas Senibina Landskap, Edisi Kedua. Universiti Teknologi Mara.

Khairul Anwar Hanfiah. 1998. Lukisan Kejuruteraan Berbantu Komputer. Penerbit Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.

FP20603 ECOTOURISM

This subject introduces the concepts of ecotourism and its practices by exploring the impacts of ecotourism to

the resource management techniques that include principles, issues and challenges in conserving natural areas

sustainably. Students are also given the opportunity to experience real nature-based and cultural tourism

operations to better understand the knowledge through a field trip and case study. On completion,students have

the ability to apply a range of key fundamental ecotourism concepts and principles to ecotourism practices.

References

Fennell, D.A. 2015. Ecotourism 4th ed. Routlrdge, New York.

Roy Ballantyne, R., &Packer, J.2013. International handbook on ecotourism. Edward Elgar Pub. Ltd, Cheltenhem.

France, R.L. 2012. Environmental restoration and design for recreation and ecotourism. CRC Press, Boca Raton.

Ralf, B. 2009. Ecotourism: principles and practices 2nd ed. CABI: Cambridge.

Dudley, N & Phillips, 2006. A Forests and Protected Areas: Guidance on the use of the IUCN protected area management categories. IUCN Publications Services Unit.

Fennell, D.A. 2007. Ecotourism. Routledge, New York.

Wearing, S. & Neil, J. 2009. Ecotourism: impacts, potentials and possibilities. Butterworth-Heinemann, London.

FP20803 REMOTE SENSING

This course aim to expose students about the importance of remotes sensing in management and planning of


forest ecosystems. This course consists of aerial photography and satellite remote sensing. The fundamental

principal and usage of aerial photograph to gather information about the forest will be taught. For satellite remote

sensing, fundamentals of optical remote sensing will be emphasized. Lectures include data acquisition, pre-

processing, transformation and satellite data analysis. Lecturers are accompanied by practical works to ensure

better understandings of students on the use of the technologies.

References

Jensen, J.R. 2007. Remote Sensing of the Environment: An Earth Resource Perspective. 2nd Edition, New

Jersey: Prentice Hall.

Jensen, J.R. 2015. Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective. 4th Edition, New

Jersey: Prentice Hall.

Lillesand, T.M., Kiefer, R.W &Chipman, J.W. 2015. Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation. 7th Edition, John

Wiley & Sons Inc.

Richard, J.A & Jia, X. 1999. Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis. 3rd Edition, Springer-Verlag.

FP30103 GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS

This course teaches introductory level of Geographic Information Systems (GIS). Students are exposed to the

importance of GIS as a tool for planning and management of forest ecosystems. GIS data visualization,

database construction and analyses are taught in this course. Integration of results from satellite remote sensing

into GIS is also taught. Lectures on GIS are accompanied by practical works to ensure better understandings of

students on the use of the technologies.

References

Phua, M.H., 2008. GIS: A Practical Approach. UMS Publisher, Kota Kinabalu.

Longley, P.A., Goodchild, M.F., Maguire, D.J., Rhind, D.W., 2015. Geographic Information Systems and Science. 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Chichester.

Chang, K. 2015. Introduction to Geography Information Systems. 8th Edition. McGraw-Hill.

Micheal Zeiler, 2010. Modeling Our World: The ESRI Guide to Geodatabase Concepts. ESRI, USA.

Burrough, P.A. & McDonnell, R.A. 2015. Principles of Geographical Information Systems. 3rd Edition. Clarendon Press, Oxford. FP30303 ARBORICULTURE

This course will provide students with the arboriculture knowledge which is primarily concerned with the planting

and care of trees, shrubs and woody climbers. It involves management activities for both single trees and those

in small groups, especially those found in parks and cities. This course aims to give exposure to the principles of

arboriculture such as how to prepare the planting sites, how to select suitable species to plant, planting

technique, maintenance before and after planing including pruning, nutrient management, tree care and

integrated landscape management.

References

Abbs, B. 2003. Choosing and using Climbing Plants. Enhance Your Garden with Climbers. New Holland

Publishers (UK) Ltd, United Kingdom.

Bradshaw, A. D., Hunt, B. & Walmsley, T. 1995. Trees in the Urban Landscape: Principles and Practice. E & FN

Spon, An Imprint of Chapman & Hall, London.

British Standards Institution. 2014. Trees: from nursery to indepencene in the landscape – Recommendation.

British Standards Institution.

Dobbs, L. 2002. Tools for Gardeners. Aurum Press Ltd., London.

Harris, R. W., Clark, J. R. & Matheny, N. P. 2003. Arboriculture: Integrated Management of Landscape Trees,

Shrubs and Vines. Fourth Edition. Prentice-Hall, New Jersey.

Brickel, C. & Joyce, D. 2017 Royal Horticultural Society: Pruning& Training. Revised new edition and over 800

plants. Dorling Kindersley. 336pp.

Lonsdale, D. 1999. Principles of Tree Hazard Assessment and Management. Research for Amenity Trees No. 7,

Forestry Commission, United Kingdom.

FP30503 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE AND RECREATION FACILITY DESIGN

Landscape architecture is a field consisted of arts, planning, design, management, preservation and

conservation, as well as human development. The course will introduce to the students the basic concept of

design and planning in landscape architecture field, as well as provision of infrastructures and facilities. This

includes pattern, type, and design of recreation facilities, as well as consideration regarding its surroundings.

Emphasize is given to the design process in recreation and urban forest area. The course will be conducted

according to the teaching standard format which comprise two hours introduction lecture, followed by three hours

studio session every week.


References

Winsch, C., Garmory, N. and Tennant, R. 2015. Professional Practice for Landscape Architects, 3rd edition.

Taylor & Francis.

Walliss, J. and Rahmann, H. 2016. Landscape Architecture and Digital Technologies. Taylor & Francis.

Reid, G. W. 2002. Landscape Graphics: Plan, Section and Perspective Drawing of Landscape Spaces (rev. ed.),

Watson Guptill, New York

Additional references supporting the course:

Gifford, R. 1997. Environmental Psychology: Principles and Practice (2nd Ed.), Allyn and Bacon, Boston

Ingels, J. E. 1997. Landscaping: Principles and Practices (5th Ed.), Delmar Publishers, New York

Tal, D. 2009. Google SketchUp for Site Design: A Guide to Modeling Site Plans, Terrain and Architecture .Wiley.

FP30703 ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICE EVALUATION

This course enables students to learn and apply the basic concept of environmental valuation. Natural

environment provides human with resources and commodities such as mineral, timber, and clean water.

Students will learn several main approaches in estimating the value of environmental goods and services such

as clean water, recreation, forest products, and non-timber forest products. The selection of environmental

valuation method is highly dependent on the type of environmental goods and services being valued and also

the availability of data resource, time and budget. In this course, five environmental valuation methods will be

stressed out; market price-based; surrogate market-based; hypothetical market-based; cost-based; and benefits

transfer. Study cases will be given to increase students’ understanding about the environmental valuation

methods. Additionally, methodology on decision making related to environmental and social value will also be

highlighted.

References

Ninan, K.N. (2014) Valuing Ecosystem Services: Methodological Issues and Case Studies, pp. 1-427.

Bouma, J.A., Van Beukering, P.J.H. (2015) Ecosystem Services: From Concept to Practice, pp. 1-267.

Journal of Ecological Economics, Elsevier (1989-now).

Journal of Ecosystem Services, Elsevier (2012-now).


Bateman, I. J. and Willis, K. G. 1999. Valuing Environmental Preference: Theory and practice of Contingent Valuation Method in the US, EU and Developing Countries. Oxford University Press, USA Freeman III, A. M. 2003. The Measurement of Environmental and Resource Values: Theory and Methods. Resources For the Future Press, USA Guy Garrod & Kenneth G. Willis, 1999, Economic Valuation of The Environment, Edward Elgar, UK.

FP30202 RECREATION PSYCHOLOGY

This course emphasizes on the society’s awareness, recognition and appreciation towards recreation.

Psychological aspects are discussed to provide exposure regarding human behavior and how it is closely related

with recreation. The main discussion is circulating around appreciation towards the values of recreation in

fulfilling human psychological needs, therapeutic recreation values through physical activities, and the aesthetic

effects of recreation resource specifically the forest and natural resources. Apart from the above, leisure activity

design, creativity in developing, planning and changing of life style through recreational activities are also critical

elements in this course. Current issues in recreation as well as research methodology in this field are also

discussed.

References

Phua M.H., Maznah, M., and Kamlisa, U.K. 2015. Protected Area and Recreation Management, UMS Publisher.

Coon, D. and Miterrer, J.O. 2015. Introduction to Psychology: Gateways to Mind and Behavior 14th Edition. Cengage Learning Books. McLean, D.D., and Hurd, A.R. 2014. Krau’s Recreation and Leisure in Modern Society (Tenth Edition). Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Inc. Human Kinetics. 2012. Introduction to Recreation and Leisure With Web Resource-2nd Edition. Human Kinetic Books. Russel, R.V. 2012. Pastimes: The Context of Comtemporary Leisure. Sagamore Pub Llc

Carter, M.J., and Van Andel, G. E. 2011. Therapeutic Recreation: A Practical Approach, 4th Edition. Waveland Pr Inc.

FP30403 URBAN FORESTRY

Urban Forestry is a specialization within forestry that encompasses the management of naturally occurring and

planted trees in urban areas. In this course, students will be given more emphasis on the management of

assemblages of trees, more specifically sum of street trees, residential trees, park trees and greenbelt vegetation

(includes trees on unused public and private land). It comprises three parts; the importance of trees in cities and

how to use them; appraisal and inventory techniques of urban vegetation; planning and management of public


vegetation, especially street trees, park vegetation, and forested greenbelts. The principles of tree hazard

management also addressed in the latter part of course.

References

Boo, C. M., Kartini Omar-Hor, Ou-Yang, C. L. 2016. 1001 Garden Plants in Singapore. National Parks Board,

Singapore.

Carreiro, M. M., Wu, J. & Song, Y. C. 2007. Ecology, Planning, and Management of Urban Forests: International

Perspective. Springer Verlag, United Kingdom.

Duryea, M. 2004. Forest at the Wildland-Urban Interface: Conservation and Management. Macie, E. A.,

Hermansen, L. A., Duryea, M. L. (Ed.). Lewis Pub., United States of America.

Konijnendijk, C. C. 2005. Urban Forests and Trees: A Reference Book. Springer, Berlin.

Miller, R. W., 2007. Urban Forestry: Planning and Managing Urban Greenspaces. (Second Edition). Prentice-

Hall, Inc., New Jersey.

6. Mojiol, A.R & Renate Buerger-Arndt., 2012 Urban Green Areas Management in Kota Kinabalu, Sabah-

Malaysia: Concept and sustainability. Lambert Academic Publisher. Germany.

FP30602 TOURISM ECONOMICS

Knowledge and skills in tourism economics are essential in providing the basic concepts and mechanism in the

approach of solving business problem such as costing, pricing, revenue, profit and competitive advantage. The

main topics of this course include estimation and projection in supply and demand, pricing, valuation, potential

profit maximization and cost minimization, exploration of local and regional economic analysis, use of economic

analysis, application of occupation and money value in the daily operation of tourism industry. Economic impact

of tourism at the macro-economic as well as micro-level will be also stressed out in the cost and profit analysis.

In this course, students are able to learn the economic theory and issues related to tourism industry.

References

Journal of Tourism Management, Elsevier (1982-now).

Dwyer, L., Forsyth, P., & Dwyer, W. (2010). Tourism Economics and Policy. Bristol, UK: Channel View

Publications.

Tribe, J. (2015) The Economics of Recreation, Leisure and Tourism: Fifth Edition, pp. 1-459.

Stabler, M.J., Papatheodorou, A., & Sinclair, M. T. (2009). The Economics of Tourism (2nd ed.). USA and

Canada: Routledge.

Lundberg, D. E., Krishnamoorthy, M., & Stavenga, M. H. (1995). Tourism Economics. Canada: John Wiley &

Sons, Inc.

Additional references supporting the course :

Matias, Á., Nijkamp, P., Romão, J. (2016) Impact Assessment in Tourism Economics, pp. 1-273.

Tisdell, C., Wilson, C. (2012) Nature-based Tourism and Conservation: New Economic Insights and Case

Studies, 520 p.

Hanley, N., Shaw, W.D & Wright, R.E. (eds), 2003. The New Economic of Outdoor Recreation, E. Elgar,

Cheltenham

Fabio Cerina, Anil Markandya, Michael McAleer, 2010, Economics of Sustainable Tourism, Routledge, UKJ}

Vanhove,N., 2005, The Economic of Tourism Destinations, Elsevier, Oxford.

FP40103 OUTDOOR RECREATION

This course aims to prepare the students with physical activities, especially in outdoor recreation such as

kayaking, wall climbing, jungle trekking, mountaineering and camping. Apart from lectures, practical works

are compulsory to provide comprehensive training and skills to the students. At the end of the course,

students should be able to handle the recrea-tional equipments and gadgets such as kayaks, climbing and

mountaineering gears.

References

British Red Cross Society. 2011. First Aid Manual, 9th Ed, Dorling Kindersley, UK. Dillon, P.S., and Oyen, J.

2009. Kayaking. Human Kinetics, Inc: Champaigns, US.

Martin, B., Cashel, C., Wagstaff, M. and Breunig, M. 2006. Outdoor Leadership: Theory and Practice.

Human Kinetics: Champaign, USA.

Plummer, R. 2008. Outdoor Recreation: An Introduction. Routlegde: New York.

Shephard, N. 2007. The Complete Guide to Rope Technique: for climbers, mountaineers & instructors,

Frances Lincoln: London.

Additional references supporting the course:

Douglas, R.W. 2000. Forest Recreation, 5th Ed. Illinois : Waveland Press, Inc, Prospect Heights


FP40302 RECREATION RESOURCE MARKETING

Parks, recreation, and leisure pursuits involve a vast array of experiences which take on different purposes and

meaning for each participant. As such, marketing is important to meet the different needs of participants. This

course will focus on marketing for parks and recreation, particularly related to nature tourism and recreation. It

will involve identifying and understanding users/participants, as well as he needs or benefits they hope to

address through recreation participation. Marketing aspect pertaining to design and offer of programs and serves

tailored to meet the needs of users/participants will be addressed as well.

References

Crompton, J. L. 2016. Pricing Recreation and Park Services: The Science and the Art. Urbana, Sagamore Publishing, Illinois, 335 pp. Horner, S. & Swarbrooke, J. 2016. Consumer Behaviour in Tourism, 3rd Ed. Routledge, New York.

Hurd, A. & Anderson, D. 2011. The Park and Recreation Professional’s Handbook with Online resource. Cloth Pass Kycd. 312 pp. Kotler, P. R., Bowen, J. T. & Makens, J. 2014. Marketing for hospitality and Tourism, 6th Ed. Pearson, United Kingdom.

Middleton, V. T. C., Fyall, A., Morgan, M. & Ranchhod, A. 2009. Marketing in Travel and Tourism, 4th Ed. Butterworth-Heinemann, United Kingdom.

Minazzi, R. 2015. Social Media Marketing in Tourism and Hospitality. Springer, United Kingdom.

Morgan, N., Pritchard, A., & Pride, R. 2011. Destination Brands: Managing Place Reputation, 3rd Ed. Elsevier, United Kingdom.

FP40502 RESORT MANAGEMENT AND HUMAN RESOURCE

Resort management and human resource is one of the major elements to ensure sustainability of the resort

industry. This course will focus on key topics in the planning and management, including development,

maintenance and operations, such as budgeting, pricing and revenue management, front desk operations,

marketing, public relations, guest activities, event management and direction of the resorts in the context of

current environmental changes in the management of the resort, as well as food & beverage service

management. This course will also focus on the current issues in resort management and human resource and

explore the various levels of management, but emphasis is given to supervisors and middle management level.

This particular section also assesses the strategic approach in human resource management (HRM), and

outlines the strategic thinking in the method of producing sustainable competitive advantage through human

resources. The main topics including health and workplace safety, employee relations, selection and recruitment,

development and training, human resource planning and human resource management system.

References

Cynthia D. F., Lyle F. S., dan James B. S. 2006. Human resource Management. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co.

Prideaux, B. 2009. Resort Destinations Evolution, Management and Development. USA: Butterworth-

Heinemann.

French, W. 2007. Human Resources Management (6th). Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.

Murphy, P. 2008. The Business of Resort Management. USA: Butterworth-Heinemann.

Walker, J. R. 2009. Introduction to hospitality industry, 5th Ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Person Prentice Hall

FP40702 ECOLOGY AND LANDSCAPE MANAGEMENT

This course provides students with an introduction to the discipline of landscape ecology. It is focusing on the

interplay between spatial patterns and processes that specifically characterize spatial pattern and how it changes

through time. This course provides student with the knowledge on detecting and define the elements of pattern

and how these aspects of pattern are interrelated in various landscape. It assist students to relate the structure,

function and change in a heterogeneous land area composed of interacting ecosystems. Questions on how

human activities can cause impacts on land will be discussed under the agents of pattern formation. Other

relevant topic of discussion includes the aspect of change in tropical environment with urban development,

extinction and habitat fragmentation aspects and population growth related to planning of landscape

management.

References

Bell, S. 2012. Landscape : pattern, perception and process. 2nd edition. Abingdon, UK: Routledge.

Landscape Ecology (Journal). 1987 - now. Springer International Publishing AG.

Landscape and Urban Planning (Journal). 1986 - now. Elsevier B.V.

Beck, T. 2012. Principles of Ecological Landscape Design. Washington: Island Press.

Turner, T. 1998. Landscape Planning and Environmental Impact Design. Tylor & Francis.


FOREST PLANTATION AND AGROFORESTRY PROGRAMME (HG23)

FL10103 FOREST PROTECTION

This course will provide an overview of the factors that influence the health of trees in the forest and the urban environment. The main topics are included forest diseases and insects. The disease that covered is caused by the biotic pathogen and abiotic stress including root rot, wits, cancer, rusts, decay and others. Attention is also given to the insect's activities that directly related to tree health and wood fiber losses. Topics will include: termites, Ambrosia beetles, leaf-eating insects, insect pests of wood and drill seeds, nursery and forest plantation. References Vega, F.E. and Hofstetter, R.W. (eds.) 2015. Bark Beetles Biology and Ecology of Native

and Invasive Species. Academic Press, UK.Castello, J.D 2011. Forest Health. Cambridge University Press

Hill, D.S. and Fatimah Abang, 2005. The Insects of Borneo. UNIMAS, Malaysia. Robert, B. 2008. Plant

Pathology: Techniques and Protocols. Springer Verlag. Ryan, 2011. Forest Entomology – A Global Perspective.

John Wiley & Sons, NY. Timoth, S., 2011. Insect Ecology 3rd. Ed. Elsevier.

FL20103 CROP PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY

This course will provide students aspects of propagation methods involving propagation through seeds, vegetative parts and micro-propagation. The time, techniques and materials to produce the section of the plant, environmental conditions, and the need root rooting media for several species of forest trees and crops is introduced. Various structural propagation, soil and fertilizer needs to be addressed. The emphasis is on the basic principles of plant propagation for forestry and forest plantation areas. References Beyl, C.A. and Trigiano, R.N. 2014. Propagation concepts and laboratory exercise. 2nd edn. CRC Press. 520 pp. Hartman, H.T., Kester, D.E., Davies Jr., F.T., Geneve, R.L. 2014. Hartman and Kester’s plant propagation principles and practices. 8th edn. Pearson Education Limited. Edinburgh UK. Sheaffer, C.C., Moncada, K.M. 2012. Introduction to agronomy: food crop and environment. Delmar, USA. Bowley, J.D., Bradford, K., Hilhorst, H., Nonogaki, H. 2013. Seeds, physiology of development, germination and dormancy. 3rd edn. Springer.

Paul V. Nelson. 2011. Green House Operation and Management. Prentice Hall.

FL20203 SYSTEMS AND AGROFORESTRY PRACTICES

Basic concepts and principles of agroforestry. Classification of agroforestry systems, practices and technology in middle and tropical areas and the benefits and barriers are discussed as a whole. Assessment of agroforestry projects in the economic, social and environmental issues. Agroforestry diagnosis and design of the project is important in determining the appropriate management practices in the context of the interaction between soil and types of crops. References Nuberg, I. George, B. and Reid, R. 2009. Agroforestry for natural resource management. CSIRO

Publishing Sunil, P. and Pankaj, P. 2009. Agroforestry: systems and practices. New India Publishing

Batish, D. and Batish, D. R. 2008. Ecological basis of agroforestry. CRC Press

Garret, H.E.; Rietveld, W.J. & Fisher, R.F. 2000. North American Agroforestry: An Integrated Science and

Practice. USA American Society of Agronomy.

Jose, S. and Gordon, A.M. 2008. Toward agroforestry design: An ecological approach. Springer Peter, A. H.

1999. Tropical agroforestry. USA: Iowa State University Press.

Noordwijk, M.V. and Cadisch, G.C.K. 2004. Below-ground interactions in tropical agroecosystems: concepts

and models with multiple plant components. CABI

FL20403 FOREST PLANTATION MANAGEMENT

This course will discuss the principles and criteria of forest plantation management and development based on sustainable management. This subject encompasses of all aspects in relation to forest plantation maintenance and establishment. Factors affecting forest plantation development and the impact of forest plantation to the socio-economic of local community and biodiversity will be discussed.

References Brotto, L., Pettenella, D., Cerutti, P. and Pirard, R. 2016. Planted forests in emerging economies: Best practices for sustainable and responsible investments. CIFOR, Bogor Barat, Indonesia. Malaysian Timber Certification Council. 2015. Malaysian Criteria and Indicators for Forest Plantation Vol.2.

Malaysian Criteria and Indicators for Forest Plantation Management Certification. MTCC, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. Borges, J.G., Luis D., McDill, M.E. and Rodriguez, L.C.E. 2014. The Management of Industrial Forest Plantations: Theoretical Foundations and Applications. Springer Dordrecht Heidelberg New York London.

Silviculture in the Tropics. Springer


Dordrecht Heidelberg New York London. Growing Plantation Forests. Springer International Publishing Switzerland.

FL30103 PLANTATION ECONOMICS

This course will discuss the basic economic concepts related to the plantation sector. Economic tools usually used to evaluate an investment in the plantation sector and explain the risks and uncertainties. Farmland assessment and investment, taxes in forestry, and valuation of nonmarket and services are also included. References Lipsey, R. & Chrystal, A. (2015). Economics. International 13th Edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Zhang, D. & Pearse, P.H. (2011). Forest Economics. Vancouver, BC: UBC Press.

Taylor, J.B. 2007. Economics. Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Abdul Hamid Mar Iman and Mohd. Shahwahid Othman. 2005. Penilaian Sumber & Harta Tanah Hutan.

Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, Skudai, Johor Darul Takzim.

Taylor, J.B. 2007. Economics. Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Olson, K.D. (2004). Farm Management: Principles and Strategies. Iowa: Iowa State Press.

Klemperer, W.D. (1996). Forest Resource Economics and Finance. New York: McGraw-Hill.

FL30303 LIVESTOCK ENTERPRISE

This course will discuss the principles of science integration, management and practices for the production of the selected species of a livestock. Emphasis will be given to the sustainable of livestock production and in integrated systems, as well as conservation and the use of domestic animal and the suitable type of breeds. Sustainable of livestock enterprise is prioritized for the optimal performance of the livestock in terms of nutrition, health and environment conditions. The small scale of livestock industry is important to rural agriculture and agroforestry systems. References McIntire, J., Bourzat, D., & Prabhu, P. 2016. Crop-livestock interaction in sub-Saharan Africa. Washington, DC: World Bank. Craft, M. E. 2015. Infectious disease transmission and contact networks in wildlife and livestock. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. B, 370(1669), 20140107. Sastry, N.S.R. 2008. Livestock Production Management. Kalyani, India. Steinfeld, H., Gerber, P., Wassenaar, T. D., Castel, V., & de Haan, C. (2006). Livestock's long shadow: environmental issues and options. Food & Agriculture Org. Geers, R. and Madec, F. 2006. Livestock Production and Society. Wageningen Academic Pub..

FL30203 TREE -CROP-SOIL INTERACTION AND NUTRIENT MANAGEMENT

This course discusses the interaction between plants, soils and crops. Students will be exposed on agroforestry systems that involve sharing space below ground and above ground. Trees and plants interact in various ways, including positive and negative interaction effect on the growth of both trees and crops. This course will also discuss the processes involved such as the cycle of soil organic matter, nutrients and water. Practical and appropriate site visit will be conducted.

References Ong CK, Black C, Wilson J, eds. 2015. Tree-crop interactions: agroforestry in a changing

climate. Wallingford, UK: CABI.

Van Noordwijk, M. G., Cadisch and Ong, C. G. 2004. Below Ground Interactions in Tropical Agro-ecosystems: concept and models with multiple plant components., CABI Publishing Schroth,G. And Sinclair, F.L. 2003. Trees, crops and soil fertility: concepts and research methods. CABI

Publishing

Batish,D. and Batish, D.R. 2008. Ecological basis of agroforestry. CRC Press.

Alavalapati J.R.R.and Mercer D.E. 2008. Valuing agroforestry systems: methods and applications.

Nature. Jose,S. and Gordon A.M. 2008. Toward Agroforetry Design: An Ecological Approach.

Springer Publishing.

Nair, P. K. R., Buresh, R. J., Mugendi, D. N. and, Latt, C. R. 1999. Nutrient Cycling in Tropical Agroforestry

Systems: Myths and Science. In: Buck, L.E.,

FL30403 GENETICS AND PLANT BREEDING

The course emphasizes on plant genetics principles which includes meiosis and mitosis, Mendelian genetics, quantitative genetics, population genetics, mutation, DNA replication, translation and transcription. Basic plant breeding theory, breeding methods and techniques for self-pollinated and cross-pollinated plants are introduced. The application of special techniques such as induced mutation, chromosome manipulation, male sterility, tissue culture, molecular markers, genetic engineering, to plant breeding will also be discussed. References Brown, J., Caligari, P., Campos, H. 2014. 2nd edn. Plant breeding. Wiley-Blackwell. Ramanant, K.G., Merillon, J-M, Ahuja, M.R. 2014. Tree biotechnology. CRC Press Taylor and Francis. Robert J. Henry. 2013. Molecular markers in plants. Wiley and Blackwell. Acquaah, G. 2012. Principles of plant genetic and breeding. Wiley-Blackwell, UK.


12. Altman, A. and Hasegawa, P.M. 2012. Plant biotechnology and agriculture, prospects for the 21st century. Elsevier Inc.

FL30803 PROJECT I

This course consists of a research project to be taken by final year students to meet the needs of the Bachelor of

Science in Forestry (Forest Plantation and Agroforestry). In this course, each student must prepare a

research proposal on a topic related to the program include objectives, literature review, methodology and

research design, work schedule and budgets. Students must present their proposals, conducting research

projects in Semester 1, and write Chapter 1 to 3 parts of scientific writing (thesis).

References

Mahmud Sudin. 2009. Panduan Penulisan Tesis & Disertasi. Sekolah Perhutanan Tropika Antarabangsa,

Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

Cox, D. R. 1992. Planning of Experiments. John Wiley, New York.

Field, A. P. and Hole, G. 2003. How to Design and Report Experiments. Sage Publications Ltd., London.

Hoshman, A. R. 1994. Experimental Research Design and Analysis: A Practical Approach for Agricultural

and Natural Sciences. CRC Press. Boca Raton, FL.

Richardson, S., Balachander Krishnan Guru, Cheng Ming Yu, Khong Kok Wei & Leo Pointon. 2005. How To

Research - A Guide for Undergraduate & Graduate Students.Thomson. Malaysia.

Sidek Mohd Noah. 2002. Reka Bentuk Penyelidikan: Falsafah, Teori dan Praktis. Universiti Putra Malaysia. Serdang.

FL40103 AGRIBUSINESS AND MARKETING OF PLANTATION PRODUCTS

This course will focus on the ordinary business in agriculture, farming and agricultural marketing. It involves all

operations from the production and distribution of agricultural supplies, production and storage operations,

processing, marketing and distribution of commodities and farm products.

References Kotler, P. & Armstrong, G. 2016. Principles of Marketing 16th Edition. Pearson Education, Harlow. Doole, I. & Lowe, R. 2012. International Marketing Strategy 6th Edition. Cengage Learning. Gibson, E., Rosenzweig, M. & Corum, V. 2001. The New Farmers’ Market. New world Publishing: Auburn, California, USA Richard, L.K. & Joseph, N.U. 2001. Marketing of Agricultural Products. Prentice Hall: New Jersey, USA Ricketts, C. & Rawlins, O. 2001. Introduction to Agribusiness. Delmar, Thomson Learning: New York, USA

FL40212 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Practical attachment is a 24-week attachment with related industrial sector and stakeholder. Students were exposed to planning, operational and management processes of the company or organization.

References

Gospel, H.F. 2010. Industrial Training and Technological Innovation. A Comparative and Historical Study. New

York Routledge

Bosch, G. and Charest, J. 2009. Vocational Training International Perspectives. Routledge Studies in

Employment and Work Relatives in Context. New York Routledge

Hahn-Schilling, B. 2004. The Professional Demands for Graduates of School of International Tropical Forestry:

An Employer Survey in the Forest Sector of Sarawak. Consultancy Report No.3. Malaysian-German Forestry

Education Project. Kota Kinabalu.

Kleine, M. 2004. Strategic Orientation for the Development of a Field-Based Practical Training Concept at the

School of International Tropical Forestry. Consultancy Report No.2. Malaysian-German Forestry Education

Project. Kota Kinabalu.

Kolert, W. and Tay, J. 2004. Proposal of a New Practical Training Concept for the School of International

Tropical Forestry (SITF). Working Paper 2. Malaysian-German Forestry Education Project. Kota Kinabalu.

Trockenbrodt, M. 2003. Career Prospects and Professional Demand for Graduates of the School of

International Tropical Forestry. Consultancy Report No.1. Malaysian-German Forestry Education Project.

Kota Kinabalu.

FL40303 AGRICULTURE CROP AND FOREST PLANTATION IN THE TROPICS

This course will explain to the students about aspects of agricultural crops and forest plantations in tropical

country as a whole and the types of agricultural, plant species and forest plantation species. Planting system

practices and the main produce of agriculture and forestry plantation. Other than that, integrated farming such

as aquaculture and livestock farming is also discussed.

References

Pfaf, O. 2016. Basics of successful agriculture in the tropics: Basic guideline for ecologic organic gardening in tropical and subtropical climate. CreateSpace Independent


Publishing PlatformAcquaah, G. 2005. Principles Crop Production: Theory, Techniques and Technology. 2nd

Edition. Prentice Hall

Evans, J. and Turnbull J. W. 2004. Plantation forestry in the tropics: the role, silviculture, and use of planted

forests for industrial, social, environmental, and agroforestry purposes. Oxford University Press.

Evans, J. 2009. Planted Forests: Uses, Impacts and Sustainability. CABI, - Nature .224 pages

Hülsebusch, C. 2007. Organic agriculture in the tropics and subtropics: current status and perspectives.

Kassel university press GmbH. 166 pages

Nicholls, H A A., 2009. A Text-Book of Tropical Agriculture. BiblioBazaar, LLC.

Wilcox, E.V., 2008. Tropical Agriculture; The Climate, Soils, Cultural Methods, Crops, Live Stock, Commercial

Importance and Opportunities of the Tropics. Nature.

Willis, J. C. 2010. Agriculture in the Tropics: An Elementary Treatise. CUP Archive. 302 pages

FL40503 INTEGRATED FARM MANAGEMENT

This course will introduce the management practices of forestry plants species integrated with crops,

vegetables, livestock, chickens and fresh water fish. Self-sufficiency system for forest entrepreneur and

agriculture recycle waste for organic fertilizer, fish and livestock substance will be emphasised. Agro-tourism

and recreation element are also included in this course.

References Nandwani, D. 2016. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture. Springer International Publishing Switzerland. Hassey, C. 2016. Farm Management. Syrawood Publishing House. Ma, B.L. 2016. Crop Rotations: Farming Practices, Monitoring and Environmental

Benefits. Nova Science Publishers Incorporated.

Bationo, A., Waswa, B., Kihara, J. and Kimetu, J. (Eds.). 2007. Advances in Integrated Soil Fertility

Management in Sub-Saharan Africa. Springer, Netherlands..

Charles Francis. (Ed.). 2009. Organic Farming: The Ecological System. Agronomy Monograph 54. American

Society of Agronomy, Inc.

Fish, R., Seymour, S., Watkins, C. and Steven, M. (Eds.). 2008. Sustainable Farmland Management: New

Transdisciplinary Approaches. CAB International.

Rajinder Peshin and Dhawan, A.K. 2009. Integrated Pest Management: Innovation-Development Process.

Springer Science. Russell, A.J.M., Grotz, P.A., Kriesemer, S.K. and Pemsl, D.E. 2008. Recommendation Domains

for Pond Aquaculture. Country Case Study: Development and Status of Freshwater Aguaculture in Malawi.

WorldFish Center Studies and Reviews

No. 1869. The WorldFish Center, Penang, Malaysia.

FL40903 PROJECT II

This course is a continuation of the FL30803 I Project to be undertaken by each student to meet the needs of

the Bachelor of Science in Forestry (Forest Plantation and Agroforestry). In this course, each student is

required to present a progress report, writing a thesis, and final presentation (viva). Students are assessed on

project implementation.

References

Mahmud Sudin. 2009. Panduan Penulisan Tesis & Disertasi. Sekolah Perhutanan Tropika Antarabangsa,


Christensen, L. B. 1994. Experimental Methodology. Allyn and Bacon. London

Field, A. P. and Hole, G. 2003. How to Design and Report Experiments. Sage Publications Ltd., London.

Hoshman, A. R. 1994. Experimental Research Design and Analysis: A Practical Approach for Agricultural


Richardson, S., Balachander Krishnan Guru, Cheng Ming Yu, Khong Kok Wei & Leo Pointon. 2005. How To

Research - A Guide for Undergraduate & Graduate Students.Thomson. Malaysia.

Sidek Mohd Noah. 2002. Reka Bentuk Penyelidikan: Falsafah, Teori dan Praktis. Universiti Putra Malaysia. Serdang. WOOD TECHNOLOGY AND INDUSTRY PROGRAMME (HY11)

FK10102 FOREST RESOURCE ECONOMICS

This course covers the principles of economic and concepts such as forest resource assessment of the price

market, rate of return analysis, the net present value, and cost-benefit ratio. Supply and demand of timber

products such as from even age forest and value of stumpage involved in the harvesting process will also be

emphasised. The course will also emphasize the contribution of forestry sector in the economy to the nation and

internationally.

References

Abdul Hamid Mar Iman and Mohd. Shahwahid Othman. 2005 Penilaian Sumber & Harta Tanah Hutan.


Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, Skudai

Kant, S., and Berry, R. Albert. 2005. Economics, Sustainability and Natural Resources: Economics of

Sustainable Forest Management (Sustainability, Economics and Natural Resources). Springer-Verlag, USA

Klemperer, W. D. 2003. Forest Resource Economics and Finance, New Edition. McGraw-Hill,

USA Tietenberg, T., and Lewis, L. 2008. Environment and Natural Resource Economics.

Addison Wesley, USA. Ward, Frank. 2005. Environmental and Natural Resource Economics.

Pearson, USA.

FK10202 INTRODUCTION TO MAIN FOREST PRODUCTS

The course introduces students to the main economically important forest products in Malaysia, such as:

particle board, medium density fibre board, oriented strand board, cement bonded particle board,

moulded/extruded/flat pressed products, pulp and paper, and other wood composites. Essential non-wood

products such as bamboo, rattan and medicinal herbs will also be discussed. Emphasize is given on the

inherent properties of the material as well as the manufacturing processes involved in the up and downstream

production.

References

Anon, 2004. Tumbuhan Liar: Khasiat ubatan & kegunaan lain. Utusan Publication & Distributions Sdn. Bhd.

Chang, Y. S., Vimala, S., Mazura, M. P. and Ong, B.K.. 2004. Current Trends and Perspetives: Proceedings of the

Seminars on Medicinal & Aromatic Plants. Forest Research Institute Malaysia.

Gomez, R.S. 2003. Amazing Power of Healing Plants. Inter-American Division Publishing Association. 2nd

Edition June 2003.

Razak, W., Othman, S. and Hashim, W.S. 2009. Rattan Processing and Transformation Industry in Malaysia.

FK10403 WOOD SCIENCE

This course explains about the anatomical structure of hardwood and softwood, physical properties,

elastomechanical properties, chemical content, defects, deterioration and natural durability of wood. This

course also discusses about the effect of silviculture treatment on wood properties. This course also

elaborates on anatomical structure and properties of bamboo and rattan. Laboratory practical involves

hands-on training on anatomical structure study, commercial wood identification, including bamboo and

rattan.

References

Anon. 1999. Wood Handbook – Wood as an engineering material. Gen. Tech. Rep. FPL-GTR-113.

Madison, WI: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service, Forest Products Laboratory. 463p.

Bowyer, J.L., Shmulsky, R. and Haygreen, J. G. 2007. Forest Products and Wood Science, 5th Edition. Blackwell

Publising Ltd.

United Kingdom.

Rowell, R.M. (Editor). 2005. Handbook of Wood Chemistry and Wood Composites. CRC Press. USA.

Nair, M.N.B. 1998. Wood Anatomy and Major Uses of Wood. Faculty of Forestry. Universiti Putra Malaysia.

Selangor Nobuchi,

T. and Mohd. Hamami Sahri (Eds). 2008. The Formation of Wood in Tropical Forest Trees: A Challenge from

the Perspective of Functional Wood Anatomy. Universiti Putra Malaysia. Serdang

FK20103 ADVANCED WOOD SCIENCE

This course explains about the wood formation, ultrastructure and characteristics of wood. The

explanation of wood formation includes the primary and secondary growth in tree stem. Discussion about the

ultrastructure explains the detail structure of fibre/tracheid cell. This course also elaborates and discusses

about the physical and mechanical properties of wood, and relates the properties to wood end uses. This course

also explains the anatomical structure, function and uses of bark. The laboratory practical is hands-on training on

detail anatomical structure study, fibre morphology and properties, and also on physical and elastomechanical

properties tests based on standard.

References

Anon. 1999. Wood Handbook – Wood as an engineering material. Gen. Tech. Rep. FPL-GTR-113. Madison, WI:

U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service, Forest Products Laboratory. 463p.

Bowyer, J.L., Shmulsky, R. and Haygreen, J. G. 2007. Forest Products and Wood Science, 5th Edition.

Blackwell Publishing Ltd. United Kingdom.

Rowell, R.M. (Editor). 2005. Handbook of Wood Chemistry and Wood Composites. CRC Press. USA.

Nair, M.N.B. 1998. Wood Anatomy and Major Uses of Wood. Faculty of Forestry. Universiti Putra Malaysia.

Selangor Nobuchi, T. and Mohd. Hamami Sahri (Eds). 2008. The Formation of Wood in Tropical Forest Trees:

A Challenge from the

Perspective of Functional Wood Anatomy. Universiti Putra Malaysia.


FK20302 NON-WOOD FIBRE RESOURCES

This course emphasises on types of lignocellulosic fibres from agriculture waste e.g. paddy straw, oil palm, and

non-wood products, e.g. rattan and bamboo. The non-wood fibre is important as an alternative to wood resource

due to the scarcity of timber supply nowadays. Therefore, this course emphasises on the utilisation of the non-

wood fibres for the production of composite boards, pulp and paper. This course elaborates on the process of

producing composite boards, pulp and paper from non-wood fibres. Factors that are affecting the properties of

these products are also discussed in this course.

References

Anon. 2004. Tumbuhan Liar: Khasiat ubatan & kegunaan lain.

Beer, J.H. de and McDermott, M.J. 1996. The economic value of non-timber forest products in Southeast Asia.

Amsterdam

: Netherlands Committee for IUCN.

Jalaluddin Harun et. al. (eds.) 1994. Utilisation of oil palm tree: Oil palm residues (1994). Forest Research

Institute Malaysia.

Kuala Lumpur

Razak Wahab. 2006. Penanaman dan pemerosesan dalam penggunaan buluh. Universiti Malaysia Sabah. 121

pp.

Razak, W., Othman, S. and Hashim, W.S. 2010. Rattan Processing and Transformation Industry in Malaysia.

Universiti Malaysia Sabah. 148pp.

Yaakub, J., Maryati, M. and Mary, S. 1998. Sustainable utilisation of on-timber forest products issues and prospects.


FK20502 FOREST RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

This course will give exposure to students of Wood Technology and Industry on the system of forest

management in Malaysia and overseas. This course will also discuss the development of Forest Resource

Management in Malaysia from the colonial era to date. System and the latest concept in Forest Resource

Management will also be discussed such as Reduce Impact Logging (RIL), Carbon Trading and the Life Cycle

Analysis. Forestry policy in Malaysia will also be discussed with an emphasis on policy such as Forest Reserve

Gazette, Export and Import Policy of the logs.

References

FAO, 2009. State of the World Forest 2009. Rome

FAO, 2007. Global Forest Resources Assessment 2005. Rome

FAO. 1998. Guidelines for the management of tropical forests. 1. The Production of wood. FAO Forestry Paper.

Fruehwald,

A. and Solberg,B. 1995. Life-cycle analysis- A challenge for forestry and Forest Industry. European

Forest Institute Proceedings No.8. EFI, Joensuu.

ITTO. 1990. ITTO Guidelines for the sustainable management of natural tropical forests. Yokohama. Viana.

V.(eds) 1996.

Certification of Forest Products: Issue and Perspectives. Island Press

FK20203 WOOD CHEMISTRY

This course will enhance students' knowledge in depth about the importance and the main function of the main

components of wood. Theory and the techniques applied in this course helps students in making a final year

research project. Topics include introduction to carbohydrate of wood, lignocellulosic of wood, wood chemical

content of the separation process, the pulp bleaching process, the removal of lignin and cellulose

procurement process through chemical cross-links. Chemical-based products of wood are also discussed. This

course provides practical training and skills for the separation of the components and calculation of chemical

composition of wood.

References

Rowell, R.M., 1994. Kimia Kayu Padu. Diterjemahkan oleh Suhaimi Muhammed dan Halimahton Hj. Mansor.

Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Rowe, J.W., 1989. Natural Products of Woody Plants I. Chemical Extraneous to Lignocellulosic Cell Wall. Springer.

Germany.

Rowe, J.W., 1989. Natural Products of Woody Plants II. Chemical Extraneous to Lignocellulosic Cell Wall.

Springer. Germany.

Sjostrom, E., 1993. Wood Chemistry. Fundamentals and Applications. 2nd Edition. Academic Press, Inc. California. Sjostrom,

E. and Raimo, A., 1999. Analytical Methods in Wood Chemistry, Pulping and Papermaking. Springer. Germany


FK20403 ADHESIVE AND COATING

The course discusses features of adhesive and coating with reviews on the historical development of adhesive,

describes the various categories of adhesive, highlights the theories or mechanisms of adhesion, explores

the testing of adhesive joints, as well as discussion on the applications of adhesive and coating in wood-based

industry.

References

Franz F.P. Kollmann & Wilfred A.Jr. Cote. 2012.Principles of Wood Science and Technology: I Solid Wood,

Springer Berlin Heidelberg.ISBN 3642879306, 592 pages

Adams, R.D. 2005. Adhesive Bonding: Science Technology and Applications. Woodhead Publishing Limited.

Bulian, F. and Graystone, J.A. 2009. Wood Coatings: Theory and Practice. Elsevier.

Coyard, H., Deligny, P. and Tuck, N. 2001. Resin for Surface Coatings. Volume I (2nd edition). John Wiley and

Sons with Sita Technology Limited.

Kinloch, A.J. 1995. Adhesion and Adhesives: Science and Technology. Chapman & Hall.

Pizzi, A and Mittal, K.L. 1994. Handbook of Adhesive Technology. Marcel Dekker, Inc. Rowell, R.M. 2005.

Handbook of Wood Chemistry and Wood Composites. Taylor and Francis. Skeist, I. 1990. Handbook of

Adhesives. Third edition. Chapman and Hall.

Wicks, Z.W., Jones, F.N. and Pappas, S.P. 1992. Organic Coatings: Science and Technology. Volume I: Film

Formation, Components and Appearance. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

FK20603 WOOD DETERIORATION AND WOOD QUALITY ENHANCEMENT

This course explains the deterioration of wood (which consists of cellulose, hemicelluloses and lignin) after

exposed to the environment. This course also discuss the factors that influence deterioration of wood

involving wood destroying agents such as fungi, bacteria and insects (for examples wood boring insects and

termites) that destroy timber either in green wood or finished products. External factors such as fire and

weathering process that can cause deterioration of wood will also be discussed. This course also discusses on

methods for improving the performance of wood to prevent the wood from attacks of deteriorating agents.

Treatment methods emphasised in this course are divided into two categories namely the wood preservation

and wood drying. Wood preservation includes the use of wood preserving chemicals, while the wood drying is to

reduce the moisture content of the wood.This course involves laboratory practical training on techniques and

preservation treatment and wood drying techniques. Case studies and academic visits will be undertaken to

improve the understanding of the skills and effectiveness of the wood treatment.

References

Barry, G., Darrel D.N. and Schultz, T.P. 2003. Wood Deterioration and Preservation: Advances in Our Changing World.

Oxford University Press.

Haygreen, J. G., Bowyer, J. L. and Shmulsky, J. L.. 2003. Forest Products and Wood Science: An Introduction,

4th edition. Ames: Iowa State University press.

Palmer, C. P., Nicholas, D. D. and Schultz, T. P. (eds.). 2003. Wood Deterioration and Preservation. London: Oxford

University Press

Raymond V. A. 2008. Preservative Treatment of Wood Poles. Published by READ

BOOKS. Walker, J. F. C. 1993. Primary Wood Processing and Practice. London:

Chapman & Hall.

Willeitner, H. and Liese, W. 1992 Wood Protection in Tropical Countries. A Manual on the Know-How.

Schriftenreihe der GTZ no. 227.

FK20803 PRIMARY WOOD PROCESSING

Wood processing that will be discussed includes the utilisation of wood material which are turned into

sawn timber, finger-joint lumber, laminated board, wood moulding, door frame, door and other solid wood

products. In this course, technical skills in log and wood volume calculation, as well as wood machining

techniques will be explained. This course also discusses about machines and tools usage and maintenance in

wood processing. This course also emphasizes on the factors such as wood properties and wood processing

technology considered in wood processing. The laboratory practical provides students with technical skills in

wood machining and processing, machine operating, and machine and tools maintenance. Academic visits

to sawmills or wood processing mills will be conducted as an exposure for the students.

References

Anon. 2010. Wood Handbook: Wood as an Engineering Material. USDA Forest Service. Madison.

Bowyer, J.L., R. Shmulsky and J.G. Haygreen. 2007. Forest Products and Wood Science: An Introduction.

edition. Blackwell Pub.

Hough, R.B. and Sargent, C.S. 2007. The Woodbook. Taschen GmbH. Cologne.

Rowell, R.M. (ed.) 2007. Handbook of Wood Chemistry and Wood Composites. 1st ed. CRC Press.


London. Walker, J.C.F. 2009. Primary Wood Processing: Principles and Practice. 2nd edition. Springer.

Netherlands.

FK30103 INTRODUCTION TO FURNITURE DESIGN

This course introduces the students about technical drawings and wood furniture design using AUTOCAD

Software or manually. Elaboration on wood furniture design includes furniture specification, calculation, wood

species selection, types of wood furniture design, types of joints and quantitative aspects. In quantitative

aspects, explanation includes the wood furniture design and costs. This course also discusses about the key

strategies and guidelines in wood furniture design. The laboratory practical in this course involves technical

training on preparing wood furniture design and academic visits will be conducted to furniture factories as an

exposure for the students.

References

Anon. 2009. Practical Furniture Design: From Drawing Board to Smart Construction. Fine

Woodworking & Fine Homebuilding. Taunton Press. USA. 268pp.

Blaser, W. 1992. Joint and Connection: Ideas in Furniture Design and Their Background. Birkhausen Verlag.

Basel. 179p. Byars, M. 2001. The Best Tables, Chairs, Lights: Innovation and Invention in Design

Products for the Home.

Crans-Pres-Celigny. Switzerland. 448p.

Fine Woodworking (Editor). 2000. Practical Design Solutions and Strategies. Taunton Press. 192p.

Fine Woodworking (Editor). 2000. Practical Design Solutions and Strategies: Key Advice for Sound Construction

from Fine Woodworking. Taunton Press. 185p.

Fine Woodworking (Editor). 2003. In The Modern Style: Building Furniture Inspired by the 20th Century

Tradition. Taunton Press. 176p.

Fine Woodworking (Editor). 2004. Designing Furniture. The Taunton Press.

USA. Fraser, A. 2005. Getting Started in Woodworking. Taunton Press.

USA. 208pp. Hinchman, M. 2009. History of Furniture: A Global Review.

Fairchild Books. 620pp.

Rae, A., Rogowski, G., Jewitt, J. Bird, L. and Lie-Nielsen, T. 2005. Taunton’s Complete Illustrated Guide to

Woodworking: Improve Your Skills with the Essential Information that Every Woodmaker Needs to Know.

Taunton Press. USA. 320pp.

Schleining, L. 2010. Wood Bending. Taunton Press. USA. 112pp. Willard, R. Furniture Construction. 4th edition.

The FMM Center. NCSU

FK30303 WOOD COMPOSITE PRODUCTS

This course discusses about the background and classification of wood composite products such as

plywood, particleboard, medium density fibreboard, LVL (laminated veneer lumber) and OSB (oriented strand

board). This course focuses on the general processes involve in wood product fabrication which includes the

raw material, adhesives and the technology used. Other than that, characteristics, criteria and the

importance of wood composite products will also be discussed. The laboratory practical provides the

students with technical skill training on methods and technics to wood composite fabrication. Academic visit

to wood composite manufacturing mills will be conducted for the students’ exposure.

References

Baldwin, R. 1995. Plywood and Veneer Based Products. Miller Freeman.

Maloney, T.M. 1993. Modern Particleboard and Dry Process Fibreboard Manufacturing. Miller

Freeman. Rowell, R.M. 2005. Handbook of Wood Chemistry and Wood Composites. Taylor and

Francis.

Skeist, I. 1990. Handbook of Adhesives. (3rd edition). Chapman and Hall.

Shmusky, R.P. and Jones, D.P. 2011. Forest Productions and Wood Science: An Introduction (6th Ed) Wiley-

Blackwell, United Kingdom

Suchsland, O. and Woodson, G.E. 1991. Fibreboard Manufacturing Practices in the United States.

FK30503 PULP AND PAPER TECHNOLOGY

This course explains the concepts of pulp and paper manufacturing by kraft and sulfite process. The course

also discuss about paper density, the physical characteristics and paper strength. The chemical content of

cellulose and lignin in the fibres and the pulp will also be discussed. Factors that affect the characteristics of the

pulp and paper are also emphasised. Discussion on recycle paper, wrapping paper and paper lamina etc will be

emphasised. Comparison between paper industry in Malaysia, ASEAN countries and other countries are also

emphasised in this course. Lab work will be incorporated into the course to train students in producing various

kinds of paper from various strand of fibre and train students to run the test characteristics of paper.


References

Biermann, C. J. 1996. Handbook of Pulping and Papermaking. Academic Press.

Dunbar, J. 2010. Notes on the manufacture of wood pulp and wood-pulp papers. BiblioBazaar. Marshall, P.

2003. From Tree to Paper (Start to Finish Series). Lerner Publishing Group. Smook, G.A 1992. Handbook for

Pulp and Paper Technologists. Tappi Pr Witham, G.S. 2010. Modern Pulp And Paper Making. BiblioBazaar

FK30702 POLICY, LAWS AND REGULATIONS IN WOOD BASED INDUSTRY

This course is an introduction to policies, laws and regulations related to wood-based industries such as

Labour Law (Employees Act 1955, Workmen's Compensation Act 1952, Occupational Safety and Health

Act 1994, Factories and Machinery Act 1967) and the relevant laws of environemnt (Environmental Quality Act

1974). It also discusses the role of law in the management of wood based industries. The course also

discusses the current issues related to tropical timber industry and their implications to the industry. Issues

related to forest certification, timber certification and International Standard Organization (ISO) will also be

discussed.

References

Elliot, C. 1990. The Tropical Forestry Action Plan. WWF International , Gland, Switzerland.

Frutwald, A. and Solberg, B 1995. Life Cycle Analysis- A challenge for Forestry and Forest Industry. EFI

Proceedings No.8.

EFI, Jaensuu. 278pp.

Goh Chen Chuan. 1995. Guide to the Employment Act and the Labour Laws of Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Leeds

Publications. Kamal Halili Hassan.1990. Hubungan Undang-undang Majikan dan Pekerja. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka. Marilyn Aminuddin.1992. Perhubungan Perusahaan di Malaysia. Singapore: Mc Graw Hill

Book Company.

FK30203 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS

This course discusses about the types of engineered wood products, production processes, utilisation and the

advantages based on the design of engineered wood products. Basic knowledge such as structural aspects

which discusses about the properties, characteristics, design criteria, mechanical joints and structure

instalation, e.g. I-Beam, trusses and fasterners, will be emphasised. Factors such as load and weathering that

affect the strength and durability of the engineered wood products will also be discussed. Methods of

inspection, assessment, maintenance and repairment will be explained. In the laboratory practical, study case,

calculation, capacity estimation and potential load bearing of engineered wood will be given to strengthen the

students’ comprehension on engineered wood products.

References

Lorenzo Boccadoro.2016.Timber-concrete Composite Slabs Made of Beech Laminated Veneer Lumber with Notched Connection.

Arthur Lyons.2014.Materials for Architects and Builders.5th Edition.Published by Routledge Taylor & Francis Group.160 pages

Faherty, K.F. and Williamson, T.G. (Eds.), 1995. Wood Engineering Construction Handbook (2nd Edition),

McGraw-Hill Inc. U.S. A.

Freas, A., 1982. Evaluation, Maintenance and Upgrading of Wood Structures, A Guide and Commentary,

American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, U. S. A.

Soltis, L. A., (Ed.), 1996. Mechanical Connections in Wood Structures, ASCE Manuals and Reports on

Engineering Practice No.83, American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, U. S. A.

Thelandersson, S. and Larsen H. J., 2003, Timber Engineering, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., England.

Williamson, T. G. (Ed.), 2002, APA Engineered Wood Handbook, McGraw-Hill Companies Inc.,

New York, U. S. A.

References

Lorenzo Boccadoro.2016.Timber-concrete Composite Slabs Made of Beech Laminated Veneer Lumber with Notched Connection.

Arthur Lyons.2014.Materials for Architects and Builders.5th Edition.Published by Routledge Taylor & Francis Group.160 pages

Faherty, K.F. and Williamson, T.G. (Eds.), 1995. Wood Engineering Construction Handbook (2nd Edition),

McGraw-Hill Inc. U.S. A.

Freas, A., 1982. Evaluation, Maintenance and Upgrading of Wood Structures, A Guide and Commentary,

American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, U. S. A.

Soltis, L. A., (Ed.), 1996. Mechanical Connections in Wood Structures, ASCE Manuals and Reports on

Engineering Practice No.83, American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, U. S. A.

Thelandersson, S. and Larsen H. J., 2003, Timber Engineering, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., England.

Williamson, T. G. (Ed.), 2002, APA Engineered Wood Handbook, McGraw-Hill Companies Inc., New York, U.S.A.


References

Bird L. 2001. The Complete Illustrated Guide to Shaping Wood. The Taunton Press. Italy.

Blaser W. 1992. Joint and Connection: Ideas in Furniture Design and Their Background. Birkhausen Verlag.

Basel. 179p. Bullar, J. 2008. Furniture Making: A Foundation Course. Fax Chapel Publishing. PA. 192pp.

Jewitt, Jeff and Susan Jewitt. 2005. Taunton’s Complete Guide to Finishing. The Taunton Press. Italy.

Joyce, E., Spielman, P. and Peters, A. 2000. Encyclopedia of Furniture Making. Sterling Publishing. New

York. 519pp. Prak, Anco L. and Thomas W. Myers. 2000. Furniture Manufacturing Processes. 3rd edition.

The FMM Center. NCSU Rogowski, Gary. 2005. The Complete Illustrated Guide to Joinery. The Taunton

Press. Italy.

Wellner, M., Mehlhose, A.and Fremdkorpher, A. 2009. Modern Furniture: 150 Years of Furniture Design. H.Fullmann. 800pp

FK30602 MARKETING OF FOREST PRODUCTS

This course focuses on the major aspects of marketing for forest products including the current marketing

practices, methods as well as distribution of forest products to the markets. It will also cover marketing

strategies, product development and marketing, promotions and market research. Recent developments on

marketing and forest products markets such as certification, laws and governance, and local and international

trade regulations will also be emphasised.

References

Armstrong, G. and Kotler, P. 2010. Marketing an Introduction (10th ed). Prentice Hall, USA Kevin, R.A.; Rudelius,

W. and Hartley, S.W.2008. Marketing. McGraw-Hill, USA

Makower, J. and Pike, C. 2008. Strategies for the Green Economy: Opportunities and Challenges in the

New World of Business. McGraw-Hill, USA

Perreault W.D. Jr and McCarthy, E.J. 2006. Essentials of Marketing – A Global-Managerial Approach,

(10th ed.).

McGraw-Hill/Irwin, USA

West, D. C.; Ford, J. and Ibrahim, E. 2010. Strategic Marketing: Creating Competitive Advantage, (2nd ed).

Oxford University Press, Inc., USA

FK30803 PROJECT I

This course is related to the research project to be carried out by the final year students to qualify in the Bachelor

of Forestry Science (Wood Technology and Industry). In this course, students will prepare a research proposal

related to the program that includes objectives, literature review, methodology and research design, gantt chart

and budget spending subsequently presented a papers proposal. Throughout the course, students will perform

laboratory or field work for data collection. At the end of the semester, students will prepare a draft scientific

writing (thesis) of Chapter 1, Chapter 2 and Chapter 3.

References

Anon. 2009. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi dan Tesis. Sekolah Perhutanan Tropika Antarabangsa. Universiti

Malaysia Sabah. Christensen, L.B. 1994. Experimental Methodology. Allyn and Bacon. London.

Coakes, S.J. and Steed, L.G. 2001. SPSS: Analysis without Anguish. Wiley. Australia.

Cox, D.R. and Hole, G. 2003. How to Design and Report Experiments. Sage Publications Ltd., London.

FK40102 TIMBER TRADE

The focus of this course is on trade flow of timber and timber products including non-timber forest products

such as rattan. Students will be exposed to benefits and the volume of trade in timber and timber products, and

major theories that explain why international trade is carried out. In addition, they will also be exposed to trade

patterns, globalisation, as well as the reduction in regulations in international trade. Discussions on entry

strategies into global markets, management of international markets, as well as current trade issues including

trade barriers will also be held.

References

Albaum, G., and Duerr, E.2008. International Marketing and Export Management. Prentice Hall, USA

Baharuddin, H. G and Simula M. 1994. Certification schemes for all timber and timber products.

Yokohama. Baharuddin, H. G. 1995. Timber certification: an overview. Unasylva, 183(46). Rome.

Elliott C., 2000. Forest Certification : A Policy Perspective. Center for International Forestry Research. Jakarta.

Folsom, R.H., Gordon, W. G. and Spanogle, J.A. 2008. International Trade and Economic Relations in a

Nutshell,(4th ed). West Group, USA

Hill, C.W.L. 2010. International Business (8th edition). McGraw_Hill/Irwin, USA

ITTO. 1998. Criteria and indicators for sustainable management of natural tropical forests. ITTO Policy

Development Series No 7, ITTO, Yokohama.

Poschen, P. 2000. Social criteria and indicators for sustainable forest management. A guide to ILO texts. GTZ


Working Paper 3.

Tacconi, L., and Seymour, F. 2007. Illegal Logging – Law Enforcement, Livelihoods and the Timber Trade.

Earthscan, UK. Vogt K.A., Larson B.C., Gordon J.C., Vogt D.J. and Fanzeres A. 2000. Forest Certification.

Root, Issues, Challenges and

Benefits. Yale University.CRC.Press.

Weiss, K.D. 2008. Building an Import/Export Business. John Wiley & Sons, USA

FK40302 WOOD BASED FACTORY MANAGEMENT

This course focuses on efficient management strategies in the management of wood-based industry. The

discussion in this course include, operations at the primary (input) until the final (output) before the products are

marketed. Basic operational management can help achieve objectives, improve productivity and quality in the

factory management is emphasised in this course. Other important topics include namely, the (Master Plan, The

concept of Quality Control and Just-In-Time are also discussed. Case studies will be given to expose and

increase students' knowledge.

References

Baldwin, R.F. 1990. Managing Mill Maintenance. The Emerging Realties. Miller Freeman books. Baldwin, R.F.

1984. Operations Management in the Forest Products Industry. Miller Freeman Books.

Bryan, E.L., and Lang, J.R. 1974. Computerizied Planning for Maximum Profit. Modern Sawmill Technique,

Vol 2. San Francisco : Miller Freeman

Evans, J.R. and Lindsay, W.M. 1998. The Management and Control of Quality. South Western Publisher.

Williams, E.M. 1976 Lumber Manufacturing: The Design and Operations of Sawmill and Planner Mills. San

Francisco: Miller Freeman.

FK40503 MANAGEMENT AND UTILISATION OF BIOMASS

This course discusses the management and utilisation of wood waste from wood-based industries. Wood

wastes and solid wastes will be discussed in the form of semi solid waste and solid waste. In this course, the

discussion will touch on wood waste management method based on reduction, reuse and recycling concept.

Development of new products from wood waste is also emphasised in this course. Practical course is to train

students to produce products from wood waste. Case studies will also be given to expose and increase

students' knowledge on wood waste management.

References

FAO. 2010. Impact of the global forest industry on atmospheric greenhouse gases. Rome. FAO. 2003. Woodfuels

Integrated Supply/Demand overview mapping.

FAO. 2008. Forests and energy. Key issues. Rome.

Rudi D and Fabio, S., 2008. Analysis of Wood energy and urbanization using WISDOM Methodology. FAO,

Rome.

FK40702 SEMINAR: SPECIAL TOPICS IN WOOD INDUSTRY

This course emphasizes on issues related to tropical timber industry and its implications to the local timber

industry. There are discussions on the relevant issues such as the shortcomings of wood supply scenario,

environmental impacts and international timber trade etc. Implementation and amendment of timber policy,

timber certification and the International Standards Organization will also be discussed.

References

Innes, J.L. and Haron, A.H., 2000. Air Pollution and the Forest of Developing and Rapidly Industrializing

Countries. CABI Publishing. IUFRO Research Series 4.

Innes, J.L., Hickey, G.M. and Hoen, H.F. 2005. Forestry and Environmental Change: Socioeconomic

and Political Dimensions. IUFRO Research Series 11, CABI Publishing.

Ismail, H. and Syed Hussain, T.P.R., 2006. Isu-isu Pengurusan Alam Sekitar. Penerbit Universiti Utara

Malaysia, Sintok, Kedah.

Pittock, A.B., 2005. Climate Change. Turning up the heat. CSIRO Publishing. Australia.

Sidle, R.C., 2002. Environmental Changes and Geomorphic Hazards in Forests. Report No. 4 of the IUFRO

Task Force on Environmental Change. IUFRO 9. CABI Publishing

FK40903 PROJECT II

This course is a continuation of the project I FK30803 courses carried out by all final year students. In this

course, students are required to present a progress report on the final year research project, completing the

study and undergo viva (oral examination). In the progress report, the student will report on the results

obtained. In the thesis writing, students will complete a thesis which includes the results, discussion,

conclusions and recommendations. In the oral exam, students will present all the results obtained, including the

discussions, conclusions and recommendations.


References

Anon. 2009. Panduan Penulisan Disertasi dan Tesis. Sekolah Perhutanan Tropika Antarabangsa. Universiti

Malaysia Sabah. Christensen, L.B. 1994. Experimental Methodology. Allyn and Bacon. London.

Coakes, S.J. and Steed, L.G. 2001. SPSS: Analysis without Anguish. Wiley. Australia.

Cox, D.R. and Hole, G. 2003. How to Design and Report Experiments. Sage Publications Ltd., London.

Hoshman, A.R. 1994. Experimental Research Design and Analysis: A Practical Approach for Agricultural


Sidek Mohd Noah. 2002. Rekabentuk Penyelidikan: Falsafah, Teori dan Praktis. Universiti Putra Malaysia. Serdang.

FK40212 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Industrial training is a course related to the student's academic program and learning strategy is based on

experience and problem solving/case studies. Students will conduct industrial training in an outside

organization for 6 months. Industrial training is to expose students to the real working environment. During the

industrial training, students will learn more about the management and processing of wood in the timber

industry, through its experience applying the theory and technical skills in daily works and tasks. The training

will be undertaken is relevant to the activities of the organization that includes management, marketing, wood

processing and research. Students are also exposed to soft skills in work situations

References

Bosch, G. and Charest, J. 2009. Vocational Training International Perspectives. Routledge Studies in

Employment and Work Relatives in Context. New York Routledge

Gospel, H.F. 2010. Industrial Training and Technological Innovation. A Comparative and Historical Study. New

York Routledge.

Hahn-Schilling, B. 2004. The Professional Demands for Graduates of School of International Tropical Forestry:

An Employer Survey in the Forest Sector of Sarawak. Consultancy Report No.3. Malaysian-German Forestry

Education Project. Kota Kinabalu.

Kleine, M. 2004. Strategic Orientation for the Development of a Field-Based Practical Training Concept at the

School of International Tropical Forestry. Consultancy Report No.2. Malaysian-German Forestry Education

Project. Kota Kinabalu.

Kolert, W. and Tay, J. 2004. Proposal of a New Practical Training Concept for the School of International

Tropical Forestry (SITF). Working Paper 2. Malaysian-German Forestry Education Project. Kota Kinabalu.

Trockenbrodt, M. 2003. Career Prospects and Professional Demand for Graduates of the School of

International Tropical Forestry. Consultancy Report No.1. Malaysian-German Forestry Education Project.

Kota Kinabalu.

ELECTIVE COURSES

FX20103 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOREST ENTOMOLOGY

This course will expose students on the fundamentals of insect science and study. Students will be taught about

methods in identification and insect biology by introducing important insect groups in the forest ecosystem based

on its habitat and feeding group. Interaction of human and insects in the environment will also be discussed.

Emphasize will be given towards diagnosis of the effect of insect pests towards forest trees, landscape trees and

forest resources. At the end of the course, students will learn how to manage and control insect pests of

economic importance.

References

Ciesla, W.M. 2011. Forest Entomology: A Global Perspective. Wiley-Blackwell, UK

Edmonds, R.L. Agee, J.K. and Gara, R.I. 2011. Forest Health and Protection (2nd. Ed.) Waveland Press, Inc.

USA.

Gullan, P.J. & Cranston, P.S. 2010. The Insects: An Outline of Entomology 4th ed. Wiley-Blackwell, UK.

Hill, D.S. & Fatimah Abang, 2005. The Insects of Borneo. UNIMAS, Malaysia.

Kirby, W. 2015. An Introduction to Entomology: or Elements of tna National History of Insects. Forgotten Books,

USA.

Tomberlin, J.K. and Benbow, M.E. 2015. Forensic Entomology International Dimensions and Frontiers. CRC

Press, New York.

Vega, F.E. and Hofstetter, R.W. (eds.) 2015. Bark Beetles Biology and Ecology of Native and Invasive Species.

Academic Press, U.K.

Other references

Dent, D. 2000. Insect Pest Management, 2nd. Ed. CABI Publishing, UK.

Leather, S.(ed). 2005. Insect Sampling in Forest Ecosystem. Blackwell Publishing, UK.


FX20203 INTRODUCTION TO PLANT DISEASE MANAGEMENT

In this course, students will be taught to identify microb pathogens and classify plant disease at the

nursery, forest ecosystem and post-harvest level. The basic concept is based on the Disease triangle.

Simptoms of diseases caused by either biotic or abiotic agents will be discussed in depth. Strategic

management will include aspects in avoidance innoculum, authority policies (quarantine of materials, border

control between regions), application of chemical materials, as well as biological control.

References

Agrios, G.N., 2005. Plant Pathology (5th ed.). New York: Academic press. USA. 922 pp.

Cochrane, M.A., 2009. Tropical Fire Ecology: Climate Change, Land Use and Ecosystem Dynamics.

Springer Praxis Publishing Uk. 682 pp.

Dighton, J., White, J.F. and Ondemans, P., 2005. The Fungal Community: Its Organization and Role in the

Ecosystem. 3rd Eds. CRC Press. 936 pp.

Nation, J.L., 2008. Insect Physiology and Biochemistry 2nd. Ed. CRC Press, USA. Omi, P.N., 2005. Forest Fires.

ABC-CLIO, UK. 347 pp.

Sharma, H.C., 2008. Biotechnological Approaches for Pest Management and Ecological Sustainability.

International Crops Research Institute, Andhra Pradesh, India.

FX20303 NATURE INTERPRETATION

Interpretation is defined as a process of communication that forms emotional and intellectual connections

between the interests of the audience and the inherent meanings in the natural resource. In this course, student

will be introduced the meaning of interpretation, its principles, tools and practices. This includes the principle of

effective interpretive and guiding skills. Students will also learn on how interpretation skills is applied in delivering

or planning talks and guiding tours, interact with visitors and help them understand exhibits at site, or to present

educational programs associated with a specific site.

References Berk, L., and Cable, T. (2002). Interpretation for the 21st century: Fifteen guiding principles for interpreting nature

and culture, 2nd ed. Sagamore Publishing, USA

Brochu, L., Merriman, T. (2008). Personal interpretation: Connecting your audience to heritage resources,

2ndedt. National Association for Interpretation, USA.

Ham, S.H. (1992). Environmental interpretation. Fulcrum Publishing, Golden, CO, USA.

Sharpe, G. W. (1976). Interpreting the environment. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, New York.

FX20403 FORESTERS KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS

As a forester, the respected individual is always involved in outdoor activities such as camping in a forest,

scientific expedition, exploration and forest operation which engage the application of foresters’ knowledge and

skills in the completion of such tasks. These tasks require particular psychomotor skills with attitude and self-

esteem that is needed in a forester. The course will emphasize on embedding the forester knowledge through

theoretical learning in classroom and theory application through practical and field operation. Students will be

taught on knowledge and skills of survival, safety and outdoor’s first aid and camping skills. Other than that,

special skills for forester such as swimming, tree climbing and usage of forest operation equipments such as tree

felling equipment and navigation (GPS, compass and map) will be taught through practical and series of skill

tests. Mechanism to inculcate the forester attitude and self-esteem will be accomplished by theory and

discussion as well as assignment and group project.

References Davenport, G.J. 2006. Wilderness Survival. Stackepole Books. ISBN: 978-0-8817-3. McNab, M. 2008. Special Forces Survival Guide: Wilderness Survival Skills from the World's Most Elite Military Units. Ulysses Press. ISBN: 9781569756720 O'Leary, J. 2010. The Wilderness Survival Guide: The Practical Skills You Need for the Great Outdoors. Watkins. ISBN: 9781907486043 Pewtherer, M. 2010. Wilderness Survival Handbook: Primitive Skills for Short-Term Survival and Long Term Comfort. The Mc-Graw Hill Company. ISBN: 978-0-07-174304-4. Randy, G. 2010. Outdoor Survival Guide. Human Kinetics. ISBN: 9780736086196. Other references Hawkins, P. 2004. Map And Compass: The Art Of Navigation 2004. Cicerone Press. ISBN: 1852843942 Jacobson, C. 2005. Basic Essentials Camping: 3rd. Falcon Publication. ISBN- 978-0762738083. Fears, W.J. 1999. The Complete Book of Outdoor Survival: Revised Edition. Krause Publications. ISBN:0-87341-849-2.


FX20503 ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES

This course introduces students to the fundamentals of financial accounting and management accounting.

Theory and techniques used in the preparation and interpretation of financial statements are consistent and

generally accepted in accounting principles. Topic includes accounting for cash, account receivables, payroll,

inventories, fixed assets, current liabilities and owners' equity. Other topic includes the accrual basis of

accounting, accounting cycle, preparation of financial statements for business services and trade industries and

internal controls.

References

Betsy, L., Tan, S.K. and Goh, L.C. 2010. Principles of Accounts, 5th Edition, Marshall Cavendish Education.

Garrison, R.H., Noreen, W.E. and Brewer, P.C., 2008. Managerial Accounting. 12th Edition. McGraw-Hill

International Edition. Hall, J.A. and Bennett, P.E., 2008. Accounting Information Systems. Edition. Business andEconomics Lehigh University. South-Western Cengage Learning Horngren, C.T., Sundem, G.L., Stratton, W.O., Burgstahler, D. and Schatzberg, J., 2008. Introduction to Management Accounting. 14th Edition. Chapter 1-17. Pearson. Prentice Hall. Pearson Education International. Shaari Isa. 2007. Accounting Principles. 2nd Edition. Pearson. Prentice Hall. Pearson Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.

Weygandt, Jerry J,; Kieso, D.E. and Kimmel, P.D. 2010. Accounting Principles, 9th Edition, John Wiley and

Sons, Inc.

FX20603 PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MANAGEMENT

This course is the framework for students to learn about the principles and practices of management.

Management is the process of planning, organising, leading, and controlling of tasks by all in the organisation

using all available resources in order to achieve the organisation’s goals. This course emphasises on how

organisations are managed, and the way managers can assist their organisation in attaining and achieving its

goals. Focus will be on formal organisations producing products and services for their customers.

References

Daft, R.L. 2010. New Era of Management (9th edition). South-Western Cengage Learning, USA

Khaliq Ahmad. 2005. Malaysian Management Styles: Policy, Practice and Human Resource. Asean Academic

Press, UK. Mauch, P. D. 2010. Quality Management: Theory and Application. Taylor and Francis, USA.

Robbins, S.R., DeCenzo D.A. and Coulter, M. 2011. Fundamentals of Management, Seventh Edition. Pearson

Education, Inc., USA

Williams, C. and McWilliams, A. 2010. MGMT, 1st Asia-Pacific Edition. Cengage Learning AustraliaPty Limited,

Australia.

FX20803 EVALUATION AND PLANNING OF RURAL COMMUNITY

Forestry, agroforestry and the economic activities, which provide benefits to the community, are crucial for rural

community development. The profiles of rural communities, which are composed of a variety of ethnic groups

with distinct socio-economic systems and cultural values. Rural development comprises a decentralized and

inter-sectoral approach that involves different government authorities, planners and rural people to develop and

implement activities to sustainably improve the living conditions in rural areas. This course attempt to relate the

roles of forestry and forest resources, which contributing various direct and indirect benefits to the rural

community.

References

Neus, E., Michelle, L., & Komla, T. 2015. A Systematic Review of Rural Development Research: Characteristics, design quality and engagement with sustainability. Springer.

Kelly, E.D. 2010. Community Planning: An Introduction To The Comprehensive Plan. Island Press. ISBN: 978-1-59726-553-9.

Larson, A.N., Barry, D., Dahal, G.R., & Colfer, C.J.P. 2010. Forests for People: Community Rights and Forest Tenure Reform. Earthscan. ISBN: 978-1-84407-971-9.

Phillips, R. & Pittman, R. H. 2009. An Introduction to Community Development. Routledge. ISBN: 978-0-415-77384-3.

Taylor. R. D., & Torquebiau, E. (2010). Natural Resource Mangement and Local Development (Topics in Biodiversity and Conservation). Springer.

FX30103 FOREST RESTORATION

Forest restoration is the process of assisting the recovery of forest ecosystem that has been degraded,

damaged, or destroyed. The ultimate goal is to restore degraded forest to its original form by applying

ecological principles which blends biological, social and natural resource management science. In this course,


students will be familiarized with the science and practice of restoration ecology. Students will be given

experiential learningby working in small groups in defining realistic restoration goals and objectives as well as

in developing monitoring plans and procedures.

References

Carson, W and Schnitzer, S. 2008. Tropical Forest Community Ecology. Blackwell Publishing. USA.

Clewell, A. and Aronson, J. 2008. Ecological Restoration: Principles, Values, and Structure of an Emerging

Profession. Island Press, Washington.

Jelte van Andel and Aronso, J. 2005. Restoration Ecology: The New Frontier. Blackwell Publishing. USA.

Kimmins, J.P. 2004. Forest Ecology: a foundation for sustainable forest management and environmental ethics.

Prentice Hall. Newton, A. 2007. Forest Ecology and Conservation: A Handbook of Techniques. Oxford University

Press. New York.

FX30203 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

This course will expose the students to human management aspect as a source that need to be managed and

developed in line with knowledgeable workers concept. Human management is related to daily task and

strategic human management in the work place, as a resource and industrial relation in terms of legal

framework and workers union movement. It also consists of global changes in current management to

compete and gain trade benefit.

References

Dessler, G. 2008. Human Resource Managemet (11th Edition). Pearson Prentice Hall.

Raymond, N., Andrew, R., John, H., Gerhart, B. and Wright, P.M. 2009. Human Resource Management.

Edition, McGraw-Hill.

Robbins, S. and Judge, T. 2007. Essentials of Organizational Behaviour, 9th Edition. Prentice Hall, New

Jersey. Robbins, S. and Coulter, M. 2006. Management, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Snell, S. and Bohlander, G. 2010. Principles of Human Resource Management, Edition. South-Western, Cengage Learning.

FX30303 CLIMATE AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

This course discusses on topics such as climate change phenomenon and its impact based on the current

scenario. In the beginning of the course, students will be introduced to what is weather, climate and methods in

meteorological data monitoring and data interpretation. Green house phenomenon, desertification, policy and

climate change framework and REDD mechanism will also be discussed.

References

Adam Markham. (ed.). 2010. Potential impacts of climate change on tropical forest ecosystems. Kluwer

Academic Publishers.

Aung, T.H., Madihah, J. S., Ejria, S. and Muhammad Ali, S. H. 2013. Atmosphere and Ocean : An Introduction

to Marine Science. Kota Kinabalu Sabah : Penerbit Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

Barry R.G. and Chorey R.J. 2010. Atmosphere, weather and climate. 9th Edition. Routledge.

Felipe Bravo, Valerie Le May, Robert Jandl and Klaus von Gadow. 2010. Managing forest ecosystems : The

challenge of climate change. Springer.

Stanturf, J.A., Kant, P., Lilleso, J.B., Mansourian, Kleine, M., Graudal, L. and Madsen, P. 2015. Forest

Landscape Restoration as a Key Component of Climate Change Mitigation

and Adaptation. IUFRO World Series Volume 34. Vienna : IUFRO.

FX30403 ENVIRONMENTAL LAND USE PLANNING

This course discusses the legal framework and related processes based on the ability of land use planning and

consideration of environmental functions. The aspects discussed are the important of soil as a natural resource

to the country, methods of land use management, Land use decisionmaking process is participatory, policies and

laws related. Applications using GIS technology is also being emphasized.

References

Panigrahi, M. 2014. Computing in Geographic Information Systems. CRC Press.

Phua, M. H., 2008. GIS: A Practical Approach. UMS Publisher, Kota Kinabalu.

Randolph J. 2004. Environmental Land Use and Management. Island Press, Washington DC.

Silberstein J & C Maser. 2013. Land Use Planning for Sustainable Development. CRC Press.


Jones, C. B. 1997. Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography.

Routledge.


FX30503 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

This course focuses on introduction of financial decision-making process in corporate’s financial and value

added to a firm. This course also provides knowledge about the concept and financial theory, short-term and

long-term financial management, evaluation concept, and cost of capital, financial methods and the impact on the

evaluation of capital structure and cash flows of the project. This course also focuses on the finance function,

dividend policy, risk, analysis of financial problem and evaluation of capital asset pricing.

References

Brighman, E.F., Houston, J.F., Chiang, Y.M., Lee, H.S. and Ariffin, B., 2010. Essentials of Financial

Management. Second Edition. Chapter 1-21. Cencage Learning.

Keown, A. J., Martin, J.D., Petty, J.W. and Scott Jr, D.F., 2011. Foundation of Finance: The Logic and Practice

of Financial Management. Seventh Edition. Pearson Education. Prentice Hall. Pearson International Edition.

Ng, K.K., Zhang, W., Maran, M. and Sandeep, B., 2010. Financial Management. Oxford University Press. Oxford

Fajar Sdn. Bhd.

Philips, F., Libby, R. and Libby, P. 2010. Fundamental of Financial Accounting. Second Edition. McGraw-Hill

(Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

Shapiro, A.C., 2010. Multinational Financial Management. Ninth Edition. Wiley. John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pte. Ltd.

FX30603 INDUSTRIAL RELATION

This course gives the introduction, concept and value of industrial relation in organisation, and discuss the

industrial relation formation/development related to workers union, strategy and process in industrial relation

between employer and employee. This course also will discuss on the definition, formation, structure,

characteristics, function, rules and needs of workers union, and explain the contribution from workers union in

organisation management. This course will touch on the process, rules and approach in industrial relation

related to peace negotiation and making collective decision, settling clash and conflict, trial and actions based

on regulations. This course will also discuss on the causes of conflict in organisation, e.g. salary payment,

discipline, dissatisfaction on working condition and work assignment. Besides that, the course will also

emphasize on the influence of factors, e.g. economic factor, social, politics and government functions in

enact rules and regulations for market, work and trial. Student will be given case study as an exposure so that

the student will understand more and can analyse the process and cases in industrial relations.

References

Budd, J.W. and Scoville, J.G. 2005. The Ethics of Human Resources and Industrial Relations. Cornell Univ Pr.

Chen, Voon Shian. 2007. Industrial Relations Skills for Managers: Featuring Employment Laws, Trade Unions

and Industrial relations. CCH Asia Pte Limited. Singapore.

Colling, T. and Terry, M. (eds.) 2010. Industrial Relations: Theory & Practice. 3rd ed. Wiley-Blackwell. West Sussex. 608pp.

Edwards. P. 2003. Industrial Relations: Theory and Practice (Industrial Relations). Blackwell Publishing Ltd.

USA.

Kelly, M.A. 2007. Labor and Industrial Relations: Terms, Laws, Court Decisions, and Arbitration Standards.

Johns Hopkins University Press.

Morley, M.J., Gunnigle, P. and Collings, D.G. (Editors). 2006. Global Industrial Relations.

Routledge. Salamon, M. 1998. Industrial Relations: Theory and Practice. 3rd Edition. Prentice Hall

Europe. Hertfordshire.

FX30803 MANAGEMENT OF QUALITY

Quality management is one important aspect in the production of goods and services. This course will discuss

the formation process of quality management practices in an organization. Among the topic to be discussed

are Quality Certification Process such as IS0 9000, 14000 and also methods to improve the quality in

products or services. Case studies will be discussed and disclosed with the students, such as document

statements quality. This eventually will make students understand more on quality management.

References:

David C. 1994. The Service Quality Solution. New York: Irwin Professional Publishing: ASQC Quality Press.

Edwards D.W. 1993. Improvement of Quality and Productivity Through Action by Management. National

Productivity Review Vol 1, no. Pp12-22.

Evans, J.R. and Lindsay, W.M. 1998. The Management and Control of Quality. South Western Publisher.

synopsis course -...

Documents